JP6603393B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine used for a gaming machine capable of performing a predetermined game.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine is provided with a number of circuit boards such as a game control board (circuit board) for controlling a game. A control microcomputer including a CPU, a RAM, a ROM, and the like is mounted on the circuit board, and a program (game control program) for controlling the progress of the game is stored in the ROM. When the mounted microcomputer is replaced with a microcomputer in which a malicious program is written, it becomes possible to illegally pay out prizes.

  For example, when a game value is given to a player in a big hit game state or the like, it is easy for the player to obtain a prize. Therefore, there is an act of modifying the game control program executed by the CPU so that “big hit” is likely to occur. In order to prevent game control and the like from being executed by a modified illegal program, a microcomputer generally has a security check function for determining whether or not the program is valid. The microcomputer is configured not to execute the game control program or the like if the security check function determines that the program is not valid.

  However, an illegal act such as removing a legitimate microcomputer with a built-in program and installing a microcomputer with a built-in fraudulent program that easily generates a big hit is conceivable. In a microcomputer incorporating such a malicious program, the security check function does not exist, or even if it exists, it is modified so that the malicious program is determined as a legitimate program. Therefore, there is a possibility that a game due to an unauthorized program cannot be prevented only by the security check function.

  Therefore, when this type of circuit board is stored in a substrate case composed of a base body (first covering body) and a cover body (second covering body) and is opened by applying a seal seal, There is one in which it is possible to easily find out that there is a possibility that an illegal act has been performed on a circuit board by making the sealing state so that a trace remains.

  As a gaming machine equipped with this type of board case, an IC chip unit storing identification information such as a unique ID and an electronic tag including an antenna unit are sealed with a sealing seal embedded therein. By performing a reading operation of the identification information stored in the IC chip unit by a reading device such as a reader device, after the substrate case is opened and replaced with an unauthorized circuit board, an illegal act such as attaching a forged seal sticker is performed. Some of them were able to confirm whether or not they occurred without visual observation (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-17914 A

  As in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned Patent Document 1, when a sealed state is set by a seal seal, the substrate case is opened by peeling off the seal seal to which a third party has been attached using, for example, a solvent. In some cases, it may not be possible to determine that the board case has been opened. there were.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and it is easy to determine that the substrate case has been opened even if the seal seal attached to the substrate case is peeled off and then attached again. An object is to provide a gaming machine that can be used.

In order to solve the above problems, a gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game,
There are a plurality of specific areas for allowing game media to pass through and providing game value based on the game media passing through,
A circuit board;
Wiring to electrically connect the circuit board;
A circuit board case for storing the circuit board;
A sealing seal used for sealing the substrate case;
Control means provided on the circuit board;
With
The seal seal is
A solvent use specific part that leaves a trace of the use of the solvent when a predetermined solvent for reducing the adhesive strength of the seal is used;
A first identification information display unit in which the identification information of the seal seal is displayed so as to be visually readable, and a second identification information display that can be read by a predetermined reader by encoding the identification information of the seal seal. And
When the seal seal is affixed to the substrate case, the solvent use specific part is disposed in a portion that does not overlap the wiring,
The substrate case has a seal sticker attaching portion having a plurality of attaching surfaces,
The second identification information display unit is arranged in a portion not located at a boundary portion between one pasting surface and another pasting surface when the seal sticker is pasted across the plurality of pasting surfaces,
When the seal sticker is pasted so as to straddle the plurality of pasting surfaces, the solvent use specifying unit and the second identification information display unit are arranged in a part corresponding to one pasting surface,
The control means can output a signal that can specify the passage of a game medium to a specific area.
It is characterized by that.
In addition, the gaming machine of the other invention of the present application ,
A gaming machine capable of performing a predetermined game (for example, slot machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 1001),
A plurality of circuit boards;
Wiring for electrically connecting a plurality of circuit boards;
A board case having a first member (for example, base member 201 / base member 1201) and a second member (for example, cover member 202 / cover member 1202) for accommodating a circuit board (for example, game control board 40 / main board 1031) (For example, substrate case 200 / substrate case 1200);
A sealing seal (for example, a sealing seal) used to bring the first member and the second member into a sealed state (for example, a second sealed state in which a trace is left when the substrate case is opened). 400 / sealing seal 1400),
A first member side seal seal affixing part (for example, base side seal part 229 / base side seal part 1229) provided on the first member;
A second member side seal seal affixing part (for example, cover side seal part 224 / cover side seal part 1224) provided on the second member;
With
The seal seal is
When a predetermined solvent for reducing the adhesive strength of the seal seal is used, the displayed content disappears. Formed solvent use indicator 450A-450D / solvent use indicator 1450A-1450D),
The first member side seal seal affixing portion and the second member side seal seal affixed when the seal seal is affixed across the first member side seal seal affixing portion and the second member side seal seal affixing portion The solvent changing portion is disposed at a portion not located at a boundary portion (for example, the boundary portion Z) with the pasting portion (for example, as shown in FIG. 15A, the seal seal 400 is pasted on the substrate case 200). The solvent use display portions 450A to 450D are sometimes printed at positions that do not hang over the boundary portion Z. As shown in FIG. Solvent use display portions 1450A to 1450D are printed at positions not hung on Z).
The solvent changing portion is arranged in a portion that does not overlap the wiring when the seal seal is affixed to the substrate case.

According to this feature, when the solvent is used to reduce the adhesive strength of the seal, the display content disappears when the solvent is used in the solvent change part of the seal. As a result, it can be understood that the adhesive strength of the seal seal has been reduced. Since it does not hang on the boundary part, for example, the solvent changing part breaks by breaking the seal seal and opening the board case for inspection of the circuit board etc. It is prevented that it becomes difficult to understand that is used.
The gaming machine of means 1a of the present invention is the gaming machine according to claim 1,
The seal seal is
A first identification information display unit on which identification information for specifying the seal sticker is displayed;
A second identification information display unit displayed by encoding the identification information;
Further comprising
The first identification information display part and the second identification information display part are ones whose display contents do not disappear when the predetermined solvent is used.

The game board of means 1 of the present invention is the game board according to claim 1,
A predetermined portion (for example, four corners) of the seal seal (for example, the seal seal 400 / the seal seal 1400) has a weak portion (for example, a corner side cut 408 / corner side) where the strength of the seal seal is lower than the other portions. A notch 1408) is provided.

  According to this feature, since the fragile portion is easily broken when the seal seal is peeled off, it is possible to suppress an illegal act such as reattaching the seal seal peeled off by the solvent.

The game board of means 2 of the present invention is the game board according to claim 1 or means 1,
The seal seal (for example, the seal seal 400 / the seal seal 1400) includes a first identification information display unit (for example, identification information (for example, a serial number) that can identify each seal seal is displayed so as to be visually readable. For example, the first identification information display unit 451 / first identification information display unit 1451) and identification information (for example, a two-dimensional bar code) that can identify each sealed seal are encoded to obtain a predetermined reading device. And a second identification information display unit (for example, second identification information display unit 452 / second identification information display unit 1452) that can be read at the same time.

  According to this feature, the second identification information display unit that can be read only by a predetermined reading device is provided separately from the first identification information display unit. Is difficult to read and it takes time to forge the seal seal, so that the security is improved.

The game board of means 3 of the present invention is the game board according to any one of claim 1, means 1, and means 2,
Of the first cover side seal seal sticking part (for example, base side seal part 229 / base side seal part 1229) and the second cover side seal seal sticking part (for example, cover side seal part 224 / cover side seal part 1224) Around the periphery, peripheral wall portions (for example, ridges 411, 421 / ridges 1411, 1421) are formed so as to surround the periphery of the stuck seal.

  According to this feature, when the seal seal is peeled off, the surrounding peripheral wall portion becomes obstructive and difficult to peel off. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an illegal act such as reattaching the seal seal peeled off by the solvent.

The game board of the means 4 of the present invention is the game board according to any one of claims 1 and 1-3,
The seal seal (for example, the seal seal 400 / the seal seal 1400) has an electronic tag that can read identification information (for example, a serial number) that can identify each seal seal by a predetermined electromagnetic wave. .

  According to this feature, since it is necessary to use a predetermined electromagnetic wave in order to read the identification information, it becomes time-consuming to forge the seal seal, so that the security is improved.

The game board of means 5 of the present invention is:
A game board (for example, game board 1006) capable of performing a predetermined game,
Main control means (for example, main CPU 41a, CPU 1056) that communicate with payout control means provided in a game frame (for example, game frame 1100) to which the game board can be attached;
A first cover (for example, base member 201 / base member 1201) and a second cover (for example, cover member 202 /) for accommodating a circuit board (for example, game control board 40 / main board 1031) having the main control means. A substrate case made of a cover member 1202) (for example, substrate case 200 / substrate case 1200);
Sealing seal (for example, a second sealing state in which the first covering body and the second covering body are closed so as to leave a trace when the substrate case is opened) (for example, Sealing seal 400 / sealing seal 1400),
With
The seal seal is
When a predetermined solvent is used to reduce the adhesive strength of the seal seal, a solvent use indicator that shows a trace of the use of the solvent (for example, dissolved in the stripping liquid by contact with the predetermined stripping liquid) Solvent use display portions 450A to 450D / solvent use display portions 1450A to 1450D) printed with special ink.
Mounting surface (for example, mounting surface 40a) on which the control microcomputer {for example, main control unit 41 (CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, I / O port 41d)} is mounted on the circuit board when pasted to the substrate case. The solvent use indicator is disposed in a portion facing in the same direction (for example, as shown in FIG. 15A, the seal seal 400 is the same as the mounting surface 40a when attached to the substrate case 200). The solvent use indicator 450A is disposed in the upper region R1 that is the portion facing the direction (upward))
It is characterized by that.

  According to this feature, when an attempt is made to reduce the adhesive strength of the seal seal using a solvent, a trace of the use of the solvent remains on the solvent use display portion of the seal seal. Since it becomes clear that the adhesive strength of the seal seal has been reduced, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as reapplying the seal seal peeled off by the solvent, and the mounting surface of the solvent use indicator and the control microcomputer Since both of them can be visually recognized together, it is possible to easily perform a fraud confirmation operation on the solvent use display unit and the control microcomputer, so that the work load can be reduced.

The game board of means 6 of the present invention is:
A game board (for example, game board 1006) capable of performing a predetermined game,
Main control means (for example, main CPU 41a, CPU 1056) that communicate with payout control means provided in a game frame (for example, game frame 1100) to which the game board can be attached;
A first cover (for example, base member 201 / base member 1201) and a second cover (for example, cover member 202 /) for accommodating a circuit board (for example, game control board 40 / main board 1031) having the main control means. A substrate case made of a cover member 1202) (for example, substrate case 200 / substrate case 1200);
Sealing seal (for example, a second sealing state in which the first covering body and the second covering body are closed so as to leave a trace when the substrate case is opened) (for example, Sealing seal 400 / sealing seal 1400),
With
The seal seal is a solvent use indicator (for example, by contacting with a predetermined stripping solution) that shows a trace of the solvent being used when a predetermined solvent is used to reduce the adhesive strength of the seal seal. Solvent use display portions 450A to 450D / solvent use display portions 1450A to 1450D) printed with special ink dissolved in the stripping solution,
The game board further includes a seal seal covering member (for example, a seal protection cover 228 / seal protection cover 1228) capable of covering a seal seal affixed to the board case.

  According to this feature, when an attempt is made to reduce the adhesive strength of the seal seal using a solvent, a trace of the use of the solvent remains on the solvent use display portion of the seal seal. Since it becomes clear that the adhesive strength of the seal seal has been reduced, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as reattaching the seal seal peeled off by the solvent, and the seal seal is covered with the seal seal covering member. In order to peel off the seal seal, it is necessary to remove the seal seal covering member, and it takes time and effort, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

The game board of means 7 of the present invention is:
A game board (for example, game board 1006) capable of performing a predetermined game,
Main control means (for example, main CPU 41a, CPU 1056) that communicate with payout control means provided in a game frame (for example, game frame 1100) to which the game board can be attached;
A first cover (for example, base member 201 / base member 1201) and a second cover (for example, cover member 202 /) for accommodating a circuit board (for example, game control board 40 / main board 1031) having the main control means. A substrate case made of a cover member 1202) (for example, substrate case 200 / substrate case 1200);
Sealing seal (for example, a second sealing state in which the first covering body and the second covering body are closed so as to leave a trace when the substrate case is opened) (for example, Sealing seal 400 / sealing seal 1400),
With
The substrate case has a plurality of application surfaces (for example, a rear application surface 229a, a lower right application surface 229b, a front application surface 224a, an upper right application surface 224b / a front application surface 1229a, a lower right application surface 1229b, an upper right image). A seal seal sticking part (for example, base side seal part 229, cover side seal part 224 / base side seal part 1229, cover side seal part 1224) having a sticking surface 1224b),
The seal seal is
When a predetermined solvent is used to reduce the adhesive strength of the seal seal, a solvent use indicator that shows a trace of the use of the solvent (for example, dissolved in the stripping liquid by contact with the predetermined stripping liquid) Solvent use display portions 450A to 450D / solvent use display portions 1450A to 1450D) printed with special ink.
Corners formed between one pasting surface and the other pasting surface when pasted so as to straddle the plurality of pasting surfaces (for example, formed between the rear pasting surface 229a and the lower right pasting surface 229b) The corner C1, the corner C2 formed between the front pasting surface 224a and the upper right pasting surface 224b / the corner C10 formed between the front pasting surface 1229a and the lower right pasting surface 1229b) The solvent use indicator is disposed in the portion (for example, as shown in FIG. 15A, the seal sticker 400 is placed at a position where it does not hang over the corners C1 and C2 when being attached to the substrate case 200. Used display portions 450A to 450D are printed / As shown in FIG.30, the seal seal 1400 is provided with solvent use display portions 1450A to 1450D at positions where the seal sticker 1400 is not applied to the corner portion C10 when being attached to the substrate case 1200. Have been printed.)
It is characterized by that.

  According to this feature, when an attempt is made to reduce the adhesive strength of the seal seal using a solvent, a trace of the use of the solvent remains on the solvent use display portion of the seal seal. Since it becomes clear that the adhesive strength of the sealing seal has been reduced, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as reattaching the sealing seal peeled off by the solvent, and the solvent use indicator when the sticker is attached to the substrate case. Since it is not hung on a corner | angular part, it can prevent that the visibility of a solvent use display part is impaired.

The game board of the means 8 of the present invention is:
A game board (for example, game board 1006) capable of performing a predetermined game,
Main control means (for example, main CPU 41a, CPU 1056) that communicate with payout control means provided in a game frame (for example, game frame 1100) to which the game board can be attached;
A first cover (for example, base member 201 / base member 1201) and a second cover (for example, cover member 202 /) for accommodating a circuit board (for example, game control board 40 / main board 1031) having the main control means. A substrate case made of a cover member 1202) (for example, substrate case 200 / substrate case 1200);
Sealing seal (for example, a second sealing state in which the first covering body and the second covering body are closed so as to leave a trace when the substrate case is opened) (for example, Sealing seal 400 / sealing seal 1400),
With
The seal seal is
When a predetermined solvent is used to reduce the adhesive strength of the seal seal, a solvent use indicator that shows a trace of the use of the solvent (for example, dissolved in the stripping liquid by contact with the predetermined stripping liquid) Solvent use display portions 450A to 450D / solvent use display portions 1450A to 1450D) printed with special ink
An identification information display unit (for example, a first identification information display unit 451 / first identification information display unit 1451, a first identification information display unit) on which identification information (for example, a serial number or a two-dimensional barcode) that can identify each seal is displayed. 2 identification information display part 452 / second identification information display part 1452),
The solvent use display portion and the identification information display portion are arranged in portions facing the same direction when attached to the substrate case (for example, as shown in FIG. The solvent use display portion 450A, the first identification information display portion 451, and the second identification information display portion 452 are disposed in the upper region R1, which is a portion that faces the same direction (upward) when attached to the substrate case 200. 30A, the seal seal 1400 is provided in the solvent use display portions 1450A to 1450D in the upper region R10 that is a portion facing the same direction (upward) when being attached to the substrate case 1200. And a first identification information display unit 1451 and a second identification information display unit 1452 as the identification information display unit are arranged)
It is characterized by that.

  According to this feature, when an attempt is made to reduce the adhesive strength of the seal seal using a solvent, a trace of the use of the solvent remains on the solvent use display portion of the seal seal. Since it becomes clear that the adhesive strength of the seal seal has been reduced, fraudulent acts such as reattaching the seal seal peeled off by the solvent can be suppressed, and both the solvent use indicator and the identification information indicator can be used together. Since it is possible to easily check the solvent use display unit and the identification information display unit, the work load can be reduced.

The game board of means 9 of the present invention is:
A game board (for example, game board 1006) capable of performing a predetermined game,
A plurality of electrical components (for example, various switches, sensors, solenoids, motors, LEDs, etc.) installed on the back side of the game board (for example, the back side of the game board 1006);
Wiring (for example, cables 600a to 600c, 600k / cable 1700) for electrically connecting the plurality of electrical components;
Main control means (for example, main CPU 41a, CPU 1056) that communicate with payout control means provided in a game frame (for example, game frame 1100) to which the game board can be attached;
A first cover (for example, base member 201 / base member 1201) and a second cover (for example, cover member 202 /) for accommodating a circuit board (for example, game control board 40 / main board 1031) having the main control means. A substrate case made of a cover member 1202) (for example, substrate case 200 / substrate case 1200);
Sealing seal (for example, a second sealing state in which the first covering body and the second covering body are closed so as to leave a trace when the substrate case is opened) (for example, Sealing seal 400 / sealing seal 1400),
With
The seal seal is
When a predetermined solvent is used to reduce the adhesive strength of the seal seal, a solvent use indicator that shows a trace of the use of the solvent (for example, dissolved in the stripping liquid by contact with the predetermined stripping liquid) Solvent use display portions 450A to 450D / solvent use display portions 1450A to 1450D) printed with special ink.
The solvent use indicator is disposed in a portion that does not overlap the wiring when pasted on the substrate case (for example, as shown in FIG. 14, the seal seal 400 is pasted on the substrate case 200). The sealing / sealing seal 1400 disposed at or near the straight line connecting the board-side connector of the game control board 40 and the wiring holding part such as the wiring hook HF or the reel relay board 120 is attached to the board case 1200. (It is arranged at a position where it does not overlap with or near the straight line connecting the board-side connector of the main board 1031 and the wiring holding part such as the wiring insertion part 1750)
It is characterized by that.

  According to this feature, when an attempt is made to reduce the adhesive strength of the seal seal using a solvent, a trace of the use of the solvent remains on the solvent use display portion of the seal seal. Since it becomes clear that the adhesive strength of the seal seal has been reduced, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as reapplying the seal seal that has been peeled off by the solvent, and the solvent usage display portion is not hidden by the wiring. Therefore, the visibility of the solvent use display unit is prevented from being impaired.

It is a front view of the slot machine as Example 1 to which the present invention is applied. It is an internal structure figure of a slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is the schematic which shows the wiring connection state of the game control board and the electrical component for games connected to this game control board. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the attachment condition of the case support apparatus and board | substrate case with respect to a housing | casing. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of a substrate case. It is a figure which shows a base member. It is a figure which shows a cover member. It is a perspective view which shows the board | substrate case with which the cover member and the base member were assembled | attached. (A) is AA sectional drawing of FIG. 9, (b) is BB sectional drawing of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows a movable base. (A) is a front view which shows the state by which the substrate case was attached to the case support apparatus, (b) is a side view of (a). (A) is FF sectional drawing of FIG. 12, (b) is GG sectional drawing of FIG. (A) is a perspective view which shows the state in which a board | substrate case exists in a 1st rotation control position, (b) is the state in which a substrate case exists in a 2nd rotation control position. (A) is a front view showing a seal seal, (b) is a state in which ink is dissolved, and (c) is a sectional view taken along line KK in (a). (A) is an expansion perspective view which shows the state which looked at the sealing part from diagonally forward, (b) is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state which looked at the sealing part from diagonally back. (A) is an enlarged front view showing the periphery of the seal, (b) is a side view, and (c) is a rear view. It is RR sectional drawing of Fig.17 (a). It is TT sectional drawing of FIG. It is a front view which shows a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view which shows a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of a main board case. It is a figure which shows a base member. It is a figure which shows a cover member. It is a perspective view which shows the main board | substrate case with which the cover member and the base member were assembled | attached. (A) is a left view which shows the state which sealed the sealing part of the main board case, (b) is a front view which shows the sealing part of the main board case. (A) is a perspective view which shows a seal | sticker protection cover, (b) is XX sectional drawing of (a), (c) is WW sectional drawing of (a). (A) is VV sectional drawing of FIG. 27, (b) is YY sectional drawing of (a). (A) is a front view which shows the structure of a seal seal, (b) is a rear view which shows the state which the ink melt | dissolved, (c) is KK sectional drawing of (a). It is a front view which shows a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit used for a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the notification process of the operating / non-operating information from a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in the card unit side and the pachinko machine side, and its transmission / reception. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response which are transmitted / received between a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko machine at the time of power activation. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a card is inserted in a card unit. It is a flowchart figure which shows the process at the time of insertion which a card unit performs when a card | curd is inserted in a card unit. It is a conceptual diagram for explaining the relationship between a CU state and a card insertion state included in a card insertion notification command and a state information request command. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when lending a ball from the prepaid balance of the inserted card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when paying out a lot of balls and paying out a stored ball. It is a figure which shows an example of the normal process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when counting game balls. It is a sequence diagram for demonstrating the process of the count history data memorize | stored by P units. It is a figure which shows an example of the count process when a player performs card return operation. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the status information request | requirement from a card unit to a pachinko machine has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows an example of the process which reads the count log | history memorize | stored in P units to CU. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the historical information (machine history information) from the shipment of the game machine which concerns on this embodiment to disposal. It is a figure which shows the detail of the flow until shipping information is registered into the machine history management center which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of shipping information. It is a figure which shows the detail of the flow until installation information is registered into the machine history management center which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the content of the installation information input into a machine history management center in FIG. It is a figure which shows the flow until removal information is registered into the machine history management center which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow until discard information is registered into the machine history management center which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the content of the discard information input into a machine history management center. It is the schematic for demonstrating the history management of the front frame and game board which concern on this embodiment. It is the schematic of the table which memorize | stores the information of a frame, and the information of a game board, in order to perform machine history management of a front frame and a game board. 10 is a flowchart for explaining abnormality determination processing for management of a front frame and a game board by a machine history management center. It is a figure explaining the table referred with the flowchart shown in FIG. It is the schematic for demonstrating the communication performed between a main control part, the payout control part, and communication control IC. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the communication control circuit for carrying out encryption communication with the payout control part. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the communication control circuit for carrying out encryption communication with the main control part. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the communication control circuit for carrying out encryption communication with communication control IC. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a recovery completion confirmation process. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response which are transmitted / received between the main control part and the payout control part. It is a figure which shows the communication sequence between a main control part and a payout control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power-off and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the game state notification from the main control part to the payout control part has not reached | attained. It is a figure for demonstrating the mechanism of a detection when P stand connected to the game board development jig is connected to commercial CU by unit exchange. It is a figure for demonstrating the mechanism of a detection when P stand connected to CU for development is connected to commercial CU by unit exchange. It is a figure for demonstrating the mechanism of a detection when a game machine simulator is connected to commercial CU. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the front door of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in each of a card unit and a slot machine, and its transmission / reception aspect.

Examples of the present invention will be described below.
[Example 1]
Embodiment 1 of a slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. A slot machine 1, which is an example of a gaming machine of the present invention, includes a housing 1a having an open front, and the housing 1a from the front. The front door 1b is pivotally supported on the front end side on the left side as viewed, and can open and close the front opening of the housing 1a.

  Inside the casing 1a of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, reels 2L, 2C and 2R (hereinafter referred to as a left reel, a middle reel and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery. ) Are juxtaposed in the horizontal direction, and as shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R can be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door 1b. Are arranged as follows.

  On the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, “Black 7”, “White 7”, “BAR”, “Replay”, “Bell”, “Watermelon”, “Black Cherry”, “White Cherry”, “ A plurality of types of mutually distinguishable symbols such as “net cherry” and “orange” are drawn in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and are rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 3), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously provided in the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that detect a reference position for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and a reel LED 55 that irradiates the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the back side. , Is provided. The reel LED 55 includes 12 LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and can irradiate each symbol independently.

  A display area 51a of a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1) is disposed at a position on the front side (player side) of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 1b. The liquid crystal display 51 has a normally white liquid crystal panel having transparency in a state where no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element, and a transmissive region 51b corresponding to the see-through window 3 of the display region 51a. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be visually recognized from the player side through the see-through window 3. Further, a backlight (not shown) for irradiating the display area 51a from behind is provided on the back surface of the display area 51a excluding the transmissive area 51b, and the back surface further has a concealing member for concealing the inside. (Not shown) is provided.

  On the front door 1b, a medal insertion unit 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a game value owned by the player) are used for one medal. A single bet switch 5 that is operated when setting the bet number, and using a credit, the maximum bet number (a game in this embodiment) among a specified number of bets determined in accordance with the game state within the range. 1 when the state is a regular bonus (big bonus), 3 when setting a replay time (hereinafter abbreviated as RT), a MAXBET switch 6 that is operated, and medal and bet numbers stored as credits. When the game is started, the settlement switch 10 is operated when the medals used for setting are settled (the medals used for setting credits and bets are returned). Start switch 7 is created, the reel 2L, 2C, stop switch 8L is operated to stop each rotation of the 2R, 8C, 8R, but are provided operable by the player.

  The front door 1b also displays a credit indicator 11 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals acquired in a big bonus, which will be described later, and an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs. A game auxiliary display 12 and a payout display 13 for displaying the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a winning are provided.

  Further, on the front door 1b, 1BETLED 14 that notifies that the bet number is set to 1 by lighting, 2BETLED 15 that notifies that the bet number is set to 2, and 3 bets are set. 3BET LED 16 to notify when lit, insertion request LED 17 to notify that a medal can be inserted is lit, start valid LED 18 to notify that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, wait (previous Waiting state LED 19 for informing that it is in the state of waiting for the start of reel rotation since a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start of the game, during replay informing that it is in the replay game described later An LED 20 is provided.

  Inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 3) for notifying that the betting number setting operation by the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is effective. Inside the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R for informing that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effective by lighting (FIG. 3) is provided.

  Inside the front door 1b, there is a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for releasing an error state described later and a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, while changing a set value and confirming a set value described later. A set value display 24 for displaying the set value at that time, and a flow path of medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 on the side of a hopper tank 34a (see FIG. 2) described later provided in the housing 1a or A medal selector having a insertion medal sensor 31 for detecting a medal that is inserted from the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the medal insertion unit 4 and selectively flows to the hopper tank 34a side to selectively switch to one of the medal payout exits 9 side. The door opening detection switch 25 (refer FIG. 3) which detects the open state of the front door 1b is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a reel sensor 33L that can detect the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, as shown in FIG. , 33C, 33R (see FIG. 3), an external output board 1000 for outputting an external output signal, a hopper tank 34a for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion section 4, and a hopper tank 34a. A hopper unit 34 including a hopper motor 34b for paying out medals from the medal payout opening 9, a payout sensor 34c for detecting medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b, and a power supply box 100 are provided.

  In addition, a board case 200 in which a game control board 40 (to be described later) is accommodated on the inner surface upper part of the back plate 1c constituting the housing 1a is not visible on the back surface 40b side of the electronic component mounting surface 40a of the game control board 40. The first rotation restriction position A (first position, see FIG. 14A) and the second rotation restriction position B (second position, FIG. 14B where the back surface 40b side of the game control board 40 becomes visible. ))). The detailed structure of the substrate case 200 will be described later.

  On the side of the hopper unit 34, an overflow tank 35 is provided for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full sensor 35 a made up of a pair of electrically conductive members spaced apart from each other and provided at a height capable of detecting a predetermined amount of stored medals is provided. It is possible to detect that the medal storage amount stored in the inside when it is conductive by contacting through the medal stored in the inside exceeds a predetermined amount, that is, that the overflow tank is full. It has become.

  On the front surface of the power supply box 100 is a stop for selecting whether to enable / disable the stop function that controls the stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) at the end of a big bonus, which will be described later. Switch 36a, for selecting the validity / invalidity of the automatic settlement function for controlling automatic settlement processing (processing for returning (returning) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) at the end of a big bonus, which will be described later It functions as an automatic settlement switch 36b, a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and functions as a reset switch for canceling an error state or a stop state in a normal state. A reset / setting switch that functions as a setting switch to change the setting value of the winning probability (race rate) of the lottery 38, the power switch 39 is provided which is operated to ON / OFF the power.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using credits. In order to use credits, the single BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the pay lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 1) become effective, and the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, that is, the game can be started. It becomes a state. In the present embodiment, as the specified number of bets, one game state is determined for the regular bonus (big bonus) and three for the normal game state. In addition, when a medal is inserted exceeding the maximum number out of the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether a combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning symbol combination. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the winning line L1 set across the symbols arranged in the middle of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and the symbols arranged in the upper row of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R are straddled. The winning line L2, the winning line L3, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the lower stage of the reel 2R, that is, the lower side of the reel 2R, that is set across the symbols arranged in the lower stage of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. There are five types of winning lines L4 set across straddling symbols, the lower line of reel 2L, the middle part of reel 2C, the upper part of reel 2R, that is, the winning line L5 set straddling the symbols lined up to the right. It is defined as.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  When one of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) is set on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5. When the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped as a display result, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). If a combination of symbols with a medal payout is arranged on a plurality of activated pay lines, the total number of payouts determined for each of the symbol combinations arranged on the activated pay line is totaled. The total number of medals is awarded to the player. However, an upper limit (15 in this embodiment) is set for the number of medals to be awarded in one game, and when the total number of medals exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of medals is awarded. It will be. In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5, a game corresponding to the combination of symbols Transition to the state.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 3, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The production according to the control is controlled, and the power supply board 101 generates the drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies them to each part.

  The power supply board 101 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and a DC voltage necessary for driving the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated from the AC100V power supply. The game control board 40 and the game control board 40 It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the.

  Further, the above-described hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, stop switch 36a, automatic checkout switch 36b, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply board 101. Yes.

  On the game control board 40, the one-sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the insertion medal sensor 31, the door opening detection switch 25, The reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected, and the above-described payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, stop switch 36a, automatic settlement switch 36b, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply board 101. Are connected, and the detection signals of these connected switches are inputted.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the payout display 13, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 20, and the BET. The switch effective LED 21, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are connected to each other, and are described above via the power supply board 101. The hopper motor 34b is connected, and these electric components are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 (described later) mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 includes a microcomputer having a main CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d. The main control unit 41 controls the game, and random numbers in a predetermined range (0 to 65535 in this embodiment). A random number circuit 42 for generating a signal, a pulse oscillator 43 for supplying a clock signal of a constant frequency to the random number circuit 42, and a detection signal input from a switch connected directly to the game control board 40 or via the power supply board 101. Switch detection circuit 44, motor drive circuit 45 that controls the drive of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, solenoid drive circuit 46 that controls the drive of the flow path switching solenoid 30, various displays and LEDs connected to the game control board 40 LED drive circuit 47 for controlling the driving of the power supply power supplied to the slot machine 1 When a voltage drop is detected, a power interruption detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 41, when the power is turned on or when an initialization command is not input from the main CPU 41a In addition, a reset circuit 49 for supplying a reset signal to the main CPU 41a and other electronic components such as various devices and circuits are mounted.

  The main CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41b, and performs processing related to the progress of the game. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the game control board 40 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the main CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area when the main CPU 41a executes a program. The I / O port 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the main control unit 41.

  Further, the main control unit 41 is supplied with backup power even during a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 41c is held while the backup power is being supplied.

  The main CPU 41a repeatedly loops the process according to the control state until the detection state of the various switches connected to the game control board 40 is changed as a basic process, and step by step according to the change of the detection state of the various switches. Execute the process to move to. Further, the main CPU 41a has an interrupt function as described above, and can interrupt the basic process by the occurrence of the interrupt and execute the interrupt process. The voltage output from the power interruption detection circuit 48 The power interruption interrupt process (main) is executed in response to the input of the decrease signal, and the timer interrupt process (main) is executed at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment). In addition, the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (main) is set to a time longer than the sum of the time required to complete the repeated process according to the control state in the basic process and the execution time of the timer interrupt process (main) Therefore, the process that is repeated according to the control state between the current and next timer interrupt processes (main) is completed at least once.

  The main CPU 41a transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O port 41d. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40. The transmission line of the command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is composed of a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 80. The game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not directly connected.

  The effect control board 90 is connected to effect devices such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1), an effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 described above, which are arranged on the front door 1b of the slot machine 1. These effect devices are driven based on control by a later-described sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90.

  In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 controls the output of the effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED 55. However, in addition to the sub-control unit 91, an output control unit that directly controls the output of the effect device is mounted on the effect control board 90 or another board, and the sub-control unit 91 is based on a command from the main control unit 41. The output control unit may determine the output pattern of the effect device, and the output control unit may control the output of the effect device based on the output pattern determined by the sub control unit 91. In such a configuration, the sub control unit 91 and the output control may be performed. The output control of the rendering device is performed by both of the units.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51, the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 are exemplified as the effect device, but the effect device is not limited to these, for example, a mechanically driven display. A device or a mechanically driven item may be applied as the effect device.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the effect control board 90 includes a sub CPU 91a, ROM 91b, RAM 91c, and a microcomputer provided with an I / O port 91d. The sub control unit 91 controls the effect, and the effect control board 90. A display control circuit 92 that performs display control of the liquid crystal display 51 connected to the LED, an LED driving circuit 93 that performs drive control of the effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 that controls audio output from the speakers 53 and 54, Supplied to a reset circuit 95 that gives a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a when the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not inputted for a certain period of time, a clock device 97 that outputs time information including date information and time information, and a slot machine 1 The power supply voltage is monitored, and when a voltage drop is detected, this is indicated The power interruption detection circuit 98 that outputs a pressure drop signal to the sub CPU 91a, other circuits, and the like are mounted. The sub CPU 91a receives a command transmitted from the game control board 40 and performs an effect. While performing various controls, each part of the control circuit mounted on the effect control board 90 is controlled directly or indirectly.

  Similar to the main CPU 41a, the sub CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function). One of the interrupt terminals of the sub control unit 91 is connected to a strobe (INT) signal line that is output when the main control unit 41 transmits a command, among the command transmission lines, and the sub CPU 91a receives the strobe signal. An interrupt is generated based on the input to acquire a command from the main control unit 41 and execute a command reception interrupt process to be stored in the buffer. Further, the sub CPU 91a executes an interrupt process (sub) to be described later by generating an interrupt every time the number of clock inputs reaches a certain number, that is, every certain interval. One of the interrupt terminals of the sub-control unit 91 is connected to the power interruption detection circuit 98, and the sub CPU 91a responds to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power interruption detection circuit 98. Execute processing (sub). Further, when an unused interrupt occurs in the sub CPU 91a, an unused interrupt process for immediately returning to the original process is executed.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 91c is held while the backup power is supplied.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, various boards such as the game control board 40 provided with the main control unit 41 for controlling the game are mounted as described above, and these boards are shown in FIG. As described above, electrical components such as switches that can be operated by a player are connected via a cable.

  As described above, on the game control board 40, the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the insertion medal sensor 31, the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, and the reel sensor 33L. 33C, 33R, a hopper motor 34b, a payout sensor 34c, and an effect control board 90 are connected.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the start switch 7 is connected to the game control board 40 by wiring, and the one-sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the insertion medal sensor 31, and the door open. The detection switch 25 is connected to the game control board 40 via the operation unit relay board 110, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R and the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R are used for game control via the reel relay board 120. The hopper motor 34b and the payout sensor 34c are connected to the game control board 40 via the power supply board 101, and the effect control board 90 is connected to the game control board 40 via the effect relay board 80. And wired connection.

  The operation unit relay board 110, the reel relay board 120, the power supply board 101, and the effect control board 90 are provided with wiring patterns (not shown) for connecting the game control board 40 and each electrical component. The detection signal output from the component to the game control board 40 or the power or signal supplied (input) from the game control board 40 can be relayed.

  In this way, the relay boards 110, 120, 100, and 80 in which the various electrical components except the start switch 7 and the game control board 40 are attached to the main body of the slot machine 1 (the casing 1a in the present embodiment) at predetermined positions are attached. By connecting via the wiring, it is easy to organize wiring from the game control board 40 to a plurality of electrical components individually arranged at predetermined positions of the main body of the slot machine 1, and the connector connection portion is always connected to the relay board. Or, it will be provided on the game control board 40, so that the connector connection portion of each electric component is fixed, so that the connector connection portion may be searched at the time of wiring connection work, or the type of wiring to be connected may be wrong. Is prevented.

  Single BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, insertion medal sensor 31, reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R, hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c Is an electrical component that inputs and outputs signals relating to the progress of the game to and from the game control board 40. The signal related to the progress of the game is, for example, an operation for setting the number of bets to make the game startable, an operation for starting the game, or an operation for deriving the display results of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Such as signals output to the game control board 40 in accordance with the progress of the game, detection of inserted medals, detection of the reference position of the reels, detection of the payout medals, etc., output from the electrical components for gaming according to the progress of the game And a signal input to the game control board 40, a drive signal for driving the reels 2L, 2C, 2R according to the detection of the start operation, and a hopper for paying out medals when a winning occurs. A signal that is output from the game control board 40 in accordance with the progress of the game and that is input to the game electrical component, such as a drive signal.

  These gaming electrical components are a first electrical component that outputs a signal to the game control board 40 as the game progresses, and a second that receives a signal from the game control board 40 as the game progresses. And electric parts.

  The gaming electrical component and the board are connected via a cable, and the cable connecting the gaming electrical component and the board is designed to facilitate assembly work and wiring work during manufacturing of the slot machine. Separation is possible by releasing the connection. In addition, these electrical parts for gaming are basically electrical parts that continue to be used in common for multiple models, and there are few opportunities to remove them from the main body and replace them unless a failure occurs. It is fixed in place. On the other hand, the game control board 40, the effect control board 90, and the like need to be replaced when changing the model, and are removed from the main body at that time. In other words, when removing the game control board 40, it is necessary to release the connection between the game electrical parts and the effect control board 90, so the cables and boards that connect these boards and the board and the game electrical parts are The cable side connector provided at the end of the cable is electrically connected to the board side connector electrically connected to the wiring pattern of the board, and the cable side connector is removed from the board side connector. By releasing the connection, the game control board 40 can be easily removed from the main body and replaced.

  However, when the slot machine is shipped from the manufacturer to the game store in such a state that the wiring connection between the game control board 40 and the electrical component for gaming can be easily released by removing the connector, for example, in a game store, the board side connector In this case, the cable-side connector can be easily removed from the board-side connector, and the cable-side connector connected to an unauthorized tool such as a so-called driving tool can be easily connected to the board-side connector.

  The driving instrument is, for example, a switch that is provided in the slot machine by causing the game control board 40 to input / output a signal that simulates a signal input / output to / from the game control board 40 from an electrical component for gaming. The game can be automatically advanced without operation. Therefore, for example, in a game store or the like, the regular connector connected to the board-side connector provided on the game control board 40 is removed, and an unauthorized connector connected to the driving tool is connected instead. By inputting / outputting signals to / from the game control board 40 at an appropriate timing to automatically advance the game, for example, it is possible to easily set a state where a special role is won. Therefore, a slot machine set in a state in which a special role is won using such an illegal driving tool, and BB (Regular Bonus) and BB (Big Bonus) with higher advantage are won. If the slot machine set to a state where there is a high possibility of being present is provided to a player at the start of business at a game store, for example, the fairness of the game may be impaired.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, as described above, only the start switch 7 of the electrical components for gaming is directly connected to the game control board 40, and the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the start switch 7, that is, Regarding the connection between the board-side connector 620b of the game control board 40 and the cable-side connector 610b of the cable 600b and the connection between the component-side connector 640b of the start switch 7 and the cable-side connector 630b, the connection between the connectors is released. Can be regulated by.

  Here, the connector restricting member 650 for restricting the release of the connection between the board-side connector 620b and the cable-side connector 610b of the cable 600b is formed in a box shape with one surface open (see FIG. 5), and is connected to the board-side connector 620b. The elastic claw 237a provided in the engagement cylinder 237 is engaged with an engagement hole (illustrated) by fitting in an engagement cylinder 237 of a cover member 202 described later in a state where the cable side connector 610b is covered from above. And is attached to the cover member 202.

  By fitting the connector restricting member 650 into the engaging cylinder 237 in this way, the elastic claw 237a is engaged with an engaging hole (not shown) in the inside thereof, whereby the cover member 202 is opened or engaged. Since the engaged state cannot be released from the outside unless the portion is destroyed, the release restricting portion must be destroyed in order to release the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the start switch 7. As a result, when the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the start switch 7 is released, the trace remains and it is extremely difficult to erase the trace. Can be suppressed.

  The connector restricting member 650a for restricting the release of the connection between the component side connector 640b and the cable side connector 630b of the start switch 7 is not particularly shown, but is removed unless a predetermined release restricting portion related to the release of the connection is destroyed. What is necessary is just to be comprised so that attachment is possible in the attachment state which cannot do.

  In this embodiment, the game control board 40 and the start switch 7 are connected without going through the relay board, and the connector connection only needs to be made on the game control board 40 and the electrical component (start switch 7) side. Wiring connections are simplified, but when connecting via one or more relay boards, it is preferable to regulate the removal of all connector connections that exist between them. Since it becomes difficult to release the connection of any of the connectors between the game control board 40 and the start switch 7, the illegal business can be prevented more effectively.

  In the present embodiment, the first electric components 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 33L, 33C, 33R, and 35 that input signals to the game control board 40 in accordance with the progress of the game and the progress of the game. Of the second electrical components 32L, 32C, 32R, 34 for which a signal is output from the game control board 40 in response to this, a connector restricting member 650 is provided only for connector connection between the start switch 7 and the game control board 40. The release of connection between connectors is regulated. That is, a start switch 7 (one that cannot start a game unless a signal is input from the start switch 7) and a game control board are electrical components that cannot advance the game without the signal. The connector restricting member 650 is provided only for connector connection with the connector 40 to restrict the connection between the connectors, and the connection between the connectors between the other electrical components and the game control board 40 is released to drive the instrument. Even if it is replaced with a connector, it will be impossible to automatically advance the game automatically, so that it is possible to prevent fraud with the minimum restrictions, and to disconnect these connectors The number of parts can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, only the connector connection between the start switch 7 and the game control board 40 is provided with the connector restricting member 650 to restrict the release of the connection between the connectors, but the inserted medal sensor 31 and the game control board. The same effect can be obtained by providing a connector restricting member only for connector connection between the connectors 40 and restricting the release of the connection between the connectors. Further, if the reel is not configured to stop until the reel stop operation is performed as in the present embodiment, between the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R and the game control board 40, The same effect can be obtained even if the connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection to restrict the release of the connection between the connectors.

  In this embodiment, the door opening detection switch 25 is connected to the game control board 40 via a cable. However, any of the connectors of the cable provided between the door opening detection switch 25 and the game control board 40 may be used. When the connection at that connector is released, when the front door 1b is opened, the main control unit 41 mounted on the game control board cannot detect that fact, and the door opening notification or door opening is detected. Since the output of the signal is not performed, the discovery may be delayed even if the front door 1b is opened and an illegal act is performed. Therefore, the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25 is not possible. A connector restricting member may be provided to restrict the release of the connection between the connectors. By doing so, the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25 may be restricted. It becomes difficult to release the one of connector connection between, with no been informed to the effect that the opening of the front door 1b, can be effectively prevented front door 1b from being opened.

  Further, in this embodiment, a plurality of signal lines connecting the main control unit 41 and a plurality of electrical components other than the start switch 7 for inputting and outputting signals necessary for the progress of the game and the door opening detection switch 25 are provided. Since the game control board 40 and the operation unit relay board 110 are connected by a single cable 600a, the connector connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a of the game control board 40, that is, one connector By restricting the release of only the connection, it becomes possible to restrict the release of the connection between the signal lines, and it is not necessary to prepare multiple parts for restricting the release of these connector connections. The score can be reduced.

  When a plurality of signal lines connecting the main control unit 41 and a plurality of electrical components for inputting / outputting signals necessary for the progress of the game and the door opening detection switch 25 are connected via a plurality of cables. However, in order to regulate the release of these connector connections by arranging the board side connectors close to each other and restricting the release of the connection between the plurality of board side connectors and the plurality of cable side connectors with one component. It is not necessary to prepare a plurality of parts, and the number of these parts can be reduced.

  The slot machine 1 of this embodiment outputs an external output signal indicating a gaming state, an error occurrence state, and the like. These external output signals are output from the game control board 40 under the control of the main CPU 41a, and the hall computer is provided via the external output board 1000 and the information providing terminal board (not shown) of the game store (hall) where the slot machine 1 is installed. It is output to hall equipment such as (not shown).

  From the game control board 40 to the external output board 1000, a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the number of bets, a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals given to the player due to the occurrence of a winning, a gaming state RB signal indicating that RB is described later, a BB signal indicating that the gaming state is BB described later, a door opening signal indicating that the front door 1b is open, and a setting change mode described later. A setting change signal indicating that the medals are in error, an insertion error signal indicating an abnormality in the medal selector, and a payout error signal indicating an abnormality in the hopper unit 34 are output.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to a set value in an internal lottery described later. The set value is composed of 6 levels of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate and the payout rate being lower as the value is decreased in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value decreases in order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage decreases stepwise.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on, the setting value read from the RAM 41c is displayed on the setting value display 24 as a display value, and the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. Transition to the setting change state. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the display returns to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the display value is determined as the set value. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned OFF, the determined display value (setting value) is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, and the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  In order to confirm the set value, after the game is over, the setting key switch 37 may be turned on with no bet amount set. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on in such a situation, the setting value read out from the RAM 41c is displayed on the setting value display 24, thereby shifting to a setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed. In the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be progressed, and by turning the setting key switch 37 to the OFF state, the setting confirmation state is ended and the state in which the game can proceed is returned.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the main CPU 41a detects a voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 48, a power interruption interrupt process (main) is executed. In the power interruption interrupt processing (main), the register is saved in a stack of a RAM 41c, which will be described later, and data for destructive diagnosis (in this embodiment, 5AH) in which any bit is 1 in the RAM 41c, that is, a specific value other than 0 In addition to storing data, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 0, and the RAM 41c is stored. The RAM parity is a value calculated as an exclusive OR of values stored in each bit of the corresponding area (all areas in this embodiment) of the RAM 41c. Therefore, if the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 0, the RAM parity adjustment data is 0, and the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 1. In this case, the RAM parity adjustment data is 1.

  The main CPU 41a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c at the time of activation, confirms the value of the destructive diagnosis data, the RAM parity is 0, and the destructive diagnosis The processing state of the main CPU 41a is restored to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 41c on the condition that the value of the data for use is correct, but the RAM parity is not 0 (in the case of 1) or is destroyed. If the value of the diagnostic data is not correct, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and the RAM abnormal error code is set in the register to control the RAM abnormal error state so that the progress of the game is disabled. Unlike the other error states, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new set value is set in the setting change state described above. It will not be released until

  In this embodiment, all the data stored in the RAM 41c is held by the backup power source even in the event of a power failure, and when the main CPU 41a determines that the data in the RAM 41c is normal when the power is turned on. Although the configuration is such that the control state before power interruption is restored based on the data stored in the RAM 41c, only the data necessary for the restoration of the control state in the event of a power failure is backed up among the data stored in the RAM 41c. It may be configured to return to the control state before power interruption based on the backed up data.

  In addition, when returning to the control state before the power interruption when the power is turned on, it is not necessary to return all the control states to the control state before the power interruption, and the minimum control state that does not disadvantage the player For example, it is not necessary to restore the state of all input ports to the state before power interruption.

  In addition, when the sub CPU 91a detects the voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 98, the sub CPU 91a also executes a power interruption interrupt process (sub). In the power interruption interrupt processing (sub), the register is saved in a stack of a RAM 91c described later, and destructive diagnosis data in which any bit is 1 is stored in the RAM 91c, and data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c. The RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on 0 becomes 0 and stored in the RAM 91c.

  Then, the sub CPU 91a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c at the time of activation, and based on the data stored in the RAM 91c on the condition that the RAM parity is 0. The processing state of the sub CPU 91a is restored to the state before the power interruption. If the RAM parity is not 0 (1), it is determined that the RAM is abnormal and the RAM 91c is initialized. In this case, unlike the main CPU 41a, the performance is not disabled only by initializing the RAM 91c.

  In this embodiment, all data stored in the RAM 91c is held by the backup power source even during a power failure, and the sub CPU 91a determines that the data in the RAM 91c is normal when the power is turned on. Although the configuration is such that the control state before power interruption is restored based on the data stored in the RAM 91c, only the data necessary for restoration of the control state is backed up in the event of a power failure out of the data stored in the RAM 91c. It may be configured to return to the control state before power interruption based on the backed up data.

  In addition, when returning to the control state before the power interruption when the power is turned on, it is not necessary to return all the control states to the control state before the power interruption, and the minimum control state that does not disadvantage the player It is not necessary to restore the state of the input port or the progress in the middle of the production when it is interrupted. For example, only the data indicating the gaming state such as during the big bonus or the normal gaming state is backed up, and the effect corresponding to the gaming state (the big bonus during the big bonus, the normal during the normal gaming state) If a power interruption occurs during the execution of a specific production (such as a small role announcement) other than the production), when the power is turned on instead of resuming the specific production that was being performed at the next power-on An effect corresponding to the gaming state being backed up may be executed from the beginning.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is divided into an important work, a general work, a special work, a set value work, a non-saved work, an unused area, and a stack area.

  The important work is a work that stores data that is inconvenient to be initialized at the end of the big bonus, such as various display devices and LED display data, input / output data of the I / O port 41d, and a game time counter. The general work is a work that stores data that can be initialized at the end of the big bonus, such as a stop control table, a stop symbol, the number of medals paid out, and the total number of medals paid out during the big bonus. The special work stores data that is not initialized even before the setting is changed, such as data for transmitting a command to the effect control board 90 and various software random numbers (a random number for determination value addition described later, a random number for changing an initial value). Work. The set value work is a work that stores a set value used when a lottery is performed in the internal lottery process. The unsaved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed at the time of activation. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 41c, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied. The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the main CPU 41a is stored, and the unused stack area is established by any one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later, like the unused area. In this case, the used stack area is not initialized because the program continues.

  In this embodiment, the main CPU 41a destroys data in the RAM 41c when a RAM abnormality error occurs, when the setting key switch 37 is activated with the setting key switch 37 turned on, when the big bonus is completed, and when the setting key switch 37 is activated with the setting key switch 37 turned off. If not, when five initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied, five types of initialization that are initialized in different areas are performed according to each initialization condition.

  Initialization 0 is initialization that is performed when a RAM abnormality error occurs. In initialization 0, all the areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) of the storage area of the RAM 41c except the used stack area are stored. It is initialized. Initialization 1 is an initialization that is performed before the setting key switch 37 is turned on at the time of startup and shifts to the setting change state. In the initialization 1, a special area in the storage area of the RAM 41c is selected. Areas other than the work, the unsaved work, and the used stack area (including the unused area and the unused stack area) are initialized. Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the big bonus. In initialization 2, the general work, the unused area, and the unused stack area are initialized in the storage area of the RAM 41c. Initialization 3 is initialization that is performed when the setting key switch 37 is in an OFF state at the time of startup and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed. The used stack area is initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized.

  In this embodiment, initialization 1 is performed before the change of the setting change state. However, the initialization 1 is performed at the end of the setting change state, or both before the change of the setting change state and at the end of the setting change state. Also good. In this case, if the set value work is initialized, the determined set value is lost. Therefore, the initialization of the set value work is not performed in the initialization at the end of the setting change state.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the prescribed number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state is determined as described above, and the prescribed number of bets that are determined according to the gaming state is set. It becomes possible to start the game on the condition. In this embodiment, there are regular bonuses (hereinafter referred to as RB) (big bonuses (hereinafter referred to as BB)) and RT (0) to (6) as gaming states, of which RB (BB) is the number of bets. 1 is defined as the specified number of bets, and 3 is defined as the specified number of bets in RT (0) to (6). Therefore, if the gaming state is RB (BB), it is possible to start the game when 1 is set as the bet number, and 3 is set as the bet number if RT (0) to (6). Then, the game can be started. In this embodiment, the winning line L is activated when a specified number of bets corresponding to the gaming state is set, and 1 is set as the bet number in RB (BB). All winning lines L1 to L5 are activated at the time when the winning numbers are reached, and all winning lines L1 to L5 are activated when 3 is set as the betting number in RT (0) to (4). It becomes.

  The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment plays a role on an activated pay line (hereinafter, the activated pay line is simply referred to as a pay line) when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped. A winning combination will be awarded when all the combinations of symbols are called. The combination may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination including different symbols. The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but it can be roughly divided into a small role with payout of medals and a replay that can start the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There are a game combination and a special combination with a transition of the game state. Below, a small role and a re-playing role are collectively called a general role. In order for winning of each combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win an internal lottery to be described later and set a winning flag of the combination in the RAM 41c.

  Of the winning flags for each of these combinations, the winning flag for the small role and the re-playing role is valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and is invalid in the next game. It is valid until a combination of combinations permitted by the flag is completed, and is invalid in a game having a combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the special combination winning flag is won, even if the combination of the combinations permitted by the flag cannot be made, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It becomes.

  In the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not the above winning combination is permitted before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is detected). To do. In the internal lottery, first, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535) is acquired. Then, for each combination determined according to the gaming state and whether or not the special combination is carried over, the acquired random number for internal lottery and the number of judgment values for each combination determined according to the gaming state, the number of bets and the set value Is done according to.

  In this embodiment, whether the gaming state is RT (0) (1) (not carrying a special role) or RT (2) (4) (5) (not carrying a special role) Depending on whether it is RT (3) (not carrying over a special combination), RT (6) (while carrying a special combination) or RB (BB), the combination that is subject to internal lottery differs.

  In the internal lottery, the number of determination values determined corresponding to the role to be subject to the internal lottery, the current gaming state and the set value are sequentially added to the random number for the internal lottery, and when the result of addition overflows, It is determined that the winning combination has been won. For this reason, a winning combination will be won with a probability (number of determination values / 65536) according to the number of determination values.

  If a winning combination of any combination is determined, a winning flag corresponding to the combination determined to be winning is set in the internal winning flag storing work assigned to the RAM 41c. The internal winning flag storage work consists of a 2-byte storage area, of which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storing work in which the winning flag for the special role is set, and the lower byte is the winning of the general role It is assigned as a general role storage work for which a flag is set. Specifically, when a special combination is won, a special combination winning flag indicating that the special combination is won is set in the special combination storing work, and the winning flag set in the general combination storing work is cleared. When a general combination is won, a winning flag for the general combination indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If no winning combination is selected, only the general winning combination work is cleared.

Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described.
The main CPU 41a refers to the table index and the table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the rotation of the reel starts and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Create a stop control table for each reel. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to and the slip of the referred stop control table is referred to. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In the table index, an index that indicates the start address of the area in which the data for table creation is stored, from the reference address when referring to the table index, according to the setting state of the winning flag by internal lottery (hereinafter referred to as the internal winning state) Differences up to the address where the data is stored are registered. As a result, a difference corresponding to the internal winning state is acquired, and the corresponding index data can be acquired by adding the difference to the reference address. Even when the winning combinations are different, when the same control is applied, the same address is stored as the index data. In such a case, the same table creation data is referred to. Thus, a stop control table is created.

  The table creation data includes a stop control table indicating the number of sliding frames according to the stop operation position, and an address of the stop control table to be referred to according to the reel stop status.

  The stop control table referred to according to the reel stop status is whether all reels are rotating, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, It may vary depending on whether the middle reel is stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, and if any reel is stopped, stop Since there may be differences depending on the stop position of the reels already completed, the address of the stop control table to be referenced for each situation is registered for each rotating reel, and based on the top address of the table creation data, It is possible to specify the address of the stop control table that should be referred to according to the status of each, and it is necessary according to each status from this specified address. And to be able to identify the stop control table. Even when the reel stop status and the stopped position of the stopped reel are different, when the same stop control table is applied, the same address may be registered as the address of the stop control table. In such a case, the same stop control table is referred to.

  The stop control table is data that can specify the number of sliding frames for each timing when the stop operation is performed. In this embodiment, stepping motors that make one turn at a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven for 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. 21 areas (frames) divided every 8 steps (the number of steps in which one symbol moves) per reel are defined, and these areas are areas 0 to 20 from the reel reference position. A number is assigned. On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 0 to 20 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel, so symbols 0 to 20 are assigned to each reel. , Area numbers 0 to 20 are assigned in order. In the stop control table, the number of sliding symbols for each area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule, and the number of sliding symbols for each area number can be acquired by expanding the stop control table. Yes.

  As described above, the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data corresponds to the area number, and the area corresponding to each area number is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3). Sliding frame when an operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected at a timing (a timing in which the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps of each region number). It is a table with each number set.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game is acquired. Specifically, the table index is first referred to, index data corresponding to the internal winning state is obtained, table creation data is identified based on the obtained index data, and all reels are identified from the identified table creation data. The address of the stop control table for each reel corresponding to the state of rotation is acquired, and the stop control table for each reel stored at the acquired address is expanded to generate a stop control table for all reels.

  Further, when any one reel stops or any two reels stop, the index data acquired at the start of reel rotation, that is, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game The table creation data is identified based on the table creation data, and the stop control table address of the unreacted reel corresponding to the stopped reel and the area number of the stop position of the reel is obtained from the identified table creation data. The stop control table for each stored reel is expanded to create a stop control table for the unstopped reels.

  Next, when the main CPU 41a effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control when the display result is derived to the corresponding reel will be described. When one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop operation position area is determined based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. The number is specified, the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected is referred, and the number of sliding symbols corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired sliding frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of sliding frames to the stop is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. As a result, the area corresponding to the area number that is the stop position ahead of the number of sliding frames from the area corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3 It will stop in the lower symbol area).

  In the table index of this embodiment, only one address is stored as index data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state, and further, one table creation data includes one reel. Only one address is stored as the address of the storage area of the stop control table corresponding to the stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). In other words, table creation data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state and stop control tables corresponding to reel stop states (and stopped positions of stopped reels) are uniquely determined. The stop control table created with reference to is unique for one internal winning state in one gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). Therefore, when all of the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel is based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. The stop control is performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of sliding frames, and the reel can be stopped by drawing a maximum of 4 symbols after detecting the stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  In this embodiment, when any of the winning combinations is won, the winning combination is drawn on the winning line to the maximum in the range of 4 frames, and the winning combination is aligned on any winning line. Create a stop control table that defines the number of sliding frames to be pulled in to prevent reels from being stopped, and if none of the winning combinations are selected, slipping that does not match any winning combination on the winning line A stop control table with a defined number of frames is created and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if a winning combination can be stopped on any winning line in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, control is performed to align and stop them. In this case, the winning combination is controlled so that the winning combination is stopped within a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  If the special role is elected while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, or if the special role and the small role are elected at the same time when the special role is not carried over, the special role and the small role are won simultaneously. The number of sliding symbols is set so that the winning small role is drawn to the winning line within the range of 4 frames, and the winning small role is drawn to the winning line within the range of up to 4 frames. For stop operation positions that cannot be inserted, a stop control table in which the number of sliding symbols is determined so as to draw the selected special combination to the winning line in the range of 4 frames to the maximum is created, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if it is possible to stop all the small roles that have been selected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line and stop them, control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. If you can't draw a small role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the line, if you can stop with a special role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, A control is performed to stop them in a uniform manner, and a winning combination that has not been won will be controlled to be stopped within a 4-frame pull-in range. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the small combination on the winning line over the special combination, and the special combination can be won only when the small combination cannot be drawn.

  In this embodiment, when a special role and a small role are simultaneously elected, the control for aligning the small role on the winning line is prioritized over the special role, and the special role is given only when the small role cannot be drawn. However, priority is given to the control of aligning the special role on the winning line over the small role, and it is possible to win the small role only when the special role cannot be drawn. It is good also as a structure.

  The special role and re-playing role are selected when the re-playing role is elected while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, or when the special role and re-playing role are won at the same time without the special role being carried over. In the case of winning at the same time, when a stop operation is performed, control is performed so that the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames. In this case, the symbols constituting the re-playing combination are arranged within 5 symbols for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, that is, with an interval of 4 frames or less. Therefore, if a special combination and a replaying player are elected at the same time, the replaying game will always be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R by the player. Will be. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the re-games on the winning line has priority over the special game, and the re-games will always win.

  In this embodiment, after the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started, the main CPU 41a continues to rotate the reels for which the stop operation has not been detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. On the condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected, control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding reel. Even if the reel rotation temporarily stops due to the occurrence of a reel rotation error, the stop operation is still detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected after the reel rotation is restarted. Control is performed to stop the display result of the corresponding reels on the condition that the rotation of the reels that have not been continued is continued and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected.

  In this embodiment, control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding reel on condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. However, the rotation of the reel is started. When a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed, even if the reel stop operation is not performed, it is assumed that the stop operation has been performed, and automatic stop control is performed to automatically stop each reel. May be. In this case, since the reels are stopped without the player's operation, it is preferable to derive a display result that does not constitute any combination even if any combination is won.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a sends a BET command, a credit command, an internal winning command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, a payout start command, a payout end command, a game state command to the effect control board 90. A plurality of types of commands including a standby command, an abort command, an error command, a return command, a setting start command, a confirmation start command, a confirmation end command, and an operation detection command.

  These commands are composed of 1-byte type data indicating the type of command and 1-byte extension data indicating the content of the command, and the sub CPU 91a can determine the type of command from the type data.

  Next, the structure of the board case 200 for housing the game control board 40 and the structure for attaching the board case 200 to the housing 1a will be described. In the following description, as shown in FIG. 2, the upper and lower sides of the substrate case 200, with the substrate case 200 attached to the back plate 1c of the housing 1a as viewed from the front of the housing 1a, It shall indicate the left-right and front-back directions.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the board case 200 in which the game control board 40 is accommodated can be rotated to the fixed base 301 and the locking member 303 attached to the upper inner surface of the back plate 1 c of the housing 1 a and the fixed base 301. By attaching to the front side of the movable base 302 in the case support device 300 mainly composed of the movable base 302 to be supported, the movable base 302 is attached to the upper part of the inner surface of the back plate 1c so as to be rotatable around an axis facing the vertical direction. It is done.

  (Board Case) As shown in FIG. 6, the board case 200 includes a base member 201 as a first cover covering the back surface (other surface) 40 b side of the game control board 40 which is an example of a circuit board, and a game control board. And a cover member 202 as a second covering body that covers the mounting surface (one surface) 40a side of 40, and is assembled so as to sandwich the game control board 40. Although not shown in detail on the mounting surface 40a of the game control board 40, a main control unit 41 including a microcomputer (control microcomputer) having a CPU 41a, a ROM 41b, a RAM 41c, and an I / O port 41d, Many board-side connectors 620a to 620d to which cable-side connectors provided at one end of cables from other boards are connected are mounted.

  (Base Member) As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the base member 201 has a base plate 201a made of a transparent thermoplastic synthetic resin and formed in a substantially rectangular shape, and the upper and lower long sides of the base plate 201a. Each of the pair of side walls 201b, 201b erected forward extends in the longitudinal direction. On the side walls 201b and 201b, engagement grooves 250 into which engagement pieces 220 (described later) provided on the cover member 202 are slidably inserted are formed in the center in the longitudinal direction and in the left and right positions, respectively. These engagement grooves 250 are formed in a substantially L shape in a side view, and the front ends thereof are opened forward at the front ends of the side walls 201b. As will be described later, the engagement pieces 203 and 203 are inserted from the front, and the base plate 201a. The cover member 202 can be locked at the sealing position by moving it along the right side.

  In addition, abutting pieces 204, 204 with which the lower end of the cover member 202 abuts are extended along the longitudinal direction at positions on the outer rear surfaces of the side walls 201b, 201b, and positions near the inside of the side walls 201b, 201b. In this case, support pieces 205 and 205 that contact and support the upper and lower sides of the back surface 40b of the game control board 40 are extended along the side walls 201b and 201b.

  On the short side 201c on the left side of the base member 201, locking pieces 203, 203 that can be inserted into insertion holes 222, 222 formed in a cover member 202, which will be described later, protrude outwardly from both sides in the longitudinal direction. ing. Further, a raised portion 206 formed by raising a part of the base plate 201a toward the front side is formed in the central portion of the short side 201d facing the short side 201c. A base-side welded part 207 is formed as a first cover-side sealing part. The base-side welded portion 207 faces the rear surface side of the cover-side welded portion 223 as a second covering-body-side welded portion of the cover member 202 described later when the base member 201 and the cover member 202 are aligned (combined). It is supposed to be.

  A base-side sealing portion 229 in which a screw hole 209 to which a later-described closing screw 226 is attached is provided on the upper side portion of the raised portion 206 on the short side 201d, and a lower side portion of the raised portion 206 is described later. A preliminary sealing piece 211 provided with a screw hole 210 to which the one-way screw 240c to be attached is provided is projected outward. The detailed structure of the base side sealing part 229 will be described later.

  (Cover Member) As shown in FIGS. 6 and 8, the cover member 202 is made of a transparent thermoplastic synthetic resin, and has a substantially rectangular cover plate 202a whose center bulges outward, and the cover plate 202a. The pair of side walls 202b and 202b erected rearward along the long side and the pair of side walls 202c and 202d erected rearward along the short side open the rear surface side, and on the lower long side side It is formed in a convex box shape in which a horizontally elongated recess 202e is formed. Engagement pieces 220 (see FIG. 6) that can be engaged with the engagement grooves 250 of the base member 201 project inwardly at the center position and the left and right sides of the inner surfaces of the side walls 202b and 202b.

  Further, a rib 202g protruding from the front surface of the cover plate 202a is formed in a square frame shape around the front surface of the cover plate 202a, and the cover plate 202a is installed with the front side of the cover plate 202a facing the installation surface. It is avoided that the front surface of the door contacts the installation surface. Thereby, for example, when welding a welded portion to be described later, the front surface of the cover plate 202a is slidably contacted with the installation surface of the jig, and damage to the management seal or the like attached to the front surface is prevented. It is like that. In addition, a plurality of small holes 202f for heat dissipation are formed at corners of the cover plate 202a (positions as far as possible from the main CPU 41a and the ROM 41b mounted on the mounting surface 40a).

  At both ends in the longitudinal direction of the outer surface of the side wall 202c on one short side of the cover member 202, a rotating shaft 333, which will be described later, is abutted to restrict the detachment of the rotating shaft 333 from the shaft support groove 320 and to rotate. A pair of plate-like pieces 221, 221 that can cover the moving shaft 333 from the front side is projected outward, and a rectangular shape into which the locking pieces 203, 203 of the base member 201 can be inserted on the rear side. Shaped insertion holes 222, 222 are formed.

  A plate-like cover-side welded portion 223 as a second covering-body-side sealing portion is extended outward at the center portion in the longitudinal direction of the other short-side side wall 202d, and the base member 201 and the cover member 202 are connected to each other. When aligned, the base member 201 is opposed to the upper surface side of the base-side welded portion 207, and the right end portion of the cover-side welded portion 223 is in contact with the restricting piece 208 to be restricted in movement.

  When the base member 201 and the cover member 202 are aligned with each other on the upper side in the longitudinal direction of the side wall 202d, the cover-side sealing portion 224 is disposed to face the front side of the screw hole 209 of the base member 201. Is formed. The front surface of the cover-side sealing portion 224 is a flat sealing seal application surface to which a seal seal 400 (see FIG. 6), which will be described later, can be applied, and a closing screw 226 ( A cylindrical recess 227a having a mounting hole 227 to which a mounting hole 227 can be attached is formed on the bottom surface, and the head of the closing screw 226 can be accommodated in the recess 227a. The detailed structure of the cover side sealing part 224 will be described later.

  At the lower side in the longitudinal direction of the side wall 202d, a mounting sealing piece 230, a spare mounting sealing piece 231 and a spare sealing piece 232 project outward from the outer surface of the side wall 202d. The mounting sealing piece 230 and the spare mounting sealing piece 231 are provided at positions facing a mounting base 315 (described later) mounted on the movable base 302 when the substrate case 200 is installed on the movable base 302 (described later). Yes. The preliminary sealing piece 232 is provided at a position facing the preliminary sealing piece 211 of the base member 201 when the base member 201 and the cover member 202 are aligned.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, the mounting sealing piece 230, the preliminary mounting sealing piece 231 and the preliminary sealing piece 232 are, as shown in FIG. 10A, a cylindrical portion that can accommodate one-way screws 240a to 240c described later, And a cut piece (a part of the cover member 202) 233 connecting the shape portion and the side wall 202d. And the cylindrical part is arrange | positioned through the cutting piece 233 in the state spaced apart from the side wall 202d for the predetermined distance. Therefore, the cutting pieces 233 can be cut (destructed) with a tool such as a nipper, and a plurality of cutting pieces bulge outward from the outer surface of the side wall 202d, which is one side edge of the cover member 202, at the tip of each cutting piece 233. A mounting sealing piece 230, a spare mounting sealing piece 231 and a spare sealing piece 232, which are cylindrical portions, are provided.

  The cylindrical portions of the mounting sealing piece 230, the spare mounting sealing piece 231 and the spare sealing piece 232 are formed in a bottomed square cylindrical shape whose upper surface is open, and the one-way screws 240a to 240c can be accommodated therein. The mounting holes 234 and 235 have a size and are formed so that the upper portions of the one-way screws 240a to 240c can be accommodated, and smaller in diameter than the heads of the one-way screws 240a to 240c. Is formed. The attachment hole 234 is disposed at a position facing the screw hole 210 in the sealed state. The attachment holes 235 and 235 are arranged at positions opposite to the attachment holes 316a and 316b in the attachment state described later.

  Although not shown in particular, caps can be mounted on the top surfaces of the mounting sealing piece 230, the preliminary mounting sealing piece 231 and the preliminary sealing piece 232. For example, the cap and each sealing piece 230 ~ The upper surface openings of the respective sealing pieces 230 to 232 may be closed with caps by bonding the 232 with an adhesive or by engaging with a step formed on the inner surface upper end of each cylindrical portion.

  In the recess 202e, connector openings 236a to 236g are formed to allow the plurality of board-side connectors 620 provided on the game control board 40 attached to the back side of the cover member 202 to be inserted outward. . Further, the side of the connector opening 236c corresponding to the board-side connector 620b to which the start switch 7 is connected is elastically engaged with an engagement hole (not shown) provided in the connector restricting member 650 described above. An engaging cylinder 237 having a claw 237a formed therein is protruded.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6, the game control board 40 is attached to the back surface side of the cover member 202 by fastening four corners with four attachment screws 238. The game control board 40 is attached to the back surface side of the cover member 202 with the mounting surface 40a (mounting surface) on which electronic components or the like are mounted (mounted) facing the back surface of the cover member 202, and is attached. In FIG. 2, the back surface 40b of the mounting surface 40a is accommodated so as to be positioned above the lower ends of the side walls 202b to 202d.

  (Sealing of substrate case) Next, the sealing state of the base member 201 and the cover member 202 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 6, the game control board 40 is attached to the back side of the cover member 202 via the attachment screw 238. At this time, with the mounting surface 40a of the game control board 40 facing the back surface of the cover member 202, the game control board 40 is fitted and positioned in the cover member 202, and mounting screws 238 are placed at the four corners of the game control board 40. Is attached to a screw hole (not shown) of the cover member 202.

  Thus, even if the cover member 202 is illegally opened, the cover member is accommodated in a state where the game control board 40 is attached to the back surface side of the cover member 202 so as to cover the mounting surface 40a. Unless the game control board 40 is removed from 202, it becomes impossible to perform illegal acts on the electronic components such as the main CPU 41a and the ROM 41b mounted on the mounting surface 40a.

  Next, the back surface 40b of the game control board 40 attached to the back surface side of the cover member 202 is opposed to the front surface of the base plate 201a of the base member 201 so that the side wall 202c of the cover member 202 protrudes from the short side 201c of the base member 201. The cover member 202 is brought close to the base member 201, and each engagement piece 220 of the cover member 202 is inserted from the open end of each engagement groove 250 of the base member 201. At this time, the outer surface of the side wall 201b of the base member 201 is covered by the side wall 202c of the cover member 202. In this state, the cover member 202 is slid in the longitudinal direction (toward the right side in FIG. 6) toward the right side.

  When each engagement piece 220 comes into contact with the end portion of each engagement groove 250 and the right end portion of the cover-side welded portion 223 comes into contact with a restriction piece (not shown), the sliding movement is restricted. On the short side, the locking pieces 203, 203 of the base member 201 are inserted into the cover member insertion holes 222, 222. Thus, each engagement piece 220 is engaged with each engagement groove 250, the right end portion of the cover-side welded portion 223 is locked to the restriction piece (not shown), and the locking pieces 203 and 203 are inserted into the cover member. The cover member 202 is assembled to the base member 201 by being inserted into the holes 222, 222, the assembly position of the cover member 202 with respect to the base member 201 is determined, and the base member 201 and the cover member 202 are aligned (combined). ) To be in a closed state (locked state) in which the opening of the base member 201 is closed, and a state to be described later is possible (see FIGS. 9 and 10).

  As described above, in order to open the cover member 202 from the closed state, the substrate case 200 according to the present embodiment first has to slide the cover member 202 along the base plate 201a of the base member 201. On the other hand, the cover member 202 cannot be locked or released from the locked state, and the locking action effectively restricts the separation of the cover member 202 from the base member 201, that is, lifting.

  Further, in the closed state, the mounting hole 234 of the preliminary sealing piece 232 is disposed at a position facing the screw hole 210, the mounting hole 227 is disposed at the position facing the screw hole 209, and the cover-side welded portion 223. Is disposed at a position facing the base-side welded portion 207 (see FIG. 10A).

  Here, when the game control board 40 is stored in the board case 200 and shipped to a game store or the like, for example, by a manufacturer or the like, the cover side welded part 223 and the base side welded part 207, which are welded parts, are, for example, Ultrasonic welding (caulking) is performed using an ultrasonic welding machine or the like (also referred to as a first sealed state). Further, the closing screw 226 is a general screw comprising a rod-like portion having a male screw portion (attachment portion) formed on the outer periphery and a head formed at one end of the rod-like portion and housed in the recess 227a. After the rod-shaped portion of the closing screw 226 is inserted into the mounting hole 227 from the opening 227b of the recess 227a and screwed into the screw hole 209, the sealing seal 400 is placed so as to straddle the cover side sealing portion 224 and the base side sealing portion 229. A U-shaped seal protective cover 228 made of a synthetic resin material is applied to the cover member 202 so as to cover the affixed seal seal 400 while forming a sealed state (also referred to as a second sealed state or a sealed state). And the base member 201 are sandwiched and shipped with the sealing seal 400 protected.

  (Sealing structure) Next, the detailed structure of a sealing part and a sealing seal is demonstrated. 15A is a front view showing the structure of a seal seal, FIG. 15B is a rear view showing a state in which ink is dissolved, and FIG. 15C is a sectional view taken along line KK in FIG. 16A is a perspective view showing a state in which the sealing portion is viewed from the front side, and FIG. 16B is a perspective view showing a state in which the sealing portion is viewed from the rear side. 17A is a front view showing the periphery of the seal seal in an enlarged manner, FIG. 17B is a side view showing the periphery of the seal seal in an enlarged manner, and FIG. 17C is a rear view showing the periphery of the seal seal in an enlarged manner. . 18 is an RR cross-sectional view of FIG. FIG. 19 is a TT cross-sectional view of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 15 (c), the seal seal 400 is composed of an adhesive layer 402 for enabling the seal seal 400 to be pasted, and a seal substrate 401 on which the adhesive layer 402 is formed. The release paper 404 is attached to the surface of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 402. The release paper 404 is peeled off when the seal seal 400 is attached to the substrate case 200. The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 402 is provided over the entire area of the seal substrate 401.

  The seal base material 401 is formed of a flexible base material such as a paper material into which a peeling liquid described later easily penetrates. As these substrates, a resin film such as a polyester film may be used as long as it has fine holes or the like so that it can easily pass through the solution of the stripping solution. These sealing base materials 401 may have a function such as discoloration when heat at a temperature (for example, 50 ° C.) or higher at which the adhesive strength of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 402 decreases is applied. By doing so, even when heat is applied so as to illegally peel off the seal seal 400, the discoloration of the seal base material 401 can leave a trace of the fraud.

  In addition, the seal substrate 401 is formed of a material having a strength lower than the adhesive strength of the adhesive layer 402 or formed thinner than the adhesive layer 402, so that the seal substrate 401 is attached to the substrate case 200. When peeled off, the sealing base member 401 is easily broken due to the adhesive strength of the adhesive layer 402.

  As shown in FIGS. 15A to 15C, the surface of the seal substrate 401 on which the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 402 is not formed is brought into contact with a later-described stripping solution as shown in FIGS. When the seal seal 400 is pasted in a predetermined manner on the substrate case 200 by the special ink that dissolves, the boundary portion Z between the cover member 202 and the base member 201 constituting the substrate case 200 is displayed. (See FIG. 17 (b)) and is printed and formed so as to be arranged at portions not located at the corners C1 and C2 in the seal sticker attaching portion to be described later.

  In other words, as described above, the character “unopened” is printed with special ink that dissolves in a specific stripping solution that can peel off the seal seal 400. The ink layer constituting the “prohibited” character is dissolved in the stripping solution, and the contrast of the character is lowered (see, for example, FIG. 15B). A solvent usage indicator is formed.

  The solvent use display section includes a solvent use display section 450A representing the characters "open" of "unopening", a solvent use display section 450B representing the characters "seal", and a solvent use display section representing the characters "forbidden" 450C and the solvent use display part 450D showing the character of "stop" are comprised.

  Further, on the surface of the seal sticker 400, in addition to the characters "open prohibition" consisting of the solvent use display portions 450A to 450D, a serial number which is identification information for identifying each seal sticker can be read visually. The first identification information display unit 451 that is displayed and the second identification information on which a two-dimensional bar code that can be read by a predetermined reader is displayed by encoding the identification information that can identify each sealed seal. Unlike the above-described special ink, the display unit 452 is made of a curable ink such as an ultraviolet curable ink, and is printed with a durable ink that does not dissolve in the peeling liquid.

  The first identification information display unit 451 is printed with, for example, identification information consisting of a fixed digit of one digit and nine digits of alphanumeric characters. The alphanumeric characters printed on the first identification information display unit 451 are the slot machine 1. It is different for each, and is used as identification information for managing each board case 200 in an amusement store or the like. The second identification information display unit 452 is printed with identification information including a so-called two-dimensional code, and is different from the identification information printed on the first identification information display unit 451.

  Further, hologram display portions A and 453B for preventing counterfeiting are affixed to the surface of the seal sticker 400 so as to cross the diagonal corner portions of the seal sticker 400 in an oblique direction. Since the hologram display portions A and 453B are affixed to a plurality of positions on the seal seal 400, it is more difficult to forge.

  As the pressure-sensitive adhesive constituting the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 402 used in the seal seal 400 of the present embodiment, any known acrylic or silicone-based or polyvinyl-based adhesive can be used as long as it has a strong adhesive force and excellent tackiness. A pressure-sensitive adhesive can be suitably used.

  Incidentally, these pressure-sensitive adhesives are preferably those that can be peeled only by a specific stripping solution without being stripped with a commercially available stripping solution as much as possible, for example, a modified polyvinyl alcohol type The pressure-sensitive adhesive is exemplified.

  That is, for the substrate case 200, a polycarbonate resin or acrylic resin, which is usually transparent and has high mechanical strength, is used so that the substrate accommodated therein can be visually confirmed. Since cardnate resin and acrylic resin are easily dissolved in aromatic solvents such as toluene and xylene, simple substances such as methyl ethyl ketone (MEK) and ethyl acetate, and general solvents in which these solvents are mixed, these general solvents If a pressure sensitive adhesive that can be peeled off with the release liquid contained in the substrate is used, the use of the release liquid (peeling solvent) causes the substrate case 200 to dissolve and the transparency to deteriorate, so the substrate case itself must be replaced. End up.

  For this reason, for example, when a seal sticker 400 is mistakenly attached by a manufacturer of a gaming machine or the like, the sticker sticker 400 attached in error can be peeled without adversely affecting the substrate case 200. In a solvent that does not opacify the polycarbonate resin and acrylic resin constituting the substrate case 200, for example, a single solvent or a mixed solvent such as a polar solvent such as water, an alcohol solvent or a fatty acid solvent, and an adhesive. What added a surfactant or the like for intruding between the bonding surface of the substrate case 200 and reducing the adhesive strength, that is, a specific peeling solution that does not adversely affect the resin constituting the substrate case 200 It is possible to use one that can be peeled off and has high adhesive strength and little deterioration.

  Therefore, the special ink used for the character formation of “opening prohibition” may dissolve or react by contacting with a specific stripping solution that does not adversely affect the resin constituting the substrate case 200. In particular, an ink having a resin component similar to that of the pressure-sensitive adhesive to be used, and a resin that is easily dissolved by a peeling solution as a main component of the varnish, may be used. Ink or the like mixed with microcapsules that develop color in response to fatty acids contained in the stripping solution can be suitably used.

  By doing in this way, even if it attaches the seal seal | sticker 400 accidentally in the manufacturer of a game machine, etc., it can peel the seal | sticker seal | sticker 400, without replacing | exchanging the substrate case 200 by using a specific peeling liquid. In addition, even if these specific stripping liquids are illegally acquired and used by a third party, the fact that these specific stripping liquids are used is composed of the solvent use display portions 450A to 450D. It becomes possible to specify by changing the character of “unopened”.

  The above-described resin, solvent, and the like are merely examples, and other resins and solvents other than those exemplified may be used as long as they satisfy the above-described characteristics.

  In addition, the special ink used for the character formation of “unopening” indicates that the visual state changes by contacting with a specific stripping solution and dissolving or reacting as shown in FIG. Thus, for example, the special ink used for the character formation of the solvent use display portions 450A and 450B dissolves by contacting with a specific stripping solution and not only changes due to the disappearance of the characters but also thins even if it does not disappear. Including becoming.

  That is, when a predetermined solvent is used in order to reduce the adhesive strength of the seal seal 400, the solvent use display portions 450A to 450D that show traces of the use of the solvent are printed so as to be visible as described above. Including those that show traces of use of the solvent by disappearing or thinning of the characters.

  In addition, as long as the trace in which the solvent was used is shown by a change in the visual state of the solvent use display portions 450A to 450D, the characters printed in a visible state disappear as described above. Including those showing a trace of the use of the solvent by changing to an invisible state. Furthermore, characters printed in an invisible state (for example, characters printed with ink having the same color as the color of the seal substrate 401) change to a visible state in response to the solvent, that is, develop color. This also includes those showing a trace of the solvent being used.

  In addition, when the visual state of the solvent use display portions 450A to 450D changes, the special ink used for character formation of “unopening” dissolves, and the solvent use display portions 450A to 450D disappear or become thin, or color develops. For example, the character color may be changed by reacting with the special ink, or the special ink may be blurred.

  In addition, as long as the solvent use display portion shows a trace of the use of the solvent when a predetermined solvent is used, as described above, the solvent use display portion can be used as a special ink used for character formation of the solvent use display portion. It may be one that dissolves or reacts without contacting the solvent with the special ink, as well as one that dissolves or reacts when the solvent contacts.

  Also, in this embodiment, as an example of the solvent use display portion, the “unopened” character printed with special ink is described, but the character type, the number of characters, and the arrangement position are arbitrary and can be variously changed. It is. Further, the solvent use display portion is not limited to characters, and may be formed of numbers, symbols, designs, decorations, and the like. Moreover, the solvent use display part may be arrange | positioned only in one place even if it is not arrange | positioned in multiple places.

  At the four corners of the seal seal 400, corner-side cuts 408 are formed as fragile portions penetrating from the front surface side of the seal substrate 401 to the back surface side of the adhesive layer 402, respectively. The corner-side cut 408 is formed in a straight line from the corner of the seal seal 400 toward the center. A large number of outer edge notches 409 are formed on the outer edge of the seal seal 400 from the outer end toward the inner side. These outer edge cuts 409 are formed in an acute V shape so as to open from the inside to the outside, and are formed at equal intervals along the outer periphery of the seal seal 400.

  In this embodiment, the corner side cut 408 is described as an example of the weak part, but the weak part may be a part where the mechanical strength of the seal base material 401 of the seal seal 400 is lower than the other parts. For example, it may not necessarily penetrate from the surface side of the sealing base material 401 to the back side of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 402. For example, by making a part of the sealing base material 401 thin, it is more fragile than other parts. The part which is formed may be weak, and it may become weak by using the raw material whose intensity | strength is lower than another part for a part of seal base material 401. FIG.

  In addition, the four corners of the seal seal 400 are cut obliquely to form cut-out sides 410. These cut-out sides 410 are arranged to match positioning surfaces 412a and 422a (see FIG. 17), which will be described later, so that the sticking position and sticking direction of the seal seal 400 are determined. Since the pair of adjacent cutout sides 410 and 410 are directed in different directions as described above, the sealing seal 400 can be obtained simply by arranging the pair of cutout sides 410 and 410 according to the corresponding positioning surfaces 412a and 422a. In addition to being able to reliably determine the sticking position and sticking direction, positioning surfaces 412a and 422a are arranged outside the corners of the seal seal 400, so that it is difficult to lift the seal seal 400 from the corners and peel it off. Therefore, the seal seal 400 cannot be easily peeled off. Therefore, when the seal seal 400 is to be peeled from the corner, stress due to the peeling force concentrates on the corner side cut 408 and the outer edge cut 409, so that the seal seal 400 is easily broken.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 to 19, the base-side sealing portion 229 is formed from a substantially rectangular rear sticking surface 229a formed so as to protrude rightward from the short side 201d and from the right end of the rear sticking surface 229a. It has a base side application surface composed of a lower right application surface 229b that is bent toward the rear surface side. A pair of upper and lower positioning protrusions 411 and 411 projecting outward from the rear application surface 229a and the lower right application surface 229b are extended along the upper and lower sides of the rear application surface 229a and the lower right application surface 229b. ing. The positioning ridges 411 and 411 protrude in the outward direction from the surface 400a of the seal seal 400 in a state where the seal seal 400 is applied to the rear application surface 229a and the lower right application surface 229b as described later. The inner surface that has a height and is suspended from the rear sticking surface 229a and the lower right sticking surface 229b is a positioning surface 411a of the seal seal 400.

  Further, triangular positioning corners 412 and 412 projecting inward from each other are formed at the ends of the positioning ridges 411 and 411 on the short side 201d side, and the inner surfaces of these positioning corners 412 and 412 are respectively The positioning surface 412 a faces the cut-out side 410 at the corner of the seal sticker 400.

  The end surfaces of the positioning ridges 411 and 411 and the positioning corners 412 and 412 are contact restriction surfaces 413 that contact an inner surface of a seal protection cover 228 described later, and the positioning corners 412 and 412 on the contact restriction surface 413. Are formed with engaging convex portions 414 and 414 that engage with engaging concave portions 228a formed in the seal protective cover 228, respectively.

  Further, a screw hole 209 to which a closing screw 226 described later is attached is formed at a substantially central position on the front side of the base side sealing portion 229. When the cover member 202 is assembled to the base member 201 and closed, the rear side of the cover side sealing portion 224 is disposed opposite to the front side of the base side sealing portion 229 so that the screw hole 209 is attached. It matches the hole 227.

  On the other hand, the cover-side sealing portion 224 is formed to be bent from the right end of the front sticking surface 224a to the front surface side and a substantially rectangular front sticking surface 224a formed so as to protrude rightward from the side wall 202d. It has a cover side pasting surface composed of an upper right pasting surface 224b. Above and below the front sticking surface 224a and the upper right sticking surface 224b, a pair of upper and lower positioning projections 421 and 421 projecting outward from the front sticking surface 224a and the upper right sticking surface 224b are extended along the respective upper and lower sides. . The positioning protrusions 421 and 421 have a predetermined height that protrudes outward from the surface 400a of the seal seal 400 in a state where the seal seal 400 is applied to the front application surface 224a and the upper right application surface 224b as described later. The inner surface suspended from the front pasting surface 224a and the upper right pasting surface 224b is a positioning surface 421a of the seal seal 400.

  In addition, triangular positioning corners 422 and 422 projecting inward from each other are formed at the end portions of the positioning projections 421 and 421 on the side wall 202d, and the inner surfaces of these positioning corners 422 and 422 are sealed. The positioning surface 422 a is opposed to the notch side 410 at the corner of the seal 400.

  The end surfaces of the positioning ridges 421 and 421 and the positioning corners 422 and 422 are contact restriction surfaces 423 that contact an inner surface of a seal protection cover 228 described later, and the positioning corners 422 and 422 on the contact restriction surface 423. Engaging convex portions 414 and 414 that are engaged with engaging concave portions 228 a formed in the seal protection cover 228 are respectively provided in the vicinity of.

  In addition, a mounting hole 227 to which the above-described closing screw 226 is attached is formed on the bottom surface at a substantially central position of the cover-side sealing portion 224, and a bottomed cylindrical concave portion 227a that can accommodate the head of the closing screw 226 is formed. (Opening) is formed. An opening 227b (see FIG. 18) on one end side of the recess 227a is formed so as to face the substantially central position of the front sticking surface 224a, and from the opening 227b to the mounting hole 227 and the screw hole 209 of the closing screw 226. Can be installed and removed.

  Thus, the base-side sealing part 229 is composed of the rear sticking surface 229a facing the back side and the lower right sticking surface 229b facing the right side, and the cover side sealing part 224 includes the front sticking surface 224a facing the front side. It is comprised from the upper right sticking surface 224b which faces the right side. As described above, the substrate case 200 includes a base-side sealing portion 229 having a plurality of application surfaces (rear application surface 229a and lower right application surface 229b) facing different directions, and a plurality of application surfaces (front And a cover-side sealing portion 224 having a sticking surface 224a and an upper right sticking surface 224b).

  Next, in order to affix the seal seal 400 to the base side seal portion 229 and the cover side seal portion 224 configured as described above, as shown in FIGS. 17 to 19, the upper region R1 or the lower region of the seal seal 400 is used. A pair of notches 410 and 410 formed at the corners of R3 are arranged so as to be aligned with the pair of positioning surfaces 412a and 412a or the positioning surfaces 422a and 422a.

  By arranging the notch side 410 so as to match the positioning surface 412a in this way, the notch side 410 and the positioning surface 412a are in line contact with each other, so that the sticking position of the seal seal 400 can be determined reliably, and the seal seal 400 Since the positioning surfaces 412a and 412a are erected on the outside of the corners, it is difficult to lift the seal seal 400 from the corners and peel off, so that the seal seal 400 is peeled off and opened illegally. Can be prevented. In addition, since the adjacent pair of positioning surfaces 412a and 412a or the positioning surfaces 422a and 422a are arranged in a letter “C” shape, that is, non-parallel to each other, the pair of notch sides 410 and 410 are paired with the pair of positioning surfaces 412a. , 412a or the positioning surfaces 422a and 422a, the sticking position and sticking direction (orientation) of the seal seal 400 can be easily determined.

  In addition, since the length dimension of the long side portion of the seal seal 400 substantially matches the total length of the long side portions of both the base-side sticking surface and the cover-side sticking surface, If the pasting positions of the cutout sides 410 and 410 in the region R1 or the lower region R3 are determined, all four cutout sides 410 coincide with the positioning surfaces 412a and 422a.

  In this embodiment, the width dimension between the pair of long side portions and the width dimension between the pair of short side portions on the base side sticking surface and the cover side seal sticking surface are the same. If either the width dimension between the pair of long sides or the width dimension between the pair of short sides on the side seal sticking surface is matched, the above-described effect can be obtained.

  Further, in this embodiment, the positioning surfaces 412a and 422a are not only arranged at the corners of the seal seal 400, but also the positioning surfaces 411a and 421a are arranged along the long side portion of the seal seal 400, and the short side Since the side walls of the base member 201 and the cover member 202 function as positioning surfaces along the portion, the application position of the seal seal 400 can be accurately determined. Further, the positioning surfaces 412a, 422a, 411a, 421a and the side wall are provided so as to be suspended from the base side application surface and the cover side application surface and have a length protruding outward from the surface 400a of the seal seal 400. For this reason, it is difficult to insert a cutter or the like between the base side application surface and the cover side application surface and the opposing surface of the seal seal 400. Therefore, after the seal seal 400 is applied once, the seal seal It is extremely difficult to peel the 400 so as not to be damaged.

  The seal protection cover 228 is formed in a U-shape as shown in FIGS. 6 and 17 to 19 so as to sandwich the plate-like sealing portions 224 and 229 protruding outward from the side surface of the substrate case 200 from the front and rear. It is attached to. The front and rear width dimension of the seal protection cover 228 is formed wider than the separation width dimension of the pair of front and rear positioning protrusions 411, 411, 421 and 421, and when the seal protection cover 228 is attached to the sealing portions 224 and 229, The front and rear end edges of the inner surface of 228 are in contact with the contact restriction surfaces 413 and 423 of the positioning protrusions 411, 411, 421 and 421, respectively.

  As described above, the front and rear end edges of the inner surface of the seal protection cover 228 are in contact with the contact restriction surfaces 413 and 423, respectively, so that the opposing surfaces of the surface 400a of the seal seal 400 and the inner surface of the seal protection cover 228 are mutually. It is spaced apart and maintained in a non-contact state. That is, since a predetermined gap SP is provided between the opposed surfaces of the surface 400a of the seal seal 400 and the inner surface of the seal protection cover 228, the seal protection cover 228 is left and right while being in contact with the contact restriction surfaces 413 and 423. Even when it is slid to be attached to and detached from the sealing portions 224 and 229, it does not come into contact with the sealing seal 400, and even if any external force is applied to the sealing protective cover 228 in the mounted state, Since there is no direct transmission, the seal seal 400 is prevented from being damaged.

  Further, by fitting the seal protective cover 228 into the sealing portions 224 and 229, the engagement convex portions 414 and 414 are engaged with the engagement concave portions 228a formed on the inner surface of the seal protective cover 228, and thus once mounted. After that, it cannot be removed unless the engagement is released. In this way, it takes time to open the cover member 202 illegally, thereby making it extremely difficult to perform an illegal act.

  Since the outer surface of the seal seal 400 is covered with the seal protection cover 228 in this way, the surface 400a of the seal seal 400 is protected by the seal protection cover 228 in the sealed state, and cannot directly touch the seal seal 400. In addition to preventing fraudulent acts on the seal sticker 400 as much as possible, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of damage due to the application of some external force to the seal sticker 400 when the substrate case 200 is attached to, removed from, or used for the case 1a. it can.

  Further, the seal protection cover 228 is abutted and supported by the abutment restricting surfaces 413 and 423 of the positioning protrusions 411, 411, 421, and 421 protruding from the periphery of the seal seal 400, so that the seal seal 400 and the seal protection are protected. The surface facing the cover 228 can be maintained in a non-contact state, and the external force applied to the seal protection cover 228 is not directly transmitted to the seal seal 400, so that the seal seal 400 can be prevented from being damaged.

  In the first embodiment, the welded portion as an assembling means for assembling the cover member 202 to the base member 201, the base-side sealing portion 229, and the cover-side sealing portion 224 are on the left side of the substrate case 200, that is, described later. The movable base 302 is arranged in parallel on the right side (opposite side) opposite to the left side arranged on the rotating shaft 333 side.

  Further, the cover member 202 has a structure that cannot be detached from the base member 201 unless the cover member 202 is slid in the unlocking direction with respect to the base member 201 from the aligned state. That is, a slide movement guide means is provided that slides and guides in a direction substantially perpendicular to the direction in which the cover member 202 is removed from the base member 201. Since the cover-side welded portion 223 and the base-side welded portion 207 have a locking action when they are separated from each other toward the opposite sides, the cover-side welded portion 223 and the base-side welded portion 223 It becomes extremely difficult to peel off 207.

  Further, even if two substrate cases of the same type as the substrate case 200 are obtained as in the prior art, both of the base member 201 and the cover member 202 are left scratched when the cover member 202 is opened, and the base is not damaged. Since the member 201 and the cover member 202 cannot be obtained, it is extremely difficult to illegally configure the new substrate case 200.

  As described above, the cover side welding portion 223 and the base side welding portion 207 are welded (fixed) to each other, whereby the sliding movement of the cover member 202 with respect to the base member 201 is restricted. That is, in a state where the locking pieces 203, 203 formed on one short side of the base member 201 are locked to the insertion holes 222, 222 of the cover member 202, the cover side welded portion 223 on the other short side and the base A first sealing state in which the upper surface of the base member 201 is closed by the cover member 202 is configured by the side welded portion 207 being fixed. This first sealed state cannot be released unless both the cover-side welded portion 223 of the cover member 202 and the welded portion of the base-side welded portion 207 of the base member 201 are cut (broken). When it is opened, the trace, that is, the trace that a part of the board case 200 is destroyed, is surely left. As a result, some illegal act is performed on the game control board 40 accommodated in the board case 200. It becomes possible to discover that there is a possibility.

  In this embodiment, when the base member 201 and the cover member 202 are aligned at the closed position, the cover-side welded portion 223 and the base-side welded portion 207 come into contact with each other. As long as it is possible, the cover-side welded portion 223 and the base-side welded portion 207 may be spaced apart from each other.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 5, the case support device 300 includes a fixed base 301 that is attached to the upper part of the inner surface of the back plate 1c of the housing 1a, a locking member 303 that is attached to the right side of the fixed base 301, and a fixed base. A movable base 302 that is rotatably supported by 301 is mainly configured. The movable base 302 has a substrate case 200 attached to the front side, and is supported so as to be rotatable around a rotation axis that faces the fixed base 301 in the vertical direction.

  Then, by attaching the substrate case 200 to the front side of the movable base 302, the substrate case 200 is arranged in a first rotation restricting position A (see FIG. 4) where the back surface 40b side of the game control substrate 40 is disposed opposite to the back plate 1c and cannot be seen. 14 (a)) and the second rotation restricting position B (see FIG. 14 (b)) at which the back surface 40b side of the game control board 40 can be visually recognized. Since the board case 200 is attached to the back plate 1c, the mounting surface 40a and the back surface 40b of the game control board 40 accommodated in the board case 200 are moved to the transparent board case 200 and movable. It can be visually recognized through the base 302.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 to 14, the movable base 302 is made of a transparent thermoplastic synthetic resin, has a substantially rectangular bottom plate 310 a, and is erected forward on the upper and lower long sides of the bottom plate 310 a. A pair of side walls 310b and 310b are respectively extended in the longitudinal direction, and short side walls 310c and 310c are continuously provided from both ends of the left short side portion in the longitudinal direction from the ends of the side walls 310b and 310b, and on the right short side portion. The side wall 310d of the short side extends in the longitudinal direction.

  An elastic locking claw 311 capable of locking a predetermined portion of the cover member 202 in the substrate case 200 attached to the front surface side of the bottom plate 310a is formed inward at the right end portion of the upper side wall 310b. 200 can be locked.

  A board-side connector 620c (see FIG. 4) of the game control board 40, a cable-side connector 610c connected to the board-side connector 620c, and a protective member 660 that protects the cable 600c are attached to the left end of the lower side wall 310b. A mounting slit 312 is formed. The attachment slit 312 is formed by bulging a part of the side wall 310b, and can be inserted through the attachment piece 660a of the protection member 660. Further, a locking hole 312a is formed on the outer surface of the mounting slit 312 so that the outward elastic locking claw 660b formed in the mounting piece 660a is locked. It can be regulated.

  In this way, the attachment piece 660a is inserted into the attachment slit 312 and the elastic engagement claw 660b is engaged with the engagement hole 312a, so that the guard piece 660c and the guard side piece formed to be bent with respect to the attachment piece 660a. The periphery of the board-side connector 620c, the cable-side connector 610c connected to the board-side connector 620c, and the cable 600c is covered and protected by 660d.

  In the vicinity of the short side portion on the right side of the bottom plate 310a, mounting holes 316a and 316b to which the one-way screws 240a and 240b inserted into the mounting sealing piece 230 and the spare mounting sealing piece 231 of the substrate case 200 are attached are formed. A base mounting hole 317 for mounting the mounting base 315 is formed. The mounting base 315 is mounted by fitting into the base mounting hole 317 from the back side of the bottom plate 310a. At the time of mounting, as shown in FIG. 13A, the mounting holes 316a and 316b protrude forward from the front surface of the bottom plate 310a, and the mounting holes 235 of the mounting sealing piece 230 and the spare mounting sealing piece 231 are provided. , 235 are arranged opposite to each other.

  As described above, the mounting base 315 is detachably attached to the movable base 302, so that, for example, the mounting sealing piece 230 and the spare mounting sealing piece 231 are cut from the substrate case 200 as described later. When the movable base 302 is left behind, only the mounting base 315 can be replaced with a new one.

  Locking pins 303a and 303a (see FIG. 5) of a locking member 303 for locking the free end of the movable base 302 to the front side of the back plate 1c are provided on the short side on the right side of the movable base 302. Insertable insertion holes 318 and 318 are formed, and in the vicinity of the respective insertion holes 318 and 318, locking hooks 319 and 319 that can be locked to the tips of the locking pins 303a and 303a are provided in the front-rear direction. It is attached so that it can turn around the axis.

  From both sides in the longitudinal direction of the short side on the left side of the movable base 302, a plate-like shape in which a shaft support groove 320 having a substantially U shape for receiving a rotation shaft 333 formed on the fixed base 301 described later is formed. The shaft support plates 321 and 321 are projected outward in a direction orthogonal to the short side portion. The shaft support groove 320 extends rearward from the front end sides of the shaft support plates 321 and 321, and the rotation shaft 333 can be attached to and removed from the opening portion on the front side.

  A covering portion 322 that covers a base mounting screw 335 for mounting a fixed base 301 (to be described later) to the back plate 1c is formed at the central position in the longitudinal direction of the short side portion on the left side of the movable base 302. The covering portion 322 is parallel to the vertical piece 322b erected vertically from the short side of the bottom plate 310a toward the front, and the bottom plate 310a bent outward from the tip of the vertical piece 322b. The bent piece 322a is formed of side pieces 322c and 322c that cover the sides of the bent piece 322a and the vertical piece 322b, and an outer piece 322d that is inclined outward from the tip of the bent piece 322a. In addition, the bent piece 322a has a length that can cover the base mounting screw 335 (see FIG. 13) directly in a state where the pivot support groove 320 is pivotally supported on the rotation shaft 333 of the fixed base 301.

  The upper and lower side pieces 322c and the shaft support plate 321 are arranged with a predetermined distance therebetween, and an insertion portion through which the plate-like piece 221 of the cover member 202 can be inserted between the side pieces 322c and the shaft support plate 321. 324 and 324 are formed. Since the insertion portions 324 and 324 are formed to have a vertical width slightly longer than the vertical width of the plate-like pieces 221, 221, the substrate case 200 is attached to the front side of the movable base 302 as will be described later. In this state, the upper and lower side portions of the plate-like pieces 221 and 221 inserted through the insertion portions 324 and 324 are guided by the side piece 322c and the shaft support plate 321. Further, the vertical piece 322b contacts the side wall 202c of the cover member 202 and determines the position of the substrate case 200 in the left-right direction with respect to the movable base 302.

  At the distal end portions of the insertion portions 324 and 324, band plate-like locking plates 323 and 323 that lock the front side of the distal end portions of the plate-like pieces 221 and 221 inserted through the insertion portions 324 and 324 are pivotally supported. It is constructed between the plate 321 and the side piece 322c. That is, the upper and lower shaft support plates 321 and the side pieces 322c are connected by the locking plates 323 and 323, respectively. Further, since the locking plates 323 and 323 are disposed outside the shaft support grooves 320 and 320, they do not interfere when the rotating shafts 333 and 333 are attached to and detached from the shaft support grooves 320 and 320.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the fixed base 301 is attached to the inner surface of the back plate 1c and is attached to the inner surface of the back plate 1c in the vertical direction, and the upper and lower portions are bent forward from the upper and lower ends of the attachment piece 330a. A main body portion made of a plate-shaped metal material composed of a pair of shaft pieces 330b, 330b and a protective piece 330c bent forward from the left side of the mounting piece 330a, and each of the shaft pieces 330b, 330b From the opposing surfaces, cylindrical pivot shafts 333 and 333 facing upward and downward are respectively provided inwardly projecting so that the respective axes P1 (see FIG. 13B) are located on the same line. It is configured.

  The pair of upper and lower rotating shafts 333 and 333 are arranged in parallel to the mounting piece 330a at a position in front of the mounting piece 330a so that the tip portions thereof are separated from each other by a predetermined distance. The base mounting screw 335 is a so-called general screw that can be attached and detached by rotating the forward and reverse directions by fitting the tip of the driver into the screw groove. The fixed base 301 configured as described above is attached to the inner surface of the back plate 1c by a base mounting screw 335. The cover member 336 is formed so as to accommodate the head of the base mounting screw 335.

  When the movable base 302 is attached to the fixed base 301, the left and right end portions of the movable base 302 are oriented in the longitudinal direction so as to be orthogonal to the back plate 1c with the front and rear direction directed. As a result, since the open portions of the shaft support grooves 320 and 320 face the rotation shafts 333 and 333, the movable base 302 is brought close to the fixed base 301 in this posture, and the shaft support grooves 320 and 320 are moved to the rotation shaft 333. After being inserted into 333, the front side of the movable base 302 is pushed toward the back plate 1 c around the rotation shafts 333 and 333.

  When the movable base 302 is disposed in the lateral orientation in which the rear surface faces the inner surface of the back plate 1 c, that is, in the first rotation restricting position A, the locking pins 303 a and 303 a of the locking member 303 are arranged on the movable base 302. The locking hooks 319 and 319 are rotated and engaged with the tips of the locking pins 303a and 303a that are inserted into the insertion holes 318 and 318 and the tips of the locking pins 303a and 303a protrude forward from the insertion holes 318 and 318, respectively. Stop. Accordingly, the left end portion of the movable base 302 is pivotally supported by the rotation shafts 333 and 333, and the right end portion is locked by the locking pins 303a and 303a, whereby the movable base 302 is detached from the back plate 1c. And the rotation around the rotation shafts 333 and 333 is restricted, and is temporarily fixed at a first rotation restriction position A substantially parallel to the back plate 1c.

  In this way, when the pivot bases 320 and 320 of the movable base 302 are pivotally supported on the pivot shafts 333 and 333 of the fixed base 301 and the movable base 302 is disposed at the first rotation restriction position A, the pivot support grooves 320 and 320 are arranged. 320 is open frontward in the front-rear direction, but when the back plate 1c is close to the rear surface of the movable base 302, the rearward movement of the shaft support grooves 320, 320 with respect to the rotating shafts 333, 333 is restricted. Therefore, the shaft support grooves 320 and 320 are not detached from the rotation shafts 333 and 333.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13, the front side of the base mounting screw 335 for attaching the fixed base 301 to the back plate 1c is covered with the covering portion 322 of the movable base 302, and the left outer side is covered with the protective piece 330c. Even if a driver or a finger is brought into contact with the base mounting screw 335, not only is the contact difficult, but the driver cannot be placed on an extension line of the axis P2 of the base mounting screw 335.

  Next, in order to attach the substrate case 200 in the sealed state as described above to the movable base 302 temporarily fixed at the first rotation restricting position A, as shown in FIG. A pair of plate-like pieces 221, 221 provided on the left short side of the cover member 202 are slid to the left side with the side facing the front surface of the movable base 302, and the rotation shafts 333, 333 After being inserted into a gap formed between the locking plates 323 and 323 (see FIG. 13A), the right short side of the substrate case 200 is pushed toward the movable base 302.

  At this time, the tips of the plate-like pieces 221 and 221 are locked to the locking plates 323 and 323 (see FIG. 13B), and the upper side of the cover member 202 on the right end side is the elastic locking of the movable base 302. Locked to the claw 311. The substrate case 200 is covered with the side walls 310b, 310c, and 310d of the movable base 302, so that the sliding movement of the movable base 302 on the bottom plate 310a is restricted, so that the separation from the movable base 302 is restricted. . However, in this temporarily fixed state, the substrate case 200 can be easily removed from the movable base 302 by releasing the locked state of the cover member 202 by the elastic locking claw 311.

  Further, in the temporarily fixed state, the mounting sealing piece 230 and the spare mounting sealing piece 231 in the cover member 202 are arranged to face the mounting base 315, and the mounting sealing piece 230 and the spare mounting sealing piece 231 are arranged. The mounting holes 235 and 235 coincide with the mounting holes 316 a and 316 b of the mounting base 315. Here, as shown in FIG. 13A, when the one-way screw 240a accommodated in the mounting sealing piece 230 is screwed into the screw hole 316a by a screwdriver, the substrate case 200 cannot be detached from the movable base 302. Attached to.

  That is, once the one-way screw 240a is attached to the screw hole 316a, even if a tool such as a screwdriver is inserted into the operation groove, the one-way screw 240a cannot be reversely rotated, that is, cannot be removed from the screw hole 316a again. Therefore, the substrate case 200 is attached so that it cannot be removed from the movable base 302 unless a predetermined portion (for example, the cut piece 233 of the attachment sealing piece 230) of the substrate case 200 or the movable base 302 is cut (destroyed). Installed in a state.

  When removing the board case 200 from the movable base 302 for inspection of the game control board 40, it is necessary not only to cut the cutting piece 233 of the mounting sealing piece 230 but also a one-way screw screwed into the screw hole 316a. 240a and the mounting sealing piece 230 cut from the substrate case 200 cannot be removed from the mounting base 315 and remain held by the movable base 302. Therefore, the one-way screw 240a is attached to the mounting sealing piece 230, and the same Thus, it cannot be attached to the movable base 302. That is, once the mounting state of the substrate case 200 with respect to the movable base 302 is released, a spare one-way screw 240b is attached to a spare mounting sealing piece 231 different from the mounting sealing piece 230 used for once mounting. It attaches to the screw hole 316b.

  In this attached state, as shown in FIG. 13B, the plate-like pieces 221 and 221 are inserted into the gaps formed between the rotating shafts 333 and 333 and the locking plates 323 and 323. Thus, the detachment of the rotation shafts 333 and 333 from the shaft support grooves 320 and 320 is restricted by the plate-like pieces 221 and 221 of the substrate case 200 attached to the movable base 302. As a result, the pivotal support state of the movable base 302 with respect to the fixed base 301 cannot be released.

  Unless the substrate case 200 is removed from the movable base 302, the plate-like pieces 221 and 221 inserted into the gap formed between the rotating shafts 333 and 333 and the locking plates 323 and 323 are taken out from the gap. In other words, since it is not possible to release the restriction of detachment of the shaft support grooves 320, 320 from the rotation shafts 333, 333, not only the substrate case 200 is removed from the movable base 302 but also the movable base 302 is removed from the fixed base 301. It cannot be removed.

  Further, the rotation shafts 333 and 333 are covered with plate-like pieces 221 and 221 inserted into gaps formed between the rotation shafts 333 and 333 and the locking plates 323 and 323. Specifically, the locking plates 323 and 323 have a slightly smaller width than the separation width between the shaft support plate 321 and the side piece 322c, so that the rotation shafts 333 and 333 and the locking plate 323 are arranged. , 323, the movable base 302 is separated from the fixed base 301 by cutting the rotary shafts 333 and 333 in order to cover the longitudinal directions of the rotary shafts 333 and 333. Unauthorized actions such as removal are prevented.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the board case 200 attached to the case support device 300 attached to the back plate 1c in this way has the electronic component mounting surface 40a of the game control board 40 facing the front side and the back side 40b side. A first rotation restricting position A that faces the inner surface of the back plate 1c and becomes invisible from the front side of the housing 1a, and the mounting surface 40a faces the inner surface of the left side plate of the housing 1a and the game control board 40 The back surface 40b side is supported so as to be rotatable within a rotatable range (about 83 degrees) between the second rotation restricting position B that is visible from the front side of the housing 1a.

  Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 14A, when the board case 200 is positioned at the first rotation restricting position A, the mounting surface 40a of the game control board 40 faces the front side, so the board case 200 Even if the mounting surface 40a is not removed from the movable base 302, the mounting surface 40a can be viewed through the transparent cover member 202 from the front side of the housing 1a.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14B, when the substrate case 200 is positioned in the vicinity of the second rotation restricting position B, the back surface 40b of the game control substrate 40 is separated from the back plate 1c and the right side is moved. Therefore, even if the substrate case 200 is not removed from the movable base 302, the back surface 40b can be viewed through the transparent base member 201 and the transparent movable base 302 from the front side of the housing 1a. Therefore, even when the board case 200 is attached to the housing 1a, there is a trace that the mounting surface 40a and the back surface 40b of the game control board 40 accommodated therein are tampered with by simply rotating the board case 200. It can be easily confirmed visually whether or not there is.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14A, the substrate case 200 is normally disposed at the first rotation restricting position A. In this state, cable-side connectors of various cables are connected to the board-side connectors arranged so as to face the connector openings 236a to 236g formed in the cover member 202.

  Of the connector openings 236a to 236g formed in the cover member 202, the connector openings 236d to 236c that the board side connectors 620a to 620c face are as shown in FIG. Is also provided on the left region, that is, on the side where the rotation shafts 333 and 333 are disposed. Of the board-side connectors 620a to 620c facing the connector openings 236a to 236c, the connection part between the cable-side connector 610c and the board-side connector 620c, one end of which is connected to the power supply board 101, is covered by the protective member 660 described above. In addition, the connection portion between the cable-side connector 610b and the board-side connector 620b, one end of which is connected to the start switch 7, is covered by the connector restricting member 650 described above, and in particular, the cable-side connector 610b covered by the connector restricting member 650. Is restricted from being removed from the board-side connector 620b.

  Thus, the cables 600a to 600c connected to the board-side connectors 620a to 620c provided in the region on the left side of the center position in the left-right direction of the cover member 202 are wired together on the inner surface of the left side plate. The cable-side connectors 610a to 610c provided on the cables 600a to 600c can rotate the substrate case 200 to the second rotation restriction position B without being removed from the substrate-side connectors 620a to 620c. It has become. Further, if the cable-side connector connected to the board-side connector provided in the region on the right side of the center position in the left-right direction of the cover member 202 is not removed from the board-side connector, the board case 200 is controlled to the second rotation restriction. It can be rotated to position B.

  In other words, the board-side connectors 620a to 620c arranged in the left region near the rotation shaft 333 have a movement distance when the substrate case 200 is rotated around the rotation shaft 333 so that the movement distance is far from the rotation shaft 333. Therefore, the surplus length of the connected cables 600a to 600c is shorter than that of the cable connected to the board-side connector arranged in the right region far from the rotation shaft 333. I'll do it.

  Therefore, if the board-side connectors 620a to 620c and the like that are covered by the protective member 660 and the connector restricting member 650 and are troublesome to remove are arranged in the left region near the rotation shaft 333, the board case 200 is rotated. Since it is not necessary to sequentially remove the cable-side connectors 610a to 610c from the board-side connectors 620a to 620c each time it is moved, the check operation of the game control board 40 is not complicated and the cables are connected to the board-side connectors 620a to 620a. When the substrate case 200 can be rotated without being removed from the 620c, the cables 600a to 600c can be shortened as much as possible.

  In the present embodiment, the substrate case 200 is attached to the upper portion of the back plate of the housing 1a as shown in FIG. The connector openings 236a to 236g facing the board side connectors 620a to 620c to which the various cables 600a to 600c and 600k are connected are arranged along the lower side of the board case 200. Of these cables 600a to 600c and 600k connected to the game control board 40, the cables 600a to 600c are provided on the inner surface of the left side plate of the housing 1a at a position below the board case 200 as shown in FIG. The wiring hooks HF are wired together. The other cable 600k extends downward and is connected to a reel relay board 120 and the like disposed below the board case 200 in the housing 1a.

  That is, the cables 600a to 600c and 600k having one end connected to the game control board 40 are held (connected) by the wiring holding parts such as the wiring hook HF and the reel relay board 120 disposed below the board case 200. Therefore, the seal seal 400 that is affixed to the position higher than the connector openings 236a to 236g in the board case 200 does not overlap with the cables 600a to 600c, 600k, and the like so that the seal seal 400 is not hidden. ing. Therefore, in the seal seal 400, the solvent use display portions 450A to 450D are arranged in portions that do not overlap with the wirings such as the cables 600a to 600c and 600k when the seal seal 400 is attached to the substrate case 200.

  In other words, when the seal sticker 400 is affixed to the board case 200, the seal sticker 400 does not overlap with a straight line connecting the board-side connector of the game control board 40 and the wiring holding part such as the wiring hook HF or the reel relay board 120 or the like. Since it is arrange | positioned in the vicinity position, it is prevented that the solvent use display part 450A-450D is hidden by wiring, and the visibility of the solvent use display part 450A-450D is impaired.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 as the first embodiment of the present invention, as shown in FIG. 15, the solvent use display portion 450 </ b> A and the first identification information display portion 451 are provided on the surface of the seal base 401. The upper region R1 provided with the second identification information display part 452 and the hologram display part 453A is located on the front sticking surface 224a of the cover side sealing part 224, and is provided with a solvent use display part 450B and a solvent use display part 450C. The intermediate region R2 is located on the upper right sticking surface 224b and the lower right sticking surface 229b, and the lower region R3 provided with the solvent use display portion 450D and the hologram display portion 453B is on the rear sticking surface 229a of the base side sealing portion 229. To position.

  The seal sticker 400 is not positioned at the boundary portion Z between the cover member 202 and the base member 201 when the seal sticker 400 is applied so as to straddle the base side seal part 229 and the cover side seal part 224 in the substrate case 200. Since the solvent use display portions 450A to 450D are printed and formed on the portions, the solvent use display portions 450A to 450D do not hang on the boundary Z when the sealing state is set. Since the seal seal 400 was broken for the inspection of the substrate 40 and the substrate case 200 was opened, the solvent use display portions 450A to 450D were broken, and traces of contact with the solvent appeared before that. Is prevented from becoming difficult to understand.

  Specifically, the substrate case 200 of the present embodiment can be opened by sliding the cover member 202 with respect to the base member 201, so that the sealing seal 400 is attached to the base side sealing portion 229 and the cover side of the substrate case 200. When the substrate case 200 is opened in the second sealing state pasted so as to straddle the sealing portion 224, the portion corresponding to the boundary portion Z in the sealing seal 400 is easily broken. Therefore, in the seal sticker 400, when any of the solvent use display parts 450A to 450D is printed on the part corresponding to (corresponding to) the boundary part Z when the base side seal part 229 and the cover side seal part 224 are attached. Even if the solvent use display portions 450A to 450D are dissolved by use of the solvent, for example, by opening the substrate case 200 for inspection of the game control substrate 40 in a game store, the boundary portion Z of the seal seal 400 Will break, and it will be difficult to determine if the solvent usage indicator has disappeared and is no longer visible, or if it has become invisible due to fracture, so it will be difficult to understand that traces of contact with the solvent have appeared. . Therefore, the solvent use display portions 450A to 450D are printed and formed on the portion not located at the boundary Z between the cover member 202 and the base member 201 when pasted so as to straddle the base side sealing portion 229 and the cover side sealing portion 224. Has been.

  The seal seal 400 has the same direction as the mounting surface 40a on which the control microcomputer (the microcomputer including the CPU 41a, the ROM 41b, the RAM 41c, and the I / O port 41d) is mounted on the game control board 40 which is an example of a circuit board. Since the solvent use display portion 450A is arranged in the upper region R1 that is a portion facing (upward), both the solvent use display portion 450A and the mounting surface 40a of the control microcomputer can be viewed together ( 14 (a)), it is possible to easily confirm the illegal act on the solvent use display unit 450A and the control microcomputer (the microcomputer including the CPU 41a, the ROM 41b, the RAM 41c, and the I / O port 41d). Therefore, the work load can be reduced.

  It should be noted that the act of confirming fraud against the control microcomputer (the microcomputer having the CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d) is, for example, an illegal circuit in the CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d. Since it is an operation to confirm whether the board is connected or the CPU 41a, ROM 41b, etc. are replaced with an unauthorized CPU, ROM, etc., the mounting surface 40a on which these are mounted and the solvent use indicator 450A are provided. If they are arranged upward, it is possible to confirm both situations at the same time from the front side of the substrate case 200.

  In addition, the seal sticker 400 is attached to the substrate case 200 in the upper region R1, which is a portion facing in the same direction (upward), and a solvent use display portion 450A and a first identification information display portion 451 as an identification information display portion. Since the second identification information display unit 452 is disposed, both the solvent use display unit 450A, the first identification information display unit 451, and the second identification information display unit 452 can be viewed together. Since it is possible to easily check the solvent use display unit 450A, the first identification information display unit 451, and the second identification information display unit 452, the work load can be reduced.

  Further, in this embodiment, the seal seal 400 includes an upper region R1 in which the solvent use display unit 450A, the first identification information display unit 451, and the second identification information display unit 452 are directed in the same direction (upward). By being arranged in the above, the control microcomputer (the CPU 41a, the ROM 41b, the RAM 41c, the microcomputer including the I / O port 41d) is mounted in the same direction (upward) as the mounting surface 40a. In addition to the confirmation work of the solvent use display section 450A, the first identification information display section 451, and the second identification information display section 452, it is possible to easily perform a fraud confirmation work for the control microcomputer. Work load can be reduced.

  Further, in this embodiment, the solvent use display portion and the identification information display portion are printed in the upper region R1 which is a portion facing upward when being attached to the substrate case 200 in the seal sticker 400. It may be printed in the region R2 or the lower region R3.

  In the present embodiment, the solvent use display portion 450A and the first identification information display portion 451 and the second identification information display portion 452 as the identification information display portion are arranged in the upper region R1, but the identification information display portion As long as at least one of the first identification information display unit 451 and the second identification information display unit 452 is disposed. Other identification information may also be arranged.

  In addition, when pasted across a plurality of pasting surfaces (rear pasting surface 229a, lower right pasting surface 229b, front pasting surface 224a, upper right pasting surface 224b), between one pasting surface and the other pasting surface The formed corner, specifically, the corner C1 (see FIG. 16) formed between the rear application surface 229a and the lower right application surface 229b, or between the front application surface 224a and the upper right application surface 224b. When the solvent use display portions 450A to 450D are arranged in a portion not positioned at the corner portion C2 (see FIG. 16) formed in the substrate (see FIG. 15A), the solvent is used when the substrate case 200 is pasted. Since the use display portions 450A to 450D do not hang over the corner portions C1 and C2, it is possible to prevent the visibility from being impaired by bending the characters of the solvent use display portions 450A to 450D.

  In this embodiment, the corners C1 and C2 are corners having a bending angle of about 90 degrees, but may be obtuse corners of 90 degrees or more or acute corners of less than 90 degrees. In this embodiment, when the substrate case 200 is attached to the movable base 302, the corner portion C1 is disposed close to the movable base 302, whereas the corner portion C2 is exposed to the front surface side. It is preferable that the solvent use display portions 450A to 450D are arranged at portions not located at the corner portion C2.

  That is, a part of one solvent use indicator is arranged on one affixing surface, and another part is arranged on another affixing surface whose direction is different from that of one affixing surface, so that one solvent use indicator is What is necessary is just not to bend by the corner | angular part formed between one sticking surface and another sticking surface.

  Further, by further including a seal protection cover 228 as a seal seal covering member capable of covering the seal seal 400 affixed to the substrate case 200, the seal seal 400 is covered with the seal protection cover 228, so that the seal seal 400 is covered. In order to peel off, the seal protection cover 228 must be removed, and it takes time and effort, so that illegal actions can be suppressed.

  In this embodiment, since the seal protection cover 228 is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, even when it is covered with the seal protection cover 228, the seal protection cover 228 can be used through the seal protection cover 228. Since it can be confirmed whether the display portions 450A to 450D have disappeared or become thin, it can be easily confirmed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14, the seal seal 400 includes cables 600 a to 600 c and 600 k (wiring) connected to the game control board 40 housed in the board case 200 when attached to the board case 200. Since the solvent use display portions 450A to 450D are arranged in the non-overlapping portions, the solvent use display portions 450A to 450D are not hidden by the cables 600a to 600c and 600k. Visibility is prevented from being impaired.

  In the present embodiment, when the substrate case 200 is attached to the housing 1a, the seal seal 400 is disposed at a position higher than the cables 600a to 600c and 600k, so that the solvent use display portions 450A to 450D are displayed. The cables 600a to 600c and 600k (wiring) do not overlap with each other. However, even when one end of these wirings is held at a position above the seal seal 400, the first holding portion that holds the wiring and the cable It is only necessary that the solvent use display portions 450A to 450D of the seal seal 400 be disposed at a position that does not overlap on a straight line connecting the second holding portion different from the first holding portion or a position in the vicinity thereof.

  The first holding part for holding the wiring and the second holding part different from the first holding part may be a connector for connecting one end or the other end of the wiring, or one end and the other end of the wiring. It may be a wiring hook or the like that holds a place other than the above.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the seal seal 400 is provided at a predetermined portion of the seal seal 400 by providing a corner-side cut 408 as a weakened portion whose strength is lower than that of other portions. Since the corner-side cut 408 is easily broken at the time of peeling, it is possible to suppress an illegal act such as reattaching the seal seal 400 peeled by the solvent.

  In the first embodiment, the seal seal 400 includes a first identification information display unit 451 in which a serial number or the like, which is identification information that can identify each seal seal 400, is displayed so as to be visually readable. A second identification information display unit 452 that can be read by a predetermined reading device (not shown) by encoding a two-dimensional barcode or the like that is identification information that can identify the seal seal 400; Separately from the first identification information display unit 451, the second identification information display unit 452 that can be read only by a predetermined reader is provided, so that the identification information is read from the second identification information display unit 452. Is difficult, and it takes time to forge the seal seal 400, so that the security is improved.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the protruding strips 411 and 421 which are peripheral wall portions are provided around the sealing portion including the base side sealing portion 229 and the cover side sealing portion 224 so as to surround the periphery of the pasted sealing seal 400. By being formed, when the seal seal 400 is peeled off, the surrounding ridges 411 and 421 become obstructive and difficult to peel off, so that it is possible to suppress an illegal act such as reattaching the seal seal 400 peeled by the solvent. .

  In addition, in the present Example 1, the peripheral wall part was formed by the protruding item | line, However, A peripheral wall part may be formed in the surrounding surface of this recessed part by making the recessed part formed in the plane into a sealing seal sticking part. .

  In the first embodiment, the seal seal 400 does not include an electronic tag that can read identification information (for example, a serial number) that can identify each seal seal by a predetermined electromagnetic wave. An electronic tag may be provided by being embedded in, for example, the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 402 of the seal seal 400. In this way, management of the identification information becomes easy, and since it is necessary to use a predetermined electromagnetic wave to read the identification information, it becomes time-consuming to forge the seal seal. Will improve.

  Further, even when the substrate case 200 is attached to the housing 1a, the front and back sides of the game control board 40 can be visually recognized by rotating the movable base 302 with respect to the fixed base 301. Since both the welded portion and the sealing portion including the sealing seal 400 are arranged on the right side opposite to the rotating shaft 333, whether or not the cover member 202 has been opened, that is, the game control board 40 is illegally modified. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not it has been applied. In addition, in the assembled state, when the cover member 202 is opened, the trace remains, and therefore it is possible that an illegal act such as switching to the board case 200 containing the illegal game control board 40 may be performed. You can discover that there is sex.

  In the first embodiment, the welding portion is applied as an assembling means for assembling the cover member 202 to the base member 201. However, the present invention is not limited to such a welding means. For example, a one-way screw, a latch, or the like is used. A means for assembling with an assembling member may be used.

  In the first embodiment, the welded portion and the sealing portion are provided on one short side portion of the substrate case 200. However, when the rotating shaft 333 is disposed on one long side portion side, What is necessary is just to provide a welding part and a sealing part in the long side part side.

  Even when the board case 200 is attached to the back plate 1c, the back surface 40b side of the game control board 40 is visually recognized by rotating the board case 200 from the first rotation restriction position A to the second rotation restriction position B. Therefore, it is possible to easily check whether or not the game control board 40 has been illegally modified. Further, when the movable base 302 is detached from the fixed base 301 or the substrate case 200 is detached from the movable base 302 in the assembled state in which the substrate case 200 is attached to the movable base 302, a cut piece 233 or a plate-like shape is obtained. Not only the traces are left by cutting the piece 221 and the like, but also when the base mounting screw 335 is removed and the fixed base 301 is removed from the back plate 1c, that is, the board case 200 is cut to be removed from the movable base 302. Since the trace remains even when the piece 233 is cut or the covering portion 322 or the cover member 336 of the movable base 302 is destroyed, the board case 200 is removed from the back plate 1c, and the board containing the illegal game control board 40 Found that there was a possibility of fraudulent actions such as turning back to Case 200 Rukoto can.

  In other words, the attachment of the substrate case 200 to the movable base 302, the attachment of the fixed base 301 to the movable base 302, and the attachment of the fixed base 301 to the back plate 1c destroy the attachment-related parts related to those attachments (cutting or If it is performed by the attachment means that cannot release each attachment state unless it includes (such as peeling), the trace remains reliably when each attachment state is released, and this causes illegal acts. It can be surely discovered that there was a possibility.

  In particular, in this embodiment, the front door 1b is pivotally supported on the left side of the housing 1a so that the substrate case 200 is also the same as the front door 1b when the front door 1b is opened. Since it rotates about the left side, when the back surface 40b of the substrate case 200 is visually recognized, the back surface 40b opens to the right without the front door 1b, and therefore the front door 1b becomes an obstacle when checking. There is no.

  Further, since the movable base 302 is configured to be attached to and detached from the fixed base 301 from a predetermined attaching / detaching position, the fixed base 301 can be easily attached and detached with the base attaching screw 335, and one-way. By attaching the substrate case 200 to the movable base 302 with the screws 240a, the plate-like piece 221 provided on the attached substrate case 200 regulates the detachment of the rotating shaft 333 from the shaft support groove 320, thereby fixing the fixed base. Since the covering portion 322 provided on the movable base 302 that can no longer be detached from the 301 cannot always release the mounting state by the base mounting screw 335 within the rotatable range, the fixed base 301 and the like are destroyed. Even if it is necessary to replace It is not necessary to or removed from a like back plate 1c of the fixed base 301 to destroy, it is possible to reuse a housing 1a.

  In addition, since the movable base 302 can be attached to and detached from the fixed base 301 unless the substrate case 200 is attached, a predetermined part is damaged or destroyed due to, for example, a turning operation or an illegal act. When the shaft support groove 320 is worn due to friction with the rotation shaft 333 or the like, it is possible to easily remove it from the fixed base 301.

  Further, since the detachment of the movable base 302 from the fixed base 301 can be regulated by using the attachment of the substrate case 200 to the movable base 302 by the one-way screw 240a, the movable base 302 can be simply removed from the movable base 302. In addition to the one-way screw 240a for attaching the substrate case 200 to the movable base 302, a means for regulating the separation of the rotating shaft 333 from the shaft support groove 320 can be removed. Therefore, not only can the structure of the case support device 300 be simplified, but also the work load can be reduced.

  In addition, since the substrate case 200 is attached to the movable base 302 with the one-way screw 240a that cannot be removed once attached to the attachment base 315, the cutting piece 233 is cut to attach the attachment sealing piece 230 to the substrate case 200. The substrate case 200 cannot be removed from the movable base 302 unless it is separated from the main body or the mounting base 315 or the like that is a part of the movable base 302 is destroyed. When the substrate case 200 is detached from the movable base 302 by separating the stop piece 230 from the main body of the substrate case 200, the attachment sealing piece 230 separated from the substrate case 200 is attached to the attachment base 315 together with the one-way screw 240a. The mounting sealing piece 230 is not a single member, but a movable base. Since remaining mounting base 315 of 302, it can be discarded along with the mounting base 315.

  In this embodiment, the mounting base 315 having mounting holes 316a and 316b as mounting portions of the movable base 302 to which the mounting sealing piece 230 as the mounting portion of the substrate case 200 and the auxiliary mounting sealing piece 231 are mounted. Is provided so that it can be attached to and detached from the movable base 302, so that even when the substrate case 200 is removed twice, if only the mounting base 315 is replaced, the movable base 302 can be used without replacement. However, the mounting holes 316a and 316b may be directly formed in the movable base 302.

  In this embodiment, the substrate case 200 is attached to the movable base 302 with the one-way screws 240a and 240b. However, the attachment member such as a locking pin or the attachment member such as an adhesive, You may make it attach via the attachment member which cannot be removed once attached. Further, a locking pin or the like for attaching the substrate case 200 to the movable base 302 may be formed integrally with the substrate case 200 or the movable base 302 in advance.

  In this embodiment, the cover member 202 and the base member 201 are sealed by heat welding and sealing. However, a fixing member such as a one-way screw or a locking pin, or a fixing member such as an adhesive. You may make it fix through.

  In the present embodiment, the substrate case 200 is rotatably supported on the inner surface of the back plate 1c of the housing 1a via the case support device 300. However, the substrate case 200 is limited to those attached to the back plate 1c. It may be attached to the inner surfaces of the left and right side plates of the housing 1a, or may be attached to the rear surface of the front door 1b. Furthermore, you may attach to the attachment member etc. which are provided in these housing | casing 1a or the front door 1b.

  In the present embodiment, the board case 200 is capable of opening and closing the base member 201 that can cover the back surface 40b side of the game control board 40 as a circuit board, and the opening of the base member 201. The cover member 202 is configured to cover the mounting surface 40a side, but may be configured from a case body and a cover body that coverably cover the front and back surfaces of the game control board 40. The case body only needs to be provided with both a first see-through portion that can see through the mounting surface 40a and a second see-through portion that can see through the back surface 40b.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an assembling means including a welded portion made up of the cover-side welded portion 223 and the base-side welded portion 207, an attached sealing portion made up of the attached sealing piece 230 and the one-way screw 240a, and a base-side sealed portion 229 and the sealing part consisting of the cover side sealing part 224 are arranged in parallel on the right side opposite to the left side arranged on the rotating shaft 333 (shaft part) side of the case support device 300 in the substrate case 200. Therefore, in a state where the substrate case 200 is attached to the movable base 302, the movable base 302 is rotated to the second rotation restricting position B, so that the sealing state and the sealing seal by the welding and assembly means such as the one-way screw 240a are provided. Since both of the sealing states of the sealing portion by 400 can be observed at a time, whether or not there is a trace that the sealing state is released and the cover member 202 is opened, that is, the game control board 40 is illegally modified. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not it has been done.

In the present embodiment, the mounting surface 40a and the back surface 40b of the game control board 40 can be selectively visually recognized from the front side of the housing 1a inside the housing 1a of the slot machine 1 which is an example of the gaming machine. As described above, the movable base 302 is rotatably supported via the case support device 300. For example, when the substrate case 200 is rotatably supported by the pachinko gaming machine via the case support device 300, the pachinko game When the machine is opened, the mounting surface 40a and the back surface 40b of the game control board 40 supported rotatably on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine via the case support device 300 are selectively visible. May be.
[Example 2]
Next, a pachinko gaming machine 1001 as Example 2 of the present invention will be described based on FIGS.

  First, an overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1001 that is another example of the gaming machine will be described. As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the pachinko gaming machine 1001 includes an outer frame 1110 formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame 1100 attached to the inside of the outer frame 1110 so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1001 has a glass door frame 1002 formed in a frame shape provided in the gaming frame 1100 so as to be openable and closable. The game frame 1100 includes a front frame that can be freely opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 1110, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (except for a game board 1006 to be described later) attached thereto. ).

  A hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 1003 is provided on the lower surface of the glass door frame 1002. Below the hitting ball supply tray 1003, there is an extra ball receiving tray 1004 for storing game balls (also referred to as game balls) as game media that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 1003, and an operation unit for hitting a hit ball (hitting ball operation handle hitting ball An operation handle (operation knob) 1005 is provided. A game board 1006 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 1002. The game board 1006 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 1006 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 1007 is formed on the front surface of the game board 1006 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 1007, an effect display device 1009 configured by a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided. In the effect display device 1009, variable display (variation) of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 1009 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols (decorative symbols) as identification information. The effect display device 1009 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display device 1008a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 1009 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display device 1008a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 1008b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device in accordance with the variable display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  A first special symbol display (first variable display means) 1008a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided on the left side of the top of the effect display device 1009 in the game board 1006. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display device 1008a is realized by a simple and small display device (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the first special symbol display 1008a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. A second special symbol display (second variable display means) 1008b that variably displays a second special symbol as identification information is provided on the right side of the upper portion of the effect display device 1009 in the game board 1006. The second special symbol display 1008b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 1008b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. In addition, the first special symbol display device 1008a and the second special symbol display device 1008b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of, for example, 00 to 99.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 1008a and the second special symbol indicator 1008b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the execution condition of the variable display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 1013 or the second start winning opening) 1014), a variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) When the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that winning means that a game ball has entered a predetermined area such as a winning opening. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  The effect display device 1009 is for decoration (effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 1008a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 1008b. Display design (also referred to as a decorative design) as a design. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1008a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 1009 are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 1008b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 1009 are synchronized. Synchronous means that the start time and end time of variable display are substantially the same (may be exactly the same) and the variable display period is substantially the same (may be exactly the same). In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 1008a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 1008b, the effect display device 1009 causes the jackpot to be recalled. The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  Below the effect display device 1009, a winning device having a first start winning port 1013 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 1013 is guided to the back of the game board 1006 and detected by the first start opening switch 1013a.

  A variable winning ball device 1015 having a second starting winning port 1014 through which a game ball can be won is provided below the winning device having the first starting winning port (first starting port) 1013. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 1014 is guided to the back of the game board 1006 and detected by the second start opening switch 1014a. The variable winning ball apparatus 1015 is opened by a solenoid 1016. When the variable winning ball apparatus 1015 is in the open state, the game ball can be won in the second start winning opening 1014 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous to the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 1015 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second starting winning hole 1014 than the first starting winning hole 1013. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 1015 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning port 1014. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 1015 is in the closed state, it may be configured such that although it is difficult to win, it is possible to win (that is, the game ball is difficult to win).

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 1013 and the second start winning opening 1014 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 1015 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading toward the variable winning ball device 1015 is very likely to win the second start winning port 1014. The first start winning opening 1013 is provided immediately below the effect display device 1009, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 1009 and the first start winning port 1013 is further reduced, or the first start winning port is set. The winning percentage of the second starting prize opening 1014 is such that nails are densely arranged around the area 1013 or the nail arrangement around the first starting prize opening 1013 is difficult to guide the game ball to the first starting prize opening 1013. This may be higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 1013.

  At the bottom of the first special symbol display 1008a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 1013, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start prize memory) is displayed 4. A first special symbol storage memory display 1018a made up of two indicators (for example, LEDs) is provided. The first special symbol storage memory display 1018a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 1008a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Below the second special symbol display 1008b is a second special symbol hold comprising four indicators (for example, LEDs) for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 1014, that is, the second reserved memory number. A storage indicator 1018b is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 1018b increases the number of indicators that are turned on by one every time there is an effective start winning. Each time variable display on the second special symbol display device 1008b is started, the number of display devices that are lit is reduced by one.

  Further, the display screen of the effect display device 1009 is provided with a first reserved memory display unit 1018c for displaying the first reserved memory number and a second reserved memory display unit 1018d for displaying the second reserved memory number. . In addition, you may make it provide the area | region (sum total pending | holding memory display part) which displays the total number (sum total pending memory count) which is the sum total of the 1st pending memory count and the 2nd pending memory count. As described above, if the summation pending storage display section for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that are not satisfied with the variable display start condition.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20, a variable winning ball device 1015 that opens and closes only with respect to the second starting winning opening 1014 is provided. However, the first starting winning opening 1013 and the second starting winning opening 1013 are provided. Any of the winning openings 1014 may be provided with a variable winning ball apparatus that performs an opening / closing operation.

  As shown in FIG. 20, a special variable winning ball apparatus 1020 is provided below the variable winning ball apparatus 1015. The special variable winning ball apparatus 1020 includes an opening / closing plate, and when a specific display result (big win symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 1008a, and on the second special symbol display 1008b, a specific display result (big hit symbol). When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 1021 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. A game ball that has won a big winning opening is detected by the count switch 1023.

  A normal symbol display 1010 is provided at the lower right side of the game board 1006. The normal symbol display 1010 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 1032 and is detected by the gate switch 1032a, the variable display of the normal symbol display 1010 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on). For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. And when the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 1010 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball apparatus 1015 is opened for a predetermined number of times. That is, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 1015 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 1014). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 1010, a normal symbol hold storage display 1041 having four indicators (for example, LEDs) for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 1032 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 1032, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 1032 a, the normal symbol holding storage display 1041 increases the number of indicators that are turned on by one. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 1010 is started, the number of indicators that are lit is reduced by one. Further, in the probability variation state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is high, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 1010 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the variable winning ball apparatus 1015 The opening time becomes longer and the number of opening times is increased. That is, the game ball is controlled to be in a high base state that is controlled so as to make it easier for the game ball to start and win (that is, the execution condition of variable display in the special symbol displays 1008a and 1008b and the effect display device 1009 is easily established). Transition. Further, in this embodiment, even in the short-time state (the game state in which the special symbol variable display time is shortened), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 1015 becomes longer and the number of times of opening is increased.

  In addition, by extending the time during which the variable winning ball device 1015 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the start winning opening (that is, the special symbol indicators 108a and 108b and the effect display). It is also possible to shift to a high base state, which is a gaming state controlled so that a variable display execution condition in the device 1009 is easily established.

  Also, instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball apparatus 1015 is in the open state, the normal symbol display unit 1010 shifts to the normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stopped symbol becomes a winning symbol is increased, so that the high base state is achieved. You may migrate. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 1010 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball apparatus 1015 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by controlling the transition to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 1010 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 1015 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball apparatus 1015 are increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state). That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball apparatus 1015 are increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol, or when the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). Note that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time-short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 1010 is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is hit increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 1015 is opened is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  Also, by shifting to the short time state when the variation time (variable display period) of special symbols and production symbols is shortened, the variation time of special symbols and production symbols is shortened, so that effective start winnings are likely to occur. The possibility that a big hit game is played increases.

  Furthermore, by making transitions to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it becomes easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short state and special symbol short state). Transition to a state).

  A decoration LED 1025 flashing during the game is provided around the left and right of the game area 1007 of the game board 1006, and an out port 1026 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken in at the bottom. In addition, two speakers 1027R and 1027L that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 1007. A top frame LED 1028a, a left frame LED 1028b, and a right frame LED 1028c provided on the front frame are provided at the outer periphery upper portion, the outer periphery left portion, and the outer periphery right portion of the game area 1007. Also, a prize ball LED 1051 that is turned on when there is a remaining number of prize balls is provided in the vicinity of the left frame LED 1028b, and a ball cut LED 1052 that is turned on when the supply ball is cut is provided in the vicinity of the right frame LED 1028c. . The top frame LED 1028a, the left frame LED 1028b, the right frame LED 1028c, and the decoration LED 1025 are examples of effects light emitters provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1001. In addition to the above-mentioned various LEDs for effects (decorations), LEDs and lamps for effects are installed.

  In addition, an operation unit 1005 as an operation means that can be operated by the player is provided on a member constituting the hit ball supply tray 1003. The operation unit 1005 is provided with a press operation unit made of a transparent resin member that can be turned on by an LED (not shown) inside the player. An operation switch (not shown) for detecting a pressing operation of the pressing operation unit is provided below.

  In the gaming machine, a ball hitting device that drives a drive motor in response to a player operating an operation unit (hitting ball operation handle) 1005 and uses the rotational force of the drive motor to launch a game ball to the game area 1007. (Not shown) is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 1007 through a ball hitting rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 1007, and then descends the game area 1007. When the game ball enters the first start winning port 1013 and is detected by the first start port switch 1013a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display 1008a starts variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 1009 starts variable display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol). Is done. In other words, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 1013. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning port 1014 and is detected by the second start port switch 1014a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 1008b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 1009 starts variable display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol). Is done. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 1014. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In addition, a card unit that enables ball lending by inserting a game card as a game recording medium such as a prepaid card having a prepaid function is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown). .

  The main board 1031 is equipped with a game control microcomputer (control microcomputer) 1560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1001 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 1560 includes a ROM 1054 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 1055 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 1056 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 1057. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 1054 and the RAM 1055 are built in the game control microcomputer 1560. That is, the game control microcomputer 1560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer may include at least the RAM 1055 in addition to the CPU 1056, and the ROM 1054 may be externally attached or built-in. Further, the I / O port unit 1057 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 1560 further includes a random number circuit 1053 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  In the game control microcomputer 1560, the CPU 1056 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 1054. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 1560 (or CPU 1056) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 1056 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 1031.

  The random number circuit 1053 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 1053 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 1053 has a numeric data update range selection / setting function (initial value selection / setting function and upper limit selection / setting function), numeric data update rule selection / setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 1560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 1053. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using an ID number of the game control microcomputer 1560 (an ID number assigned to each product of the game control microcomputer 1560) stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 1054. The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as an initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 1053. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 1053 can be further improved.

  The game control microcomputer 1560 reads the numerical data as random R from the random number circuit 1053 when the start winning to the first start port switch 1013a or the second start port switch 1014a occurs, and starts to change the special symbol and the effect symbol. Sometimes it is determined whether or not to make a jackpot display result as a specific display result based on the random R, that is, whether or not to make a jackpot display result. Then, when it is determined to be a big hit, the gaming state is shifted to a big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state advantageous to the player.

  The RAM 1055 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 1055 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (the value of the special symbol process flag or the total pending storage number counter) and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 1055 is backed up.

  A reset signal (not shown) from the power supply board is input to the reset terminal of the game control microcomputer 1560. A reset circuit for generating a reset signal supplied to the game control microcomputer 1560 and the like is mounted on the power supply board. When the reset signal becomes high level, the game control microcomputer 1560 and the like become operable, and when the reset signal becomes low level, the game control microcomputer 1560 and the like become inoperative. Therefore, an allowable signal that allows the operation of the game control microcomputer 1560 or the like is output during a period when the reset signal is at a high level, and a game control microcomputer when the reset signal is at a low level. An operation stop signal for stopping the operation of 1560 or the like is output. Note that the reset circuit may be mounted on each electric component control board (a board on which a microcomputer for controlling the electric parts is mounted).

  Furthermore, a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board has dropped below a predetermined value is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 1560. That is, the power supply board monitors the voltage value of a predetermined voltage (for example, DC30V or DC5V) used in the gaming machine, and when the voltage value decreases to a predetermined value (the power supply voltage is reduced). A power supply monitoring circuit that outputs a power-off signal indicating that). A clear signal (not shown) indicating that the clear switch for instructing to clear the contents of the RAM is operated is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 1560.

  An input driver circuit 1058 that supplies detection signals from the gate switch 1032a, the first start port switch 1013a, the second start port switch 1014a, and the count switch 1023 to the game control microcomputer 1560 is also mounted on the main board 1031. Also, an output circuit 1059 for driving the solenoid 1016 for opening and closing the variable winning ball apparatus 1015 and the solenoid 1021 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball apparatus 1020 for forming the big winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 1560 is also provided. 1031. Further, an information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall management computer (hall computer) is also mounted on the main board 1031. .

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 1080 directs the contents of the effect from the game control microcomputer 1560 via the relay board 1077. A control command is received, and display control is performed with an effect display device 1009 that variably displays effect symbols.

  The effect control board 1080 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer (not shown) including an effect control CPU and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 1080, the effect control CPU operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown) and receives a signal (effect) from the main board 1031 input via the relay board 1077. In response to the control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver and the input port. Further, the effect control CPU causes the VDP (video display processor) to perform display control of the effect display device 1009 based on the effect control command.

  The effect control CPU 101 reads necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM is for storing character image data displayed on the effect display device 1009, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect symbols) in advance. The effect control CPU outputs data read from the character ROM to a VDP (not shown). The VDP executes display control based on data input from the effect control CPU 101.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to an input driver (not shown) on the effect control board 1080. The input driver allows the signal input from the relay board 1077 to pass only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 1080 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 1080 to the relay board 1077). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 1031 is allowed to pass through the relay board 1077 only in the direction toward the effect control board 1080 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 1080 to the relay board 1077). A unidirectional circuit (not shown) is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Further, since the production control command and the production control INT signal are output from the main board 1031 via the I / O port unit 1057 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 1077 to the inside of the main board 1031 is restricted. The That is, the signal from the relay board 1077 does not enter the inside of the main board 1031 (the game control microcomputer 1560 side). The I / O port unit 1057 is a part of the I / O port unit 1057 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the I / O port unit 1057 (on the relay board 1077 side).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver substrate 1035 via an output port (not shown). Further, the effect control CPU outputs sound number data to the sound control board 1070 via an output port (not shown).

  In the lamp driver board 1035, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver (not shown) via an input driver (not shown). The LED driver (not shown) supplies a drive signal to each LED provided on the frame side such as the top frame LED 1028a, the left frame LED 1028b, and the right frame LED 1028c. Further, a drive signal is supplied to the decoration LED 1025 provided on the game board side. When a light emitter other than the LED is provided, a drive circuit (driver) for driving the light emitter is mounted on the lamp driver substrate 1035.

  In the voice control board 1070, the sound number data is input to a voice synthesis IC (not shown) via an input driver (not shown). The voice synthesizing IC generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to an amplifier circuit (not shown). The amplifier circuit outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume to the speakers 1027R and 1027L. Control data corresponding to sound number data is stored in a sound data ROM (not shown). The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output form of the sound effect or sound in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  The effect control CPU is connected to the operation unit 1005 via an input / output port, and outputs a signal for driving an LED (not shown) in the operation unit 1005 via the input / output port. An operation signal output in response to a player's pressing operation is input from an operation switch (not shown) in the unit 1005.

  (Main board case) Next, the structure of the board case 1200 which accommodated the main board 1031 is demonstrated based on FIGS. FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the main board case. FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating the base member. FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating a cover member. FIG. 26 is a perspective view showing the main board case in which the cover member and the base member are assembled. FIG. 27A is a left side view showing a state where the sealing portion of the main board case is sealed, and FIG. 27B is a front view showing the sealing portion of the main board case. 28A is a perspective view showing a seal protection cover, FIG. 28B is a sectional view taken along line XX in FIG. 28A, and FIG. 28C is a sectional view taken along line WW in FIG. 29A is a VV cross-sectional view of FIG. 27, and FIG. 29B is a YY cross-sectional view of FIG. 30A is a front view showing the configuration of the seal seal, FIG. 30B is a rear view showing a state where the ink is dissolved, and FIG. 30C is a sectional view taken along the line KK in FIG.

  In addition, about the same component as the substrate case 200 of the first embodiment, the detailed description of the substrate case 1200 will be omitted by adding a symbol obtained by adding 1000 to the symbol assigned to the substrate case 200. . In the following description, the upper, lower, left, and right directions of the board case 1200 are shown with reference to the case where the pachinko gaming machine 1001 is viewed from the front side.

  The main difference between the substrate case 1200 and the substrate case 200 described in the first embodiment is that (1) the base member 1201 and the cover member 1202 are sealed and attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1001, and (2) the sealing seal. 1400 and the sealing parts 1224 and 1229. In the following, the above 1 and 2 will be mainly described. As shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, the substrate case 1200 includes a base member 1201 and a cover member 1202, and is configured to be able to be sealed with the main substrate 1031 accommodated therein.

  As shown in FIG. 24, a base-side sealing portion 1229 is formed on the right short side 1201c of the base member 1201, and a base-side welded portion 1207 is provided in the center on the left short side 1201d. A housing portion 1600 for housing the spare one-way screw 1240b is provided on the upper side of the base-side welded portion 1207, and a mounting sealing hole 1601 through which the one-way screw 1240a for mounting sealing is inserted is provided on the lower side. Is formed.

  The outer surface of the left side wall formed on the left short side 1201d of the base member 1201 has a plurality of concave grooves 1630 having a substantially triangular cross section and extending in the front-rear direction of the left side wall in the longitudinal direction of the left side wall. Plurally spaced apart. In a sealed state in which the base side welded portion 1207 and the cover side welded portion 1223 formed on the left side wall are welded by forming a plurality of such concave grooves 1630 and weakening the left side wall, for example, the base member 1201 If the tool is illegally inserted between the cover member 1202 and the cover member 1202 forcibly opening it, the left side wall tends to be broken. Thereby, since it becomes impossible to reproduce a sealing state using the destroyed base member 1201, fraudulent act can be suppressed.

  Such a groove may be formed not only on the left side wall of the base member 1201, but also on other side walls, other parts, etc., or may be formed on the cover member 1202 side. It is preferable to form it at a place where an illegal instrument such as the vicinity of a stopper or a welded portion is easily inserted.

  As shown in FIG. 25, a cover side sealing portion 1224 is formed on the right side wall 1202c of the cover member 1202, and a cover side welding portion 1223 is provided in the center on the left side wall 1202d, and the cover A screw covering piece 1602 that covers the spare one-way screw 1240b is provided on the upper side of the side welded portion 1223, and an attachment sealing piece 1230 through which the one-way screw 1240a for attachment sealing is inserted and a latch on the lower side. A piece 1603 is formed. The screw covering piece 1602 is locked to the locked piece 1602a of the base member 1201 in the closed state, and the locking piece 1603 is locked to the locked piece 1603a of the base member 1201 in the closed state.

  It should be noted that the welded portion composed of the base-side welded portion 1207 and the cover-side welded portion 1223 and the sealing mounting portion composed of the mounting sealing hole 1601 and the mounting sealing piece 1230 are functionally different only in the shape and the like. 1 is configured in substantially the same manner as the welded portion and the sealing attachment portion of the substrate case 200 and has the same functions and effects, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the base-side sealing portion 1229 has a base-side application surface composed of a front application surface 1229a and a lower right application surface 1229b, and above and below each of the application surfaces 1229a and 1229b, Positioning ridges 1411 and 1411 and positioning corners 1412 and 1412 are formed. The front sticking surface 1229a is formed so as to face an opening 1610b of a recess 1610a for storing the head, which is formed on one end side of a mounting hole 1610 for mounting the closing screw 1226, and the closing screw 1226 is attached to the opening 1610b. Can be inserted through the mounting hole 1610 and attached.

  The cover-side sealing portion 1224 has a cover-side pasting surface consisting only of the upper right pasting surface 1224b, and positioning ridges 1421, 1421 and positioning corners 1422, 1422 are formed above and below the upper right pasting surface 1224b. A screw hole 1611 to which a closing screw 1226 is attached is formed in the front end surface of the cover side sealing portion 1224, and the closing screw 1226 inserted through the attaching hole 1610 is screwed therein.

  The lower right sticking surface 1229b and the upper right sticking surface 1224b formed along the left side surface of the substrate case 1200 are formed when the base member 1201 and the cover member 1202 are closed (see FIG. 26). A flat surface-like first pasting surface that is continuous along the right side surface is configured, and the area of the first pasting surface composed of these pasting surfaces 1229b and 1224b is lateral to the right side surface of the substrate case 1200. It is made larger than the area of the 2nd sticking surface which consists of the front sticking surface 1229a protrudingly provided.

  As described above, the first pasting surface disposed substantially parallel to the right side surface of the substrate case 1200 is used as the second pasting surface disposed substantially parallel to the cover plate 1202a and the base plate 1201a of the substrate case 1200. 27, and the peripheral edge of the first sticking surface is arranged inside the peripheral edge of the side surface of the substrate case 1200, as shown in FIG. Since the first sticking surface is enlarged as much as possible within the range of the side surface of the substrate case 1200, a wide sticker attaching surface can be secured without making the substrate case protrude greatly to the side, so that the substrate case 1200 can be made compact. Alternatively, it can be avoided that a seal 1400, which will be described later, protrudes to the side of the substrate case 1200 and easily comes into contact with peripheral devices, components, and the like.

  Further, the first sticking surface that is continuous across the boundary Z between the base member 1201 and the cover member 1202 and the second sticking surface that faces in a direction different from the first sticking surface and is formed with the opening 1610b are sealed. An affixing surface is formed, and the seal seal 1400 is affixed so as to cover the boundary Z and the opening 1610b, so that not only when the assembly of the base member 1201 and the cover member 1202 is released, but also the base member 1201. Since the trace remains even when the closing screw 1226 is removed from the screw hole 1611 in order to release the assembly of the cover member 1202 and the cover member 1202, it is easy to discover that the second sealing state may be released. In addition, since a corner portion C10 of about 90 degrees (bent portion, see FIG. 29B) is formed between the first sticking surface and the second sticking surface, the sealing seal 1 00 damage when attempting to peeling is likely to occur.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 27, like the seal seal 400 of the first embodiment, the cutout sides 1410 at the corners are attached to the positioning surfaces 1412a and 1422a so as to be attached to these application surfaces from the openings 1610b. The second sealed state is configured by covering the head of the exposed closing screw 1226.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the seal seal 1400 is different from the seal seal 400 of the first embodiment in that the solvent use display units 1450A to 1450D, the first identification information display unit 1451, and the second identification information display unit 1452 are different. It is arranged in a horizontal direction and has a different position, and the other configurations are substantially the same, and therefore, detailed description here is omitted by giving the same reference numerals.

  Of the surface of the seal substrate 1401, the surface on which the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 1402 is not formed, as shown in FIGS. 30 (a) to 30 (c), is specially dissolved in the stripping solution by contacting with the stripping solution. When the character “open prohibition” printed by ink is applied to the substrate case 1200 in a predetermined manner, the boundary portion Z between the cover member 1202 and the base member 1201 constituting the substrate case 1200 is displayed. (See FIG. 27 (a)) or printed and formed so as to be disposed at a portion not located at the corner C10 (see FIG. 29 (b)) in the seal sticker attaching portion.

  In addition, the sticking surface of the seal seal 1400 formed on the sealing portions 1229 and 1224 in the substrate case 1200 is not L-shaped like the sticking surface of the first embodiment, so that it extends along the left side surface. The formed first sticking surface can be made as large as possible, and the number of bent portions is one instead of two.

  As shown in FIG. 28, the seal protective cover 1228 is formed in a substantially L shape from a first covering piece 1620 that covers the outside of the first sticking surface and a second covering piece 1621 that covers the outside of the second sticking surface. Has been. The width dimension of the end portion side of the first covering piece 1620 is formed to be shorter than the width dimension of the base portion side of the first covering piece 1620 and the second covering piece 1621.

  A pair of upper and lower elastic locking pieces 1622 and 1622 are extended from the upper and lower short sides of the second covering piece 1621 toward the front side, and the elastic locking pieces 1622 and 1622 are covered with a cover in the cover member 1202. Locking claws 1622a that are inserted from the rear end openings of the locking piece insertion portions 1623 and 1623 formed on the upper and lower sides of the side sealing portion 1224 and project outwardly at the tips of the elastic locking pieces 1622 and 1622, respectively. , 1622a can be locked to the cover member 1202 by being locked in the locking holes 1624, 1624. Further, the locked state can be easily released by pressing the locking claws 1622a and 1622a locked in the locking holes 1624 and 1624 from the outside.

  As described above, the seal protection cover 1228 can be locked to the cover member 1202 by being pushed from the front side of the cover member 1202 toward the rear side. In the locked mounting state, the inner peripheral edges of the first covering piece 1620 and the second covering piece 1621 come into contact with the contact regulating surfaces 1413 and 1423 of the positioning protrusions 1411 and 1421 and the positioning portions 1412 and 1422, respectively. The opposed surfaces of the inner side sides of the first covering piece 1620 and the second covering piece 1621 and the surface 1400a of the seal seal 1400 are spaced apart from each other and maintained in a non-contact state. Therefore, even when the seal protection cover 1228 is slid back and forth while being in contact with the contact restriction surfaces 1413 and 1423 and is attached to and detached from the seal portions 1224 and 1229, the seal seal 1400 does not contact the seal seal 1400. Even if any external force is applied to the seal protection cover 1228 in the mounted state, the seal seal 1400 is not directly transmitted to the seal seal cover 1228, so that the seal seal 1400 is prevented from being damaged.

  Further, since the seal protection cover 1228 is composed of only the L-shaped first covering piece 1620 and the second covering piece 1621, the cover member 1202 with respect to the base member 1201 can be retained while being locked to the cover member 1202. Can be opened and closed. Therefore, for example, when the second sealing state is released in order to inspect the main substrate 1031, the locking state between the locking hole 1624 as the locked portion and the locking claw 1622 a as the locking portion is changed. By releasing, the seal protective cover 1228 can be easily removed. Further, even if the seal protection cover 1228 is removed to release the second sealing state, the seal protection cover 1228 can be locked to the cover member 1202, so that the seal protection cover 1228 can be prevented from being lost. In addition, since the cover member 1202 can be opened and closed in the locked state, the opening and closing operation can be easily performed.

  Further, the seal protective cover 1228 can be detachably attached to the cover member 1202 of the substrate case 1200 from the front side. Then, the substrate case 1200 is placed (attached) in a case placement position (see FIG. 21) provided on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1001 (in this embodiment, the front surface of the base member 1201 is opposed to the placement surface. In this case, the front surface of the second covering piece 1621 of the seal protection cover 1228 is disposed so as to be in contact with or close to the arrangement surface, so that the seal protection cover 1228 is disposed in the case arrangement position. Even if it is going to be removed from the cover member 1202, the front surface of the second covering piece 1621 is abutted against the arrangement surface and cannot be removed from the substrate case 1200.

  Therefore, the board case 1200 is arranged at the case arrangement position, and the one-way screw 1240a is inserted into the above-described attachment sealing piece 1230 and screwed into the attachment portion formed at the case arrangement position, whereby the seal protective cover 1228 is installed. Since the movement in the removal direction is restricted by contact with the arrangement surface and cannot be removed from the substrate case 1200, illegal acts on the seal seal 1400 can be effectively prevented.

  Further, since the opening 1610b of the recess 1610a for accommodating the head of the closing screw 1226 is formed so as to face the second sticking surface parallel to the base plate 1201a, the board case 1200 is attached to the pachinko game as described above. In the state of being installed (attached) at the case arrangement position (see FIG. 21) provided in the machine 1001 (in this embodiment, the opening is arranged with the front surface of the base member 1201 facing the arrangement surface), the opening 1610b is Since it is arranged to face the arrangement surface, it is impossible to remove the closing screw 1226 while it is arranged at the case arrangement position, so it is difficult to open the cover member 1202.

  Note that the arrangement surface on which the substrate case 1200 is arranged may be formed of any part such as a constituent part constituting the pachinko gaming machine 1001 or a gaming component arranged in the pachinko gaming machine 1001.

  Further, the seal protection cover 1228 is not limited to the one in which the removal is restricted by contacting the arrangement surface in a state where the substrate case 1200 is arranged at the arrangement position, and is arranged at a place other than the arrangement surface. The pachinko gaming machine 1001 may be configured to contact or be restricted by components constituting the pachinko gaming machine 1001 or gaming parts disposed in the pachinko gaming machine 1001.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1001 as the second embodiment of the present invention, as shown in FIG. 30, on the surface of the seal substrate 1401, the solvent use display units 1450A to 1450D, the first identification information. The upper region R10 provided with the display unit 1451, the second identification information display unit 1452, and the hologram display unit 1453B is located on the upper right application surface 1224b and the lower right application surface 1229b of the cover side sealing unit 1224, and the hologram display unit 1453A is provided. The provided lower region R20 is located on the front sticking surface 1229a of the base-side sealing portion 1229.

  The seal seal 1400 is attached to the boundary Z between the cover member 1202 and the base member 1201 when the seal seal 1400 is pasted so as to straddle the base side seal portion 1229 and the cover side seal portion 1224 in the substrate case 1200. Since the solvent use display portions 1450A to 1450D are printed and formed in the non-positioned portion, the solvent use display portions 1450A to 1450D do not hang on the boundary portion Z when the sealing state is set. When the seal seal 1400 is broken for inspection of the game control board 40 and the board case 1200 is opened, the solvent use display portions 1450A to 1450D are broken, so that traces of contact with the solvent appear before that. It is prevented that it was difficult to understand what was happening.

  Specifically, the substrate case 1200 of the second embodiment can be opened by sliding the cover member 1202 with respect to the base member 1201, so that the sealing seal 1400 covers the base side sealing portion 1229 in the substrate case 1200 and the cover. When the substrate case 1200 is opened in the second sealing state applied so as to straddle the side sealing portion 1224, a portion corresponding to the boundary portion Z in the sealing seal 1400 is easily broken. Therefore, in the seal 1400, when any one of the solvent use display portions 1450A to 1450D is printed on a portion that is applied to (corresponding to) the boundary portion Z when the base side seal portion 1229 and the cover side seal portion 1224 are attached. Even if the solvent use display portions 1450A to 1450D are dissolved by the use of the solvent, for example, by opening the substrate case 1200 for inspection of the main substrate 1031 or the like at the amusement store, the boundary portion Z of the seal seal 1400 is changed. Since it breaks and it becomes difficult to determine whether the solvent use indicator disappears and disappears or disappears due to the breakage, it becomes difficult to understand that the trace of contact with the solvent appeared. Therefore, the solvent use display portions 1450A to 1450D are printed and formed on the portion not located at the boundary portion Z between the cover member 1202 and the base member 1201 when pasted so as to straddle the base side seal portion 1229 and the cover side seal portion 1224. Has been.

  Further, the seal seal 1400 is displayed on the upper region R10, which is a portion facing in the same direction (upward) when attached to the substrate case 1200, and the first identification information display as the identification information display unit as the solvent use display units 1450A to 1450D. Since the unit 1451 and the second identification information display unit 1452 are arranged, both the solvent use display units 1450A to 1450D and the first identification information display unit 1451 and the second identification information display unit 1452 can be visually recognized together. This makes it possible to easily check the solvent use display units 1450A to 1450D, the first identification information display unit 1451, and the second identification information display unit 1452, thereby reducing the work load.

  In the second embodiment, the solvent use display portion and the identification information display portion are printed in the upper region R10 that is a portion facing the right side when the seal sticker 1400 is attached to the substrate case 1200. The lower region R20 may be printed.

  Moreover, in the present Example 2, although solvent use display part 1450A-1450D and the 1st identification information display part 1451 and the 2nd identification information display part 1452 as an identification information display part are arrange | positioned in upper area | region R10, Only at least one of the first identification information display unit 1451 and the second identification information display unit 1452 may be disposed as the information display unit. Other identification information may also be arranged.

  Further, corners formed between one pasting surface and the other pasting surface when pasting across a plurality of pasting surfaces, specifically, a front pasting surface 1229a and a lower right pasting surface 1229b, When the solvent use display portions 1450A to 1450D are arranged in a portion that is not located at the corner portion C10 (see FIG. 29B) formed between (see FIG. 30), and is attached to the substrate case 1200. Further, since the solvent use display portions 1450A to 1450D are not hung on the corner C10, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the solvent use display portions 1450A to 1450D from being impaired by bending the characters.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the seal protection cover 1228 is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, so that even when it is covered with the seal protection cover 1228, the seal protection cover 1228 passes through the seal protection cover 1228 to Since it is possible to confirm whether the usage display portions 1450A to 1450D have disappeared or become thin, it can be easily confirmed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 21, in the second embodiment, the substrate case 1200 is attached at a substantially central position on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1001. A connector opening 1236 facing a board-side connector (not shown) to which various cables 1700 are connected is disposed along the upper side of the board case 1200. Then, these cables 1700 connected to the main board 1031 are collectively inserted into, for example, a right side wiring insertion portion 1750.

  That is, the cable 1700 having one end connected to the main board 1031 is held by a wiring holding part such as the wiring insertion part 1750 disposed at the right side position of the board case 1200, and thus the connector opening 1236 in the board case 1200. The seal 1400 attached to the lower position of the cable 1700 is not covered with the seal 1400 by overlapping the wiring of the cable 1700 or the like. Therefore, in the seal seal 1400, the solvent use display portions 1450A to 1450D are arranged in a portion that does not overlap with the wiring such as the cable 1700 when the seal seal 1400 is affixed to the substrate case 1200.

  In other words, the sealing sticker 1400 is arranged at a position where it does not overlap with or near a straight line connecting the board-side connector of the main board 1031 and the wiring holding part such as the wiring insertion part 1750 when attached to the board case 1200. Therefore, it is prevented that the solvent use display units 1450A to 1450D are hidden by the wiring and the visibility of the solvent use display units 1450A to 1450D is impaired.

  In the first and second embodiments, as an example of wiring, the cables 600a to 600c, 600k, the main board 1031, and other relay boards that connect various electrical components via the game control board 40 and other relay boards are used. Although the cable 1700 for connecting various electrical components to each other has been described, these wirings are not limited to those described in the above cable, but the back side of the gaming machine, that is, the casing 1a of the slot machine 1 is used. Including all wirings for electrically connecting a plurality of electrical components (for example, various switches, sensors, solenoids, motors, LEDs, etc.) installed inside or behind the pachinko gaming machine 1001.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the seal seal 1400 is provided at a predetermined portion of the seal seal 1400 by providing a corner-side cut 1408 as a fragile portion whose strength of the seal seal 1400 is lower than that of other portions. Since the corner-side notch 1408 is easily broken at the time of peeling, it is possible to suppress an illegal act such as reattaching the seal seal 1400 peeled by the solvent.

  In the second embodiment, the seal seal 1400 includes a first identification information display unit 1451 in which a serial number or the like, which is identification information that can identify each seal seal 1400, is displayed so as to be visually readable. A second identification information display unit 1452 that can be read by a predetermined reading device (not shown) by encoding a two-dimensional barcode or the like that is identification information that can identify the seal seal 400; The identification information is read from the second identification information display unit 1452 by providing the second identification information display unit 1452 that can be read only by a predetermined reading device separately from the first identification information display unit 1451. Is difficult, and it takes time to forge the seal seal 1400, so that the security is improved.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the protruding strips 1411 and 1421 that are the peripheral wall portions are provided around the sealing portion including the base-side sealing portion 1229 and the cover-side sealing portion 1224 so as to surround the pasted sealing seal 1400. By being formed, when the seal seal 400 is peeled off, the surrounding ridges 1411 and 1421 become obstructive and difficult to peel off, so that it is possible to suppress an illegal act such as reattaching the seal seal 400 peeled by the solvent. .

  In addition, in the present Example 2, the peripheral wall part was formed by the protruding item | line, However, A peripheral wall part may be formed in the surrounding surface of this recessed part by using the recessed part formed in the plane as a sealing seal sticking part. .

  In the second embodiment, the seal sticker 1400 does not include an electronic tag (IC tag) that can read identification information (for example, a serial number) that can identify each seal sticker using a predetermined electromagnetic wave. In this way, an IC tag capable of reading the ID information stored in the IC chip with a predetermined reader device may be embedded in, for example, the adhesive layer 1402 of the seal sticker 1400. In this way, management of the identification information becomes easy, and since it is necessary to use a predetermined electromagnetic wave to read the identification information, it becomes time-consuming to forge the seal seal. Will improve.

  In the first and second embodiments, the base-side welding plate portion 261 (1261) and the cover-side welding plate portion 271 (joining portions to be joined to bring the base member 201 and the cover member 202 into a sealed state) 1271) and the opposing surfaces were joined by welding with an ultrasonic welding device (welding means), but the present invention is not limited to those where the joint is joined by welding with the welding means, For example, you may join by adhere | attaching with adhesive means, such as an adhesive agent.

  In the first and second embodiments, the recesses 227a and 1610a that can accommodate the heads of the closing screws 226 and 1226 are formed on the base-side application surface or the cover-side application surface, and the closing screws 226 are formed in the recesses 227a and 1610a. The openings 227b and 1610b, which are openings, are covered with the seals 400 and 1400 in a state in which the heads are accommodated, but only the mounting holes 227 and 1610 are formed without forming the recesses 227a and 1610a. You may form in a base side sticking surface or a cover side sticking surface. In this case, in the state where the closing screws 226 and 1226 are attached to the attachment holes 227 and 1610, the heads are arranged in a state where they are exposed on the base-side application surface or the cover-side application surface. The seal seals 400 and 1400 may be attached so as to directly cover the heads that are exposed portions exposed from 227 and 1610.

  In the first and second embodiments, the sealing seals 400 and 1400 are pasted so as to straddle the base-side pasting surface or the cover-side pasting surface. The second sealing state in which the trace that was opened by breaking was left, but the method of configuring the sealing state is as described above, the sealing seal 400, straddling the base side application surface or the cover side application surface, It is not limited to affixing 1400, For example, a sealing seal is affixed so that the closure screw which maintains the base member 201 and the cover member 202 in a closed state may be covered, and a closure screw is removed and it opens. In this case, the sealed state may be configured so that the seal seal is broken and the trace remains. That is, in this case, the sealed state can be configured without applying a seal seal to only one of the base member 201 and the cover member 202.

  In the first and second embodiments, the sealing seals 400 and 1400 for sealing the first covering body and the second covering body are described as an example of the sealing seal of the present invention. In addition to a sealing seal that seals the second cover, for example, a sealing seal for sealing so that a trace remains when a substrate case containing a circuit board is removed from a predetermined mounting portion. You may apply to. Further, a seal for sealing the first cover and the second cover and sealing so that a trace remains when the substrate case in which the circuit board is stored is removed from a predetermined mounting portion. It may be applied to a seal.

  Furthermore, the shapes of the base side application surface and the cover side application surface to which the seal seals 400 and 1400 are attached are not limited to the rectangular shape, and can be variously changed to a circular shape or a square shape. Further, the arrangement positions of the base-side pasting surface and the cover-side pasting surface may be arranged not on the short side portions of the substrate cases 200 and 1200 but on the long side portions.

  In the first and second embodiments, the base-side sticking surface and the cover-side sticking surface constitute a series of sticking surfaces that are continuous with each other in the closed state in which the base member 201 and the base member 201 are assembled. However, it may be arranged in a state of being separated from each other, or a stepped portion may be formed between the base side application surface and the cover side application surface. In addition, the boundary position between the base-side pasting surface and the cover-side pasting surface may not coincide with the boundary position between the base member 201 and the cover member 202.

  In the first and second embodiments, the seal protective covers 228 and 1228 can be detachably attached to the base member and / or the cover member. The base member or the cover member may be provided in advance so that the surface can be opened and closed.

  Further, since the seal protective covers 228 and 1228 are made of a transparent synthetic resin material, the surface of the sealed seal seals 400 and 1400 can be visually recognized through the seal protective covers 228 and 1228. You may be comprised with the optical member.

  Moreover, in the said Example 1, 2, the positioning part of a seal seal is comprised by the positioning protrusion 411,421 and the positioning corner | angular part 412,422 extended continuously along the periphery of a sticking surface of a seal | sticker. However, it may be arranged at predetermined intervals along the periphery of the sticking surface of the seal.

  Furthermore, the seal seal and the sticking surface of the seal were formed in a rectangular shape, but it is sufficient that the seal seal and the sticking surface are formed in a square shape. In such a case, the pair of cutout sides are arranged to face different directions. For example, since the position and orientation of the seal seal can be determined at a time, the seal seals may be formed at least at two corners that are opposed to each other on a diagonal line. Moreover, you may form in three or more corner | angular parts.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say.

  For example, in the first and second embodiments, the sealing seals 400 and 1400 for sealing the board cases 200 and 1200 containing the game control board 40 and the main board 1031 as an example of the circuit board have been described. The present invention may be applied to a sealing seal that seals a substrate case that houses other circuit boards such as the effect control boards 90 and 1080 other than the game control board 40 and the main board 1031.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of a gaming machine. For example, a predetermined number of balls are encapsulated inside the gaming machine so that they can be circulated, and a rental request by a player Also in so-called enclosed game machines, the number of balls lent out according to the number of prizes and the number of prize balls awarded according to a prize is added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted and stored. The present invention is applicable.

[Example 3]
As this embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine having a configuration such as the slot machine 1 or the pachinko gaming machine 1001 described in the first and second embodiments as an example is configured as a sealed circulation pachinko machine (pachinko gaming machine). An example of a system for managing the pachinko machine and the card unit will be described. Note that a gaming machine, a card unit, and a system for managing them described as the following third embodiment may be applied to any of the gaming machine and the card unit described as the first and second embodiments.

  The present invention shown by the embodiment described below is a gaming machine represented by, for example, a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, and includes a first control means and a second control means that communicate with each other, It relates to a game board and a game frame.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, for example, it includes a first control means communicably connected to an authentication information management apparatus and a second control means communicably connected to the first control means, and the first control means and the second control A means is disclosed as a pair authentication information, and a second control means is disclosed as a gaming machine in which one of the pair authentication information is stored in advance (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-1000076).

  Conventionally, for example, there is one that performs transmission / reception of ciphertexts using a common key cryptosystem between a main CPU that controls the gaming state of a gaming machine and a sub-CPU that controls, for example, a variable display device (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-2000). -89701).

  In the gaming machine, when the first control means and the second control means communicate with each other, there is a possibility that the communication between the two control means is interrupted and the communication between the two becomes impossible. Assuming such a situation, it is necessary to predetermine a return procedure after communication between the two becomes impossible. In this case, if the predetermined information that has been generated on the one hand and is scheduled to be transmitted to the other side has not reached the other side, a return process in which the predetermined information is transmitted to the other side must be determined upon return.

  However, if such a return process is included in the user program executed by the control means, the control burden on the control means executing the user program increases.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and its purpose is to reduce the control burden related to the return processing after the communication between the first control means and the second control means becomes impossible. That is.

(1) A gaming machine (P stand 2F) including first control means (main control part 161F) and second control means (payout control part 171F) communicating with each other,
At least one of the first control means and the second control means is:
User program areas that can store user programs (main control storage unit 161cF, payout control storage unit 171cF),
Communication control circuits (communication control circuits 161bF, 171bF) for transmitting predetermined information generated by the execution of the user program,
The communication control circuit includes:
An information storage unit for storing the predetermined information (for example, a transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 60, a data reception register 713F shown in FIG. 61),
Information transmitting means (encrypted communication control units 600F, 700F) for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit in a predetermined mode (for example, an aspect such as encryption);
When the communication control circuit recovers from the communication disabled state (recovery function of the communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF), the communication control circuit executes a return process for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit, and the return process On the condition (SF292 in FIG. 63: a flag indicating the completion of recovery is written in the recovery communication completion register 618F and the recovery request / completion register 718F), the generation of the predetermined information by the execution of the user program is performed. Resume (SF293 in FIG. 63: send a signal for starting the processing of the user program, or cancel the processing of the user program that has been stopped by the stopping means and resume the processing of the user program).

  According to the above configuration, when returning from the communication disabled state, the communication control circuit does not regenerate and transmit the predetermined information that has not been transmitted due to the communication disabled by executing the user program. Since the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit is transmitted, it is not necessary to execute the user program in order to recover from the incommunicable state, and the control burden can be reduced accordingly.

(2) In (1) above,
Both the first control unit (main control unit 161F) and the second control unit (payout control unit 171F) include the user program area and the communication control circuits (communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF).

  According to the above configuration, since both the first control unit and the second control unit include the user program area and the communication control circuit, the processing is appropriately restarted in both the first control unit and the second control unit. be able to.

(3) In the above (1) or (2),
Both the first control unit (main control unit 161F) and the second control unit (payout control unit 171F) include the user program area and the communication control circuit (communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF).
When transmitting the predetermined information, the communication control circuit also transmits arrival confirmation information that is updated according to a predetermined update pattern in order to confirm the arrival of the predetermined information (FIG. 66: to the payout control unit 171F) Send the power-on notification command including the serial number sent last time (main control serial number = n + 1)),
The communication control circuit of one of the first control means and the second control means resends the arrival confirmation information transmitted last time when returning from the communication disabled state (FIG. 66: power supply for a power-on notification command) Send response of input / output)
The first control means or the second control means including the other communication control circuit includes the arrival confirmation information received when returning from the communication disabled state and the arrival confirmation information received before communication is disabled. Is not based on the predetermined information (FIG. 66: main control sequence number = n + 1 and payout control sequence number = n do not match) based on the predetermined information transmitted by the one communication control circuit by the return processing. Information update processing (FIG. 66: execute recovery processing) is executed.

  According to the above configuration, when the arrival confirmation information received when returning from the communication disabled state and the arrival confirmation information received before the communication is disabled are not in a predetermined relationship, one communication control is performed by the return process. Since the information updating process based on the predetermined information transmitted by the circuit is executed, the communication burden between the first control means and the second control means can be reduced.

(4) In the above (1) to (3),
The information storage unit includes a nonvolatile storage area (for example, a transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 60, a data reception register 713F shown in FIG. 61) and a volatile storage area (for example, a register other than the transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 60). And registers other than the data reception register 713F shown in FIG.

  According to the above configuration, since the information storage unit has the nonvolatile storage area and the volatile storage area, it is possible to suppress the amount of data required in the recovery process when communication is resumed.

(5) In the above (1) to (4),
In the communication control circuit, it is possible to set a valid period in which the predetermined information can be continuously written in the information storage unit after the authentication with the communication partner has expired (FIG. 61: main control unit transmission buffer write valid time setting) The register 719cF sets an effective time during which the data in the transmission data buffer 613F of the main control unit 161F can be written into the data reception register 713F after the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F is cut off. ).

  According to the above configuration, the communication control circuit can set a valid period during which the predetermined information can be written to the information storage unit continuously after the authentication with the communication partner expires. It is possible to reliably store the necessary information even after. For example, even if there is a floating ball (a ball that has not been dropped by being caught between nails of the game area 27F) when authentication with the communication partner is cut off due to power interruption or disconnection, the predetermined information is continuously displayed. By setting an effective period writable in the information storage unit, it is possible to reliably store and protect information that the floating ball has won.

(6) A game board (game board 26F) provided with first control means (main control unit 161F),
The first control means includes
It is possible to communicate with the second control means (payout control unit 171F) included in the game frame (front frame 5F),
A user program area (main control storage unit 161cF) capable of storing a user program;
A communication control circuit (communication control circuit 161bF) for transmitting the predetermined information generated by the execution of the user program,
The communication control circuit includes:
An information storage unit (for example, a transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 60) that stores the predetermined information;
Information transmitting means (encrypted communication control unit 600F) for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit in a predetermined mode (for example, an aspect such as encryption);
When the communication control circuit recovers from the communication disabled state (recovery function of the communication control circuit 161bF), the communication control circuit executes a return process for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit, and ends the return process. (SF293 in FIG. 63: a flag indicating recovery completion is written in the recovery communication completion register 618F), the generation of the predetermined information by executing the user program is resumed (SF293 in FIG. 63: user program). A signal for starting the process is transmitted, or the process of the user program that has been stopped by the stopping means is canceled and the process of the user program is restarted).

  According to the above configuration, when returning from the communication disabled state, the communication control circuit does not regenerate and transmit the predetermined information that has not been transmitted due to the communication disabled by executing the user program. Since the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit is transmitted, it is not necessary to execute the user program in order to recover from the incommunicable state, and the control burden can be reduced accordingly.

(7) A game frame (front frame 5F) provided with second control means (payout control part 171F) communicating with the first control means (main control part 161F) included in the game board (game board 26F). ,
The second control means includes
A user program area (payout control storage unit 171cF) capable of storing a user program;
A communication control circuit (communication control circuit 171bF) for transmitting the predetermined information generated by the execution of the user program,
The communication control circuit includes:
An information storage unit (for example, a data reception register 713F shown in FIG. 61) for storing the predetermined information;
Information transmitting means (encrypted communication control unit 700F) for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit in a predetermined mode (for example, an aspect such as encryption);
When the communication control circuit recovers from the communication disabled state (recovery function of the communication control circuit 171bF), the communication control circuit executes a return process for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit, and ends the return process. On the condition (SF292 in FIG. 63: flag indicating recovery completion is written in the recovery request / completion register 718F), the generation of the predetermined information by execution of the user program is resumed (SF293 in FIG. 63: user A signal for starting the program processing is transmitted, or the processing of the user program stopped by the stopping means is canceled and the processing of the user program is resumed).

  According to the above configuration, when returning from the communication disabled state, the communication control circuit does not regenerate and transmit the predetermined information that has not been transmitted due to the communication disabled by executing the user program. Since the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit is transmitted, it is not necessary to execute the user program in order to recover from the incommunicable state, and the control burden can be reduced accordingly.

(8-1) A gaming machine (P stand 2F) including first control means (main control unit 161F) and second control means (payout control unit 171F) communicating with each other,
At least one of the first control means and the second control means is:
User program areas that can store user programs (main control storage unit 161cF, payout control storage unit 171cF),
Communication control circuits (communication control circuits 161bF, 171bF) for transmitting predetermined information generated by the execution of the user program,
The communication control circuit includes:
An information storage unit for storing the predetermined information (for example, a transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 60, a data reception register 713F shown in FIG. 61),
Encryption means for encrypting information stored in the information storage unit (encrypted communication function of the communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF);
Encryption information transmitting means (encrypted communication function of communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF) for transmitting encrypted information encrypted by the encryption means,
At least one of the first control means and the second control means is a decryption means for decrypting the encrypted information transmitted by the other (for example, the communication control circuit 161bF decrypts the information encrypted by the communication control circuit 161bF). including.

  According to the above configuration, at least one of the first control unit and the second control unit encrypts the information stored in the information storage unit by the encryption unit of the communication control circuit and transmits the information transmitted by the other decryption unit. Since the information is decrypted, the processing of the encrypted communication performed between the first control means and the second control means can be reduced, and the contents of the encrypted information can be prevented from leaking and the security from being lowered. it can.

(8-2) In the above (8-1),
Both the first control unit (main control unit 161F) and the second control unit (payout control unit 171F) include the user program area and the communication control circuits (communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF).

  According to the above configuration, since both the first control unit and the second control unit include the user program area and the communication control circuit, the encrypted communication process is performed in both the first control unit and the second control unit. In addition to mitigation, it is possible to prevent the content of encrypted information from leaking and reducing security.

(8-3) In the above (8-1) or (8-2),
The communication control circuit is configured to generate an encryption key and a decryption key used for encryption communication when power is turned on (for example, an encryption key and a decryption key are generated by an authentication sequence performed when the power is turned on shown in FIG. 63), A process of performing cryptographic communication using the encryption key and decryption key generated by the process is executed (after the authentication sequence shown in FIG. 63, encrypted communication is possible using the generated encryption key and decryption key).

  According to the above configuration, the communication control circuit executes a process of generating an encryption key and a decryption key used for encryption communication when the power is turned on, and a process of performing encryption communication using the encryption key and the decryption key generated by the process Therefore, it is possible to reduce the encryption communication process performed between the first control unit and the second control unit, and to appropriately restart the process in at least one of the first control unit and the second control unit. .

(8-4) In the above (8-1) to (8-3),
In the communication control circuit, it is possible to set a valid period in which the predetermined information can be continuously written in the information storage unit after the authentication with the communication partner has expired (FIG. 61: main control unit transmission buffer write valid time setting) The register 719cF sets an effective time during which the data in the transmission data buffer 613F of the main control unit 161F can be written into the data reception register 713F after the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F is cut off. ).

  According to the above configuration, the communication control circuit can set a valid period during which the predetermined information can be written to the information storage unit continuously after the authentication with the communication partner expires. It is possible to reliably store the necessary information even after. For example, even if there is a floating ball (a ball that has not been dropped by being caught between nails of the game area 27F) when authentication with the communication partner is cut off due to power interruption or disconnection, the predetermined information is continuously displayed. By setting an effective period writable in the information storage unit, it is possible to reliably store and protect information that the floating ball has won.

(8-5) A game board (game board 26F) provided with first control means (main control unit 161F),
The first control means includes
It is possible to communicate with the second control means (payout control unit 171F) included in the game frame (front frame 5F),
A user program area (main control storage unit 161cF) capable of storing a user program;
A communication control circuit (communication control circuit 161bF) for transmitting the predetermined information generated by the execution of the user program,
The communication control circuit includes:
An information storage unit (for example, a transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 60) that stores the predetermined information;
Encryption means for encrypting information stored in the information storage unit (encrypted communication function of the communication control circuit 161bF);
The second control including decryption means for decrypting the encrypted information encrypted by the encryption means (for example, information encrypted by the communication control circuit 161bF is decrypted by the communication control circuit 171bF) Encryption information transmitting means (encrypted communication function of the communication control circuit 161bF) for transmitting to the means.

  According to the above configuration, when returning from the communication disabled state, the communication control circuit does not regenerate and transmit the predetermined information that has not been transmitted due to the communication disabled by executing the user program. Since the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit is transmitted, it is not necessary to execute the user program in order to recover from the incommunicable state, and the control burden can be reduced accordingly.

(8-6) A game frame (front frame 5F) provided with second control means (payout control unit 171F) communicating with the first control means (main control unit 161F) included in the game board (game board 26F). There,
The second control means includes
A user program area (payout control storage unit 171cF) capable of storing a user program;
A communication control circuit (communication control circuit 171bF) for transmitting the predetermined information generated by the execution of the user program,
The communication control circuit includes:
An information storage unit (for example, a data reception register 713F shown in FIG. 61) for storing the predetermined information;
Encryption means for encrypting information stored in the information storage unit (encrypted communication function of the communication control circuit 171bF);
The first control including decryption means for decrypting the encrypted information encrypted by the encryption means (for example, information encrypted by the communication control circuit 171bF is decrypted by the communication control circuit 161bF). Encryption information transmitting means (encrypted communication function of the communication control circuit 171bF) for transmitting to the means.

  According to the above configuration, when returning from the communication disabled state, the communication control circuit does not regenerate and transmit the predetermined information that has not been transmitted due to the communication disabled by executing the user program. Since the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit is transmitted, it is not necessary to execute the user program in order to recover from the incommunicable state, and the control burden can be reduced accordingly.

(9-1) The present invention is connected to a gaming machine (P stand 2F) that gives a predetermined gaming point when a winning occurs, and the gaming machine is communicatively connected, and uses the valuable value possessed by the player. A gaming system comprising a gaming device (CU3F) that enables gaming on a machine,
The gaming machine is
Game point storage means for storing the game points (FIG. 34: game ball counter);
Count for counting the game points stored in the game point storage means based on an operation for counting the game points to a predetermined score (for example, pressing the “count” button shown in FIG. 42). Count request transmission means for transmitting a request to the gaming device (FIG. 44: When there is a counting ball payout request at the start of counting, the P table 2F sends a status information response command including information of counting request = ON to CU3F To send to
The gaming device is:
Based on the counting request from the counting request transmission means, counting processing means for counting the gaming points to the points (FIG. 44: CU3F is requested when receiving a status information response including information of counting request = ON. The number of counting balls is added to the number of holding balls)
A recording medium receiving means (FIG. 31: a card insertion / discharge port 309F for receiving a card) for receiving a recording medium capable of specifying a valuable value owned by the player;
Recording medium processing means (FIG. 44: CU3F is inserted into the card insertion / ejection slot 309F) for processing the holding points counted by the counting processing means so as to be specified by the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving means. Memorize the number of balls in the card.),
Recording medium return means for returning the recording medium processed by the recording medium processing means (FIG. 44: CU3F returns a card storing the number of possessed balls);
Removal waiting state notifying means for notifying the gaming machine that the recording medium returned by the recording medium returning means is waiting to be removed (FIG. 44: CU3F prepares for card return when card removal is possible) Information on status OFF and card waiting for card removal is notified to P stand 2F.).

  According to the above configuration, the removal waiting state notifying means notifies the gaming machine that the recording medium returned by the recording medium returning means is waiting for removal, so that the gaming machine removes the recording medium from the player. Can be notified, and forgetting to remove the recording medium can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to call attention to prevent theft caused by forgetting to remove the recording medium.

(9-2) The present invention is communicably connected to a gaming machine (P stand 2F) that gives a predetermined gaming point when a winning occurs, and uses the valuable value possessed by the player to play a game in the gaming machine. A gaming device (CU3F) that enables
Count processing means for counting the game points based on the count request from the gaming machine (FIG. 44: When the CU3F receives a status information response including information of count request = ON, the requested counting ball And add the number to the number of balls.)
A recording medium receiving means (FIG. 31: a card insertion / discharge port 309F for receiving a card) for receiving a recording medium capable of specifying a valuable value owned by the player;
Recording medium processing means (FIG. 44: CU3F is inserted into the card insertion / ejection slot 309F) for processing the holding points counted by the counting processing means so as to be specified by the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving means. Memorize the number of balls in the card.),
Recording medium return means for returning the recording medium processed by the recording medium processing means (FIG. 44: CU3F returns a card storing the number of possessed balls);
Removal waiting state notifying means for notifying the gaming machine that the recording medium returned by the recording medium returning means is waiting to be removed (FIG. 44: CU3F prepares for card return when card removal is possible) The P table 2F is notified of information indicating that the state is OFF and the card is waiting to be removed.).

  According to the above configuration, the removal waiting state notifying means notifies the gaming machine that the recording medium returned by the recording medium returning means is waiting for removal, so that the gaming machine removes the recording medium from the player. Can be notified, and forgetting to remove the recording medium can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to call attention to prevent theft caused by forgetting to remove the recording medium.

(9-3) The present invention is connected to a gaming device (CU3F) that enables a game using a valuable value possessed by the player so as to be able to communicate, and a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game point when a winning occurs ( P stand 2F)
Game point storage means for storing the game points (FIG. 34: game ball counter);
Count for counting the game points stored in the game point storage means based on an operation for counting the game points to a predetermined score (for example, pressing the “count” button shown in FIG. 42). Count request transmission means for transmitting a request to the gaming device (FIG. 44: When there is a counting ball payout request at the start of counting, the P table 2F sends a status information response command including information of counting request = ON to CU3F To send to
When the points counted based on the counting request from the counting request transmission means are processed in a manner that can be specified by the recording medium received by the gaming device, and the recording medium is returned, the recording medium is awaiting removal. The notification of being in a state can be received from the gaming device (FIG. 44: When the P stand 2F is in a card removal enabled state, notification of information indicating that the card return ready state is OFF and the card is waiting to be removed is notified from the CU 3F. Receive.)

  According to the above configuration, since the game device receives a notification that the recording medium returned by the recording medium return means is in a removal waiting state, the game machine prompts the player to remove the recording medium. This makes it possible to prevent forgetting to remove the recording medium. In addition, it is possible to call attention to prevent theft caused by forgetting to remove the recording medium.

(9-4) In the above (9-1) to (9-3),
The gaming device includes notification means (for example, a display 312F shown in FIG. 31) for notifying that the recording medium is waiting to be removed.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify the gaming device that the recording medium is waiting to be removed, so that it is possible to prevent forgetting to remove the recording medium.

(9-5) In the above (9-1) to (9-3),
The gaming machine includes display means (for example, a variable display device 278F shown in FIG. 31) for notifying that the recording medium is waiting to be removed based on the notification from the gaming device.

  According to the above configuration, since it is possible to visually notify the gaming machine that the recording medium is waiting to be removed, forgetting to remove the recording medium can be prevented.

(9-6) In the above (9-1) or (9-2),
The removal waiting state notification means notifies the gaming device or a device connected to the gaming machine (for example, a hall computer, a call lamp on P units) that the recording medium is waiting to be removed. .

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the user from forgetting to remove the recording medium by notifying a device other than the gaming machine or gaming device that the recording medium is waiting to be removed.

(9-7) The present invention relates to a gaming machine (P stand 2F) that gives a predetermined gaming point when a prize is generated, and is connected to the gaming machine in a communicable manner, and uses the valuable value owned by the player. A gaming system comprising a gaming device (CU3F) that enables gaming on a machine,
The gaming device is:
A recording medium receiving means (FIG. 31: a card insertion / discharge port 309F for receiving a card) for receiving a recording medium capable of specifying a valuable value owned by the player;
When the recording medium is accepted by the recording medium accepting means, a game hall specifying information notifying means (FIG. 37) for notifying the gaming machine of game hall specifying information capable of specifying the game hall in which the gaming apparatus is installed. When the card is received at the card insertion / discharge port 309F, the CU 3F transmits a card insertion notification command including the “store code” added by the security board 325F to the P unit 2F.
The gaming machine is
Game hall identification information storage means for storing the game hall identification information notified by the game hall identification information notification means (FIG. 37: P stand 2F stores “store code” included in the insertion notification command). ,
The game room specifying information newly notified by the game hall specifying information notifying means when the communication is restored after recovering from the communication incapable state where the gaming machine and the gaming device cannot communicate, and the game hall specifying When a recovery request including a “store code” is transmitted from the CU 3F to the game hall specifying information comparing means for comparison with the game hall specifying information stored in the information storage means (FIG. 45: P table 2F) ”And the stored“ store code ”are determined to match.)
Game prohibition means for prohibiting continuation of the game when the game hall identification information is determined to be inconsistent by the game hall identification information comparison means (P store 2F stores “store code” from CU3F. If the store code does not match, continuation of the game is prohibited.

  According to the above configuration, if the newly notified game hall specifying information and the game hall specifying information stored in the game hall specifying information storage means do not match, the continuation of the game is prohibited. It is possible to prevent fraud in which the store is moved in the stored state.

(9-8) In the above (9-7),
The gaming device is:
A device capable of specifying a game control device (for example, security board 325F shown in FIG. 32) included in the gaming device when the recording medium is received by the recording medium receiving means and when the communication is restored. Device specific information notifying means for notifying the gaming machine of specific information (SC board ID) (FIG. 37: When the card is received at the card insertion / discharge port 309F, the CU 3F receives the “SC board ID” added by the security board 325F. And a card insertion notification command including:
The gaming machine is
Device specifying information storage means for storing the device specifying information notified by the device specifying information notifying means (FIG. 37: P base 2F stores “SC board ID” included in the insertion notification command);
When the communication is recovered, the device specifying information comparing unit (P 2F) compares the device specifying information newly notified by the device specifying information notifying unit with the device specifying information stored in the device specifying information storing unit. Further compares “SC board ID” from CU3F with the stored “SC board ID”),
The game prohibiting means prohibits continuation of the game when the device specifying information comparing means determines that the device specifying information is inconsistent (in the case of mismatch, prohibiting continuation of the game).

  According to the above configuration, when the newly notified device identification information and the device identification information stored in the device identification information storage means do not match, the game is prohibited from being continued, so the counting balls are stored in the game medium. Unauthorized movement of the gaming machine in the state can be prevented.

(9-9) In the above (9-7) or (9-8) above,
The gaming machine is
A game hall identification information reading means for reading the game hall identification information added to the game medium used for the game (for example, a sensor is provided in the collection ball passage path of the P stand 2F, and the sensor is provided in the game ball. Read certain identification information (such as surface markings).
The game hall specifying information comparing means includes the game hall specifying information added to the game medium read by the game hall specifying information reading means, and the game hall specifying information stored in the game hall specifying information storage means. Compare (by the read identification information, it is determined whether or not it matches the identification information of the game ball of the own store, and in the case of a mismatch, the Bit 0 of the “illegal detection state 3” of the status information response is set to “1”. To do.)

  According to the above configuration, if the game hall identification information added to the game medium read by the game hall identification information reading means and the game hall identification information stored in the game hall identification information storage means do not match, the game medium It is possible to notify that game balls from other stores are mixed.

  Hereinafter, a second embodiment (hereinafter simply referred to as “embodiment”) will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Configuration of pachinko machine>
First, the configuration of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In each amusement island (not shown) arranged in a plurality of game halls (halls), an enclosed circulation pachinko machine as an example of a game machine (hereinafter also abbreviated as a game machine, a pachinko machine, or a P machine). 2F is attached. Note that a card unit (hereinafter also abbreviated as CU) 3F, which is an example of a gaming device, is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with the P table 2F at a side position on a predetermined side of the P table 2F. Yes.

  The P stand 2F encloses a pachinko ball (game ball) as an example of a game medium, and the player operates the hitting operation handle 25F to drive the launch motor 18F (see FIG. 32). Each ball is shot one by one into the game area 27F on the front of the game board 26F so that a game can be played. Specifically, a touch sensor is provided around the hitting operation handle 25F, and the player's hand touches the touch sensor while the player is operating the hitting operation handle 25F. Is detected by a touch sensor, and the firing motor 18F is driven. In this state, the hitting momentum is adjusted according to the amount of turning operation of the hitting operation handle 25F by the player, and the ball is shot into the game area 27F.

  A keyhole 10F is provided above the hitting operation handle 25F, and a front key 5F (see FIG. 32) is unlocked (for example, rotated clockwise) by inserting a key possessed by a game attendant. The frame 5F is opened, and the glass door 6F is opened by an unlocking operation (for example, counterclockwise rotation) of the glass door (front member) 6F.

  31 is a so-called first type pachinko machine, and a variable display device (hereinafter also referred to as a special symbol) 278F is provided at the center of the game area 27F. In addition, the game area 27F is provided with a plurality of types of winning holes through which the inserted pachinko balls can be won. In the game area 27F shown in FIG. 31, there is shown one large winning opening (variable winning ball apparatus) 271F, three normal winning holes 272F, 273F, 274F, and three start winning holes 275F, 276F, 277F. ing. In particular, the start winning opening 276F is configured by an electric tulip that can be changed between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player. .

  The variable display device 278F variably displays based on the detection signal of the start winning ball won in each start winning opening 275F, 276F, 277F. When the display result of the variable display device is a combination of specific identification information (for example, a glance), a big hit state is established and the big prize opening 271F is opened.

  In addition, since the display result of the variable display device is a combination of predetermined special identification information (for example, a combination of probability variation symbols such as 777) out of a combination of jackpot symbols (grooves), the probability variation big hit state is A probability variation state (probability variation state) in which the occurrence probability of the jackpot is improved after the occurrence of the jackpot state is generated.

  Pachinko balls that have been struck into the game area 27F are won at any of the winning openings or are collected at the out opening 154F without winning. The pachinko balls won in the winning opening and the pachinko balls collected in the out mouth 154F are again returned to the hitting ball launch position through the collection path (not shown) in the P stand 2F. Then, when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25F, the pachinko ball at the hitting position is again shot into the game area 27F.

  The P base 2F causes the indicator 54F extending from the CU 3F to be fitted to the connection surface 54Fa provided on the front surface of the P base 2F by installing the CU 3F in a lateral position. Therefore, a display 54F is provided at a position below the game area 27F in the P stand 2F. The display device 54F is configured by a liquid crystal display device, and displays various effect images linked to the points, the remaining card amount, or the display of the variable display device 278F to the player. Further, the display 54F is fitted to the P base 2F by connecting a connection terminal (not shown) provided on the back surface to a connection terminal 54Fb provided on the connection surface 54Fa of the P base 2F. Thus, if it is the structure which fits the indicator 54F of CU3F to the connection surface 54Fa of P stand 2F, CU3F and P stand 2F can be connected more strongly and fraud can be prevented. Furthermore, fraud can be further prevented by preventing the connection and locking with the display 54F from being released unless the glass door 6F or the lower door provided with the hitting ball operating handle 25F is opened. As shown in FIG. 31, the display 54F is not limited to the structure formed integrally with the CU 3F and fitted to the connection surface 54Fa of the P base 2F. The display 54F is formed independently of the CU 3F and is formed on the front surface of the P base 2F. The structure which can be attached may be sufficient.

  In addition, a game ball number display for displaying the number of game balls is provided above the connection surface 54Fa of the P stand 2F. The game ball number display 29F is composed of a 7-segment LED display and is controlled by a payout control unit 171F described later. The number of game balls display 29F displays the number of game balls to be described later, an error number of an error that has occurred, and the like. Note that the game ball number display 29F is not limited to a 7-segment LED display, and may be a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, or other display.

  Furthermore, a counting button 28F for counting the gaming balls to the holding balls is provided on the left side of the gaming ball number display 29F on the P stand 2F. As will be described in detail later, when the count button 28F is pressed once, for example, 100 balls are counted from the game ball to the holding ball, and when pressed for a long period of time (long press), the game ball currently held is considered. Then, the number of game balls is counted from the number of balls corresponding to the number of balls pressed. Further, the counting speed is further improved when a card return operation is performed, and a smooth card return process is realized.

  Thus, since the counting button 28F is provided on the P base side, the operability of the player sitting facing the P base can be improved as compared with the case where the counting button 28F is provided on the CU side. In addition, the P platform 2F is provided with speakers 270F for outputting music data to be reproduced in accordance with the effects displayed on the variable display device 278F at the upper right position and the upper left position of the game area 27F. In addition, the position and the number of speakers are not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 31, and the position and the number may be changed as necessary.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 2F is a game machine that performs game control like the pachinko machine 1 described above as an enclosed circulation pachinko machine, and the basic game control and effect control are performed by the pachinko machine 2F. Controls similar to those of the gaming machine 1 (for example, variable display control based on hold storage information, big hit game control based on hold storage information, and probability change control based on hold storage information) are performed.

<Configuration of card unit>
Next, the configuration of the CU3F according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This CU3F is a visitor card (hereinafter also referred to as a general card) having a prepaid function, which is a game recording medium issued to a general player who has not registered as a member, and a member who has registered as a member in the game hall. Receive a membership card, which is a game recording medium issued to a player. Visitor cards and membership cards are composed of IC cards.

  The CU3F that accepts these cards has a function of converting the game value (for example, the card balance, the number of possessions, the number of accumulated balls, etc.) possessed by the player specified by the record information of the card into “game ball data”. . In the P stand 2F, a ball game corresponding to the number of balls specified by the game ball data is made possible. That is, “game ball data” is data indicating the number of remaining fireable shots. In the following description, “game ball data” is simply referred to as “game ball” in the same manner as a stored ball and a holding ball.

  On the front side of the CU3F, a bill insertion slot 302F for inserting bills, a protruding portion 305F formed to project forward from the front of the device, a card insertion / discharge port 309F for inserting a membership card or a visitor card, etc. Is provided. The member card or visitor card inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309F is received by a card reader / writer (not shown), and information recorded on the card is read.

  The front side of the CU3F is specified by the indicator 312F and the member card ID (hereinafter also simply referred to as a card ID or C-ID) recorded on the member card when the member card is received and the member card ID. An infrared signal is received by an IR (Infrared) photosensitive unit 320F from a replay button 319F for executing a replay game using the number of stored balls and a remote control (not shown) possessed by an attendant of the game hall and converted into an electronic signal. An IR light receiving unit for converting and outputting is provided.

  The display 312F displays a prepaid balance (hereinafter also referred to as a card balance or simply a balance) recorded on the inserted game recording medium (card), and displays the number of game balls and other various information. In addition to being able to display, the surface is configured with a transparent touch panel, and various operations can be input by touching various display items displayed on the display unit of the display 312F with a finger.

  When the replay button 319F is operated and the number of possessed balls acquired by the player is recorded on the inserted card, a part of the number of possessed balls is withdrawn and converted into a game ball, and the converted game ball Based on this, it becomes possible to play a game by the P stand 2F. On the other hand, if the inserted card is a membership card and the number of possessions is not recorded and the stored balls are recorded in the hall management computer, etc., a part of the stored balls is withdrawn and converted into game balls Thus, a game by the P stand 2F becomes possible. That is, when both the stored ball and the holding point are stored in association with the inserted card, the holding ball is withdrawn preferentially. In addition to the replay button 319F, a dedicated ball payout button for withdrawing the ball may be provided, and the replay button 319F may be a button dedicated to the withdrawal of the stored ball.

  Here, the “storing ball” is a ball deposited in the hall with a ball acquired before the previous day, and becomes a game ball by paying out the saving ball. The storage ball is a game medium deposited in a game hall, and is generally managed by a hall management computer or other management computer installed in the game hall.

  “Number of possessed balls” is the number of balls that the player possesses as a result of the player playing the game with the gaming machine on the card, and the number of balls that have not yet been deposited in the game hall That is. Generally, the number of balls that the player has acquired on the day of the game hall is called “mochidama”, and the number of balls that the player has acquired before the previous day and that has been deposited in the amusement hall is “save ball”. Say.

  The “game ball” is data on the number of balls that can be fired by the gaming machine. As described above, this data is generated in exchange for withdrawing the balance of the prepaid card, the holding ball, or the stored ball.

  Note that the number of possessed balls may be managed by a management device for managing the number of possessed balls set in the game hall. In short, the difference between “sold balls” and “mochidama” is the number of balls that have been deposited in the amusement hall as a result of a storage operation for depositing in the amusement hall, or is still deposited in the amusement hall. It is a point whether it is the number of balls of the stage which is not.

  In this embodiment, the stored ball data is not recorded directly on the membership card, but is stored in association with the membership card number in the hall server 801F (see FIG. 33) installed in the game hall such as the hall management computer. It is comprised so that the corresponding storage ball can be searched based on. On the other hand, Mochitama records directly on the card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both may be stored in the hall server 801F in association with the card number. In the case of a visitor card, Mochitama is recorded directly on the visitor card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball may be stored in the hall server 801F in association with the card number. When storing the hall server 801F in association with the card number, data that can specify the time stored in the hall server 801F may be written on the card (member card, visitor card) and discharged. Also, the prepaid balance is directly written on a card (member card, visitor card) and discharged.

  Note that the timing for storing the holding ball in the card (member card, visitor card) or the hall server 801F is, for example, stored in real time every time the counting button 28F is operated and the counting process is performed. It is conceivable that the timing is such that it is stored or stored in a lump when the card is returned.

  Also, when the player finishes the game and returns the card from the CU3F, the holding ball stored in the CU3F is temporarily stored as a stored ball in the hall server 801F, and the date when the player receives the return of the card When the card is inserted into the same or another CU3F again on the same day, only the possession balls for the day that are once stored as accumulated balls are stored again in the CU3F, and the game balls are added within the range of the possession balls. You may be able to do it.

  The banknote inserted into the banknote insertion slot 302F is taken in by a currency discriminator (not shown), and its authenticity and banknote type are identified.

  An IR (Infrared) photosensitive unit (also referred to as an IR light receiving unit) 320F, a ball lending button (hereinafter also referred to as a lending button) 321F, and a card return button 322F are further provided on the front side of the CU3F. The IR photosensitive unit 320F is an IR photosensitive unit that receives an infrared signal from a remote controller (not shown) possessed by an attendant of a game arcade, converts it into an electronic signal, and outputs the electronic signal. The ball lending button 321F is a button for performing an operation (conversion operation to a game ball) for withdrawing the balance recorded on the inserted card and using it for a game by the P stand 2F. The card return button 322F is operated when the player ends the game, and the number of game balls determined at the end of the game on the inserted card (the number of balls at the time of card insertion-the number of conversions to game balls + count) This is an operation button for memorizing and discharging the number of possessed balls counted by the operation.

<Configuration of card unit and pachinko machine>
FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the card unit and the pachinko machine. With reference to FIG. 32, the outline of the control circuit of CU3F and P stand 2F is demonstrated.

  The CU 3F is provided with a CU control unit 323F composed of a microcomputer or the like. Although not shown, the CU control unit 323F includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU, control data, and the like. A RAM (Random Access Memory) functioning as an area, an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, and the like are provided.

  The CU control unit 323F is provided with an external communication unit (not shown) for communicating with a hall management computer and a hall server 801F (see FIG. 33) for security management, A security board (SC board) 325F is provided for communicating with the payout control board 17F while ensuring security. Note that the CU control unit 323F may be provided on the security board 325F, or the CU control unit 323F may be provided on a board different from the security board 325F. The CU3F is provided with a connection portion (not shown) to the P stand 2F side, and the P stand 2F is provided with a connection portion (not shown) to the CU3F side. These connection parts are constituted by connectors, for example.

  The security board 325F on the CU side and the payout control board 17F on the P platform side are connected to each other via this connector and connection wiring so as to be communicable. The security board 325F is provided with a communication control IC 325aF for controlling communication between the security board 325F and the payout control board 17F, and a security chip (SC) 325bF for monitoring the security of the P base 2F. Although not shown, the security chip (SC) 325bF includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU, control data, and the like. A RAM (Random Access Memory) functioning as a work area, an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, and the like are provided. Further, the SC 325bF includes a fraud detection unit 1325F, and the fraud detection unit 1325F performs fraud detection by monitoring the game ball addition request information notified from the CU control unit 323F to the P stand 2F. The server 800F (see FIG. 33) is notified. Also, the setting value (constant) for fraud detection is notified from the key management server 800F as board control information. Although not shown, the communication control IC 325aF includes a central processing unit (CPU) as a control center, a read only memory (ROM) that stores programs and control data for operating the CPU, and a work area for the CPU. A functioning RAM (Random Access Memory), an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, and the like are provided.

  Each RAM of the CU control unit 323F, the security chip (SC) 325bF, and the communication control IC 325aF is configured by a backup RAM whose stored data is not erased even when the power is turned off. Note that an EEPROM may be used instead of the backup RAM.

  The authenticity and type of the banknote are identified by the above-described money classifier, and the identification result signal is input to the CU control unit 323F. When the IR photosensitive unit 320F receives infrared rays emitted from a remote controller owned by a game attendant, the received light signal is input to the CU control unit 323F. The card reader / writer reads the information recorded on the inserted card, and the read information is input to the CU control unit 323F, and the data to be written to the inserted card from the CU control unit 323F to the card reader / writer. When transmitted, the card reader / writer writes the data to the inserted card. The card recording information includes a card ID. The CU control unit 323F stores the card ID read by the card reader / writer until the game ends.

  The CU control unit 323F manages and stores the player's possession balls when the player is playing. Data such as a balance or the number of game balls is output from the CU control unit 323F to the display control unit 350F, and is converted into display data by the display control unit 350F. The display data converted by the display control unit 350F is output to the display 312F provided on the front surface of the CU3F and the display 54F disposed on the front surface of the P stand 2F as shown in FIG. Images corresponding to the display data are displayed on the display 312F and the display 54F. Further, when the player operates the touch panel provided on the surface of the display 312F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F via the display control unit 350F. When the player operates the ball lending button 321F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F. Note that the ball lending button 321F is not limited to the configuration provided on the CU 3F, and may be configured to be provided on the P base 2F and to input an operation signal to the CU control unit 323F. When the player operates the replay button 319F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F. When the player operates the card return button 322F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F.

  The P base 2F includes a main control board 16F that controls the progress of the game of the P base 2F, a payout control board 17F that manages and stores game balls, and a launch motor 18F that drives and controls the launch motor 18F based on commands from the payout control board 17F. A control board 31F, a variable display device 278F (see FIG. 31), and the like are provided. In FIG. 32, illustration of a display control board (also referred to as an effect control board) that controls display of the variable display device based on a command from the main control board 16F is omitted.

  The main control board 16F is provided on the game board 26F. The main control board 16F is equipped with a game control microcomputer which is a main control unit 161F. The game control microcomputer includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices. The main controller 161F is connected to a winning sensor 162F and a radio wave sensor 163F provided on the game board 26F. For example, a field-programmable gate array (FPGA) substrate is used for the game control microcomputer of the main controller 161F. The game board 26F is further provided with a display control board (effect control board) for controlling the variable display device 278F and the like.

  The payout control board 17F is provided in the front frame 5F (game frame). On the payout control board 17F, a payout control microcomputer which is a payout control unit 171F is mounted. The payout control microcomputer includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices. For example, an FPGA board is used for the payout control microcomputer of the payout control unit 171F.

  Also, for the payout control board 17F, a shot ball detection switch (not shown), an out ball detection switch 701F, a foul ball detection switch 330F, a counting button 28F, a radio wave sensor 173F, a glass door opening detection switch 12F, a front frame opening detection switch 13F is provided in an electrically connected state. The radio wave sensor 173F is for detecting an illegal act of illegally transmitting radio waves and mainly turning on the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF. A detection signal of the radio wave sensor 173F is input to the payout control unit 171F via an input port (not shown) of the payout control board 17F. As described above, the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF detects the launch of a game ball by changing from on to off, and the payout control unit 171F subtracts “1” from the number of game balls based on the detection. To do. Therefore, when the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF is always turned on due to unauthorized radio waves, the number of game balls is not subtracted no matter how many balls are fired. Such radio fraud is detected by the radio wave sensor 173F. In addition, there is a possibility that not only the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF but also the shot ball detection switch may be subject to fraud by radio waves. In other words, when only the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF is always turned on by the improper radio wave, the shot of the ball is not detected, while the ball that has actually been shot is collected and detected by the shot detection switch The number of fired balls and recovered balls (out-balls) is wrinkled, an abnormality is detected, and the fraud detection information “number of fired / OUT mismatched balls” is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. Become. However, by sending unauthorized radio waves to the fired ball detection switch to make it undetectable, there is a problem that the fraud detection information of the “number of fired / OUT mismatched balls” is not transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. . In this embodiment, since the radio wave sensor 173F also detects the unauthorized radio wave transmitted to such a shot ball detection switch, the above-described inconvenience can be prevented.

  The number of times the glass door opening detection switch 12F and the front frame opening detection switch 13F are opened is counted by a counter not shown. The counting counter is equipped with a CPU, ROM, RAM, etc., and can be operated by a backup power supply even when the power supply of the P stand 2F is interrupted. And the count value can be transmitted to the payout control unit 171F. Here, the backup power source is, for example, a capacitor or a storage battery provided in the P stand 2F.

  Moreover, you may display the opening frequency etc. of the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F on the game ball number indicator 29F connected to the payout control part 171F. Specifically, the game ball number display 29F displays the number of times the glass door 6F and the front frame 5F are opened according to the display control signal from the payout control unit 171F.

  Main control board 16F to payout control board 17F, main chip ID (main control security chip ID), winning opening information, round information, connection confirmation signal, winning detection signal, starting winning opening winning information, error information, symbol confirmation Number of times, jackpot information, manufacturer-specific jackpot information, etc. are transmitted.

  The main chip ID is a chip ID recorded on the main control board 16F of the P base 2F, and is information transmitted to the payout control board 17F when the power of the P base 2F is turned on. The winning opening information is information including the type of winning opening (start winning opening, ordinary winning opening, large winning opening) and the number of winning balls (the number of balls to be paid out when a game ball enters the winning opening). This is transmitted to the payout control board 17F when the table 2F is powered on. For example, in the prize opening information, the type of the prize opening includes 3 balls in the big prize opening 271F (see FIG. 31), and information on requesting the payout control board 17F to pay 300 balls as the number of prize balls, Each of the 275F and the start winning opening 277F (see FIG. 31) includes information for entering one ball and requesting the payout control board 17F to pay out 20 balls as the number of winning balls. In addition, after a ball enters a winning port such as the normal winning port 272F and winning port information requesting the paying out of the winning ball is transmitted to the payout control board 17F, the authentication with the communication partner is disconnected due to power interruption or disconnection. In such a case, the payout control board 17F has already received the winning opening information, and the winning ball can be paid out based on the winning opening information. However, after the authentication with the communication partner is cut off due to power interruption or disconnection, etc., if a floating ball caught in a nail or the like of the game area 27F and not falling enters a winning opening such as the normal winning opening 272F, payout The control board 17F cannot receive the winning opening information and cannot pay out the winning ball. For this reason, after the authentication with the communication partner is cut off due to power interruption or disconnection, etc., the winning hole information is continuously maintained so that the prize ball can be paid out even if the floating ball enters the winning hole such as the normal winning hole 272F. An effective period in which the payout control board 17F can receive (write to the information storage unit) is set. As a result, even if the floating ball enters the winning opening such as the normal winning opening 272F after the authentication with the communication partner is cut off due to power interruption or disconnection, the payout control board 17F displays the winning opening information if it is within the valid period. It is possible to receive award balls based on floating balls. The round information is information on the number of rounds when a big hit is made, and is transmitted to the payout control board 17F when the power of the P unit 2F is turned on.

  The connection confirmation signal is a signal for confirming that the main control board 16F and the payout control board 17F are connected, and a signal of a predetermined voltage is constantly supplied from the main control board 16F to the payout control board 17F. The payout control board 17F is configured to control the operation on the condition that the payout control board 17F receives the predetermined voltage signal. The winning detection signal is a detection signal of a pachinko ball that has won a winning opening other than the starting winning opening. Upon receiving this detection signal, the payout control board 17F performs control to add the number of balls to be given to one winning ball to the number of game balls and the number of added balls.

  The start winning award winning information is information indicating that a pachinko ball has won a winning winning opening 1 or a starting winning opening 2. The error information is information for notifying the payout control board 17F that an error has occurred while the main control board 16F is performing game control.

  The symbol determination number of times is information on symbols determined as display results of the variable display device for winnings at each start winning opening.

  The jackpot information is information indicating that a jackpot has occurred. The breakdown includes common jackpot information indicating a jackpot common to each manufacturer and manufacturer-specific jackpot information indicating a manufacturer-specific jackpot. The common jackpot information is a jackpot commonly used by each gaming machine manufacturer, such as 15 round jackpots, and includes probability variation information when a probability change occurs with the jackpot. When the time-short state (control state for shortening the variable display time of the variable display device) occurs, the time-shortage information is included. The manufacturer-specific big hit is a big hit state that is adopted only by a certain gaming machine manufacturer, such as sudden probability change (surprise).

  A health check command and a prize ball number acceptance command are transmitted from the payout control board 17F to the main control board 16F. The health check command is a command for checking whether or not the main control board 16F is operating normally. The prize ball number acceptance command is a command indicating that the additional number of balls has been accepted.

  An out ball detection signal is input from the out ball detection switch 701F to the payout control board 17F. The payout control board 17F to which this out ball detection signal has been input subtracts and updates the number of in-game balls (the number of floating balls floating in the game area 27F), as will be described later. In the payout control board 17F to which the foul ball detection signal is input from the foul ball detection switch 330F, as will be described later, the addition ball number and the game ball number are added and updated, and the in-game ball number is subtracted and updated. A shot detection signal is input from the shot detection switch to the payout control board 17F. The payout control board 17F, to which this shot ball detection signal has been input, subtracts and updates the number of balls in game.

  The security board 325F of the CU 3F and the payout control board 17F of the P stand 2F are electrically connected, and a recovery request, a recovery request 2, a communication start request, Various commands such as a communication end request, a status information request, a card insertion notification, a card return notification, and a communication test request are transmitted.

  The recovery request is a command that requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. The payout control board 17F receives the recovery request and notifies the CU 3F of the recovery information of the P base 2F. The command of the recovery request 2 notifies the added recovery information to the P unit 2F. The communication start request is a command for requesting the P base 2F to start communication. The payout control board 17F receives the communication start request and responds to the CU3F with the communication start. The communication end request is a command for requesting the P unit 2F to end communication. The payout control board 17F receives the communication end request and returns a communication end response to the CU3F.

  The status information request is a command for requesting notification of status information to the P platform 2F. The payout control board 17F receives the status information request and notifies the CU 3F of the status information of the P platform 2F. The card insertion notification is a command for notifying the P unit 2F that a card has been inserted. The payout control board 17F receives the card insertion notification and responds to the CU3F that the card has been inserted. The card return notification is a command for notifying the P unit 2F that the card has been returned. The payout control board 17F receives a card return notification and responds to the CU3F that the card has been returned. The communication test request is a command for notifying test data to the P base 2F. The payout control board 17F receives the communication test request and returns test data to the CU 3F.

  Various responses such as a recovery response, a recovery response 2, a communication start response, a communication end response, a status information response, a card insertion response, a card return response, and a communication test response are transmitted from the payout control board 17F to the security board 325F.

  The front frame 5F (game frame) is provided with a launch control board 31F and a launch motor 18F. The firing control board 31F emits an excitation output to the firing motor 18F when an input signal of a touch ring (hereinafter also referred to as a touch sensor) that detects that the player is touching the hitting operation handle 25F is input, The firing motor 18F is driven.

  A firing control signal and a firing permission signal are output from the dispensing control board 17F to the firing control board 31F. Upon receiving this, the firing control board 31F outputs a signal for exciting the firing motor 18F. Thereby, the pachinko ball is in a state of being bullet-launched into the game area 27F.

  A display 54F extending from the CU 3F is provided on the front surface of the P table 2F. The display 54F receives display data from the display control unit 350F of the CU3F and displays a display screen. As described above, in the present embodiment, the display 54F extending from the CU3F provided on the front surface of the P table 2F is configured to be controlled on the CU3F side, but instead, on the P table 2F side. Even if the display 54F is provided and the display control can be performed from the CU3F side, the display 54F is provided on the P base 2F side and the display control board is provided on the P base 2F side so that the display control can be performed on the P base 2F side. But you can. In this case, the display control board controls the display of the display 54F based on a command from the payout control unit 171F.

<Notification processing of operation / non-operation information from pachinko machine>
FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a process of notifying operation / non-operation information from a pachinko machine. 33 is connected to CU 3F, hall server 801F, key management server 800F, and history management center 800AF. Here, the key management server 800F is a key management server that stores the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit in association with each serial ID (hereinafter also referred to as SID) of the electronic component inside the CU3F. is there. The key management server 800F is a server that can communicate with the main control board 16F. The machine history management center 800AF associates the information of the front frame 5F with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided on the payout control board 17F connected to the front frame 5F, and the semiconductor provided on the main control board 16F connected to the game board 26F. It includes a history management system that stores information on the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the chip and manages the history of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F. The security board 325F is connected in parallel to the payout control unit 171F via the PIF circuit 326F which is a parallel interface circuit.

  When the manufacturer (game machine manufacturer) ships the front frame 5F and the game board 26F and installs them in the hall, when the P stand 2F is operated, as shown in FIG. 33, the game machine installation information (operation information) is obtained from the P stand 2F. ) Is notified to the machine history management center 800AF. Specifically, the gaming machine installation information (operation information) notified to the machine history management center 800AF includes, for example, the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided on the payout control board 17F, and the security of the semiconductor chip provided on the main control board 16F. The chip ID and the security chip ID of the opponent when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are combined are included. Note that the security chip ID cannot be changed or deleted after registration in the history management center 800AF.

  On the other hand, shipment information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F shipped by the manufacturer is input to the machine history management center 800AF. Specifically, the shipping information is input to the machine history management center 800AF from a terminal connected to the machine history management center 800AF via a communication line or the like. The machine history management center 800AF stores the input shipping information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided therein, and notifies the stored information and the P table 2F. Is compared with the installed gaming machine information. The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation. As an error notification, for example, an error notification is performed by an error notification lamp or a display 312F, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or hall server 801F (in this case, Error notification may be performed by the hall management computer or the hall server 801F). As a result, a predetermined notification that prompts an artificial response by a staff member is performed. The information stored in association with the front chip 5F and the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID cannot be changed after the shipping information is registered in the machine history management center 800AF. Further, it is desirable that the shipping information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F is registered in the machine history management center 800AF one day before installation in the hall.

  Similarly, when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F (only one of the front frame 5F or the game board 26F) installed in the hall is removed and stored in the warehouse, the P stand 2F becomes inactive. As shown in FIG. 33, the non-operating information is notified from the P base 2F to the machine history management center 800AF. Specifically, the non-operating information notified to the machine history management center 800AF is information that the front chip 5F of the P platform 2F and the security chip ID of the game board 26F that have been installed are not transmitted.

  On the other hand, the history information management center 800AF receives the removal information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F removed by the hall or warehouse company. Then, the history management center 800AF stores the input information on the removal of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided to each of them, and notifies the stored information and the P table 2F. Is checked against the inactive information. The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation.

  Further, when a second-hand trader resells the game board 26F to another hall and installs it in the hall, when the P stand 2F is operated, the game machine installation information (operation information) is obtained from the P stand 2F as shown in FIG. The history management center 800AF is notified. Specifically, in the gaming machine installation information (operation information) notified to the machine history management center 800AF, for example, the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided on the main control board 16F, the security chip ID of the combined front frame 5F, etc. It is included.

  On the other hand, movement information (resale information) of the game board 26F resold by the secondhand dealer is input to the machine history management center 800AF. The machine history management center 800AF stores the input movement information of the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided in the game board 26F, and is notified from the stored information and the P base 2F. Check against game machine installation information. The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation.

  Further, when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F (only one of the front frame 5F or the game board 26F) installed by the disposal contractor are discarded, the P stand 2F is in a non-operating state, which is shown in FIG. Thus, the non-operating information is notified from the P base 2F to the machine history management center 800AF. Specifically, the non-operating information notified to the machine history management center 800AF is the security chip of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F (only one of the front frame 5F or the game board 26F) of the installed P stand 2F. This is information due to the fact that the ID is not transmitted.

  On the other hand, removal information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F (only one of the front frame 5F or the game board 26F) discarded by the discarder is input to the machine history management center 800AF. Then, the history management center 800AF stores the input information on the removal of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided to each of them, and notifies the stored information and the P table 2F. Is checked against the inactive information. The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation.

<Transmission / reception mode between card unit side and pachinko machine side>
Next, FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram showing main data among various data stored on each of the CU 3F side and the P base 2F side and its transmission / reception mode. Referring to FIG. 34, main data among various data stored on the CU3F side (card unit side) and the P stand 2F side (pachinko machine side) and the transmission / reception mode thereof will be described.

  In this embodiment, the fluctuation of the number of game balls is calculated on the P stand 2F side, and the current latest game ball number is stored and managed. The current number of game balls is also calculated and stored on the CU3F side, but the number of game balls is based on information transmitted from the P stand 2F side. On the other hand, the number of balls (the number of cards), the number of balls, and the card balance (balance) are managed and stored on the CU3F side.

  FIG. 34 shows the RAM storage data provided in the CU control unit 323F on the CU3F side and the RAM storage data mounted on the payout control board 17F on the P stand 2F side. First, when the power is turned on for the first time when the P platform (pachinko machine) 2F and the CU (card unit) 3F are electrically connected for the first time after they are installed in the game hall, the payout control board 17F on the P platform 2F side Receives the main chip ID (main control security chip ID) from the main control board 16F, transmits the main chip ID to the CU3F side, and also issues the payout chip ID ( The payout control security chip ID) is transmitted to the CU3F side.

  On the CU3F side, the transmitted main chip ID and payout chip ID are stored. Next, the connection time, that is, the data at the time when the communication is started after the CU3F side and the P stand 2F side are connected is transmitted from the CU 3F side to the P stand 2F side, and the transmitted connection time is transmitted on the P stand 2F side. Remember.

  In this state, three pieces of information of the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU3F side are stored on the CU3F side and the P stand 2F side. When the power is turned on thereafter, the three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data are transmitted from the P base 2F side to the CU3F side.

  On the CU3F side, the transmitted data and the already stored data are collated, and it is determined whether or not the same P stand 2F as that of the previous time is connected. The connection time data is transmitted from the CU3F side to the P unit 2F side by sending new connection time data from the CU3F side when communication between the CU3F side and the P unit 2F side is started. Time data is stored on the P platform 2F side.

  Each time a command and response is transmitted between the CU 3F side and the P base 2F side, the serial number is incremented by “1”, and the serial number is stored on the CU 3F side and the P base 2F side. This serial number is a communication number for confirming whether or not communication is properly performed by updating the number every time data is transmitted / received between the CU 3F and the P base 2F. CU3F (primary station) counts up (+1) and transmits the serial number received at the time of transmission, and P-unit 2F (secondary station) transmits the received serial number as it is. Note that the CU3F does not count up the serial number at the time of retransmission, and makes no response if the serial number continuity is not established. The previous last transmission serial number is a communication number updated at the previous transmission / reception and is a number to be backed up.

  A specific mode of serial number backup in the CU 3F and the P stand 2F in this embodiment will be described. The CU 3F counts up the serial number (+1) and transmits the command to the P platform 2F. The P base 2F backup-stores the serial number of the received command as the previous last transmission serial number. Then, the P base 2F transmits a response to the received command to the CU 3F while keeping the serial number of the received command. The CU3F backs up and stores the serial number of the received response as the previous last transmission serial number. The CU 3F and the P base 2F repeat such processing every time a response from the P base 2F is transmitted to the CU 3F.

  For example, a certain command is transmitted from the CU3F side to the P stand 2F side, and the serial number n at that time is transmitted. When the response is returned from the P base 2F side to the CU3F side, the P base 2F side stores the transmitted serial number n as the last final transmission serial number and transmits the response with the serial number n as it is. On the CU3F side, the returned serial number n is stored as the last final transmission serial number. Next, when a certain command is transmitted from the CU 3F side to the P stand 2F side, the serial number is incremented (+1) and the serial number n + 1 is transmitted. When the response is returned from the P base 2F side to the CU3F side, the P base 2F side stores the transmitted serial number n + 1 as the last final transmission serial number, and transmits the response while maintaining the serial number n + 1. On the P base 2F side, since the serial number n + 1 transmitted is incremented by 1 from the serial number n of the previous last transmission serial number that has already been stored, it is determined that data communication has been performed normally, and the response is sent to the P base 2F side. Reply to the CU3F side. On the CU3F side, the serial number n + 1 returned is incremented by 1 from the serial number n of the previous last transmission serial number that has already been stored. Therefore, it is determined that data communication has been performed normally, and the serial number is sent the next time a command is sent. Count up (+1) and send the command of serial number n + 2 to the P platform 2F side.

  The latest game machine information (game machine information being counted) is transmitted from the P machine 2F side to the CU 3F side. This latest game table information is stored in the latest game table information storage area of the RAM in the payout control unit 171F (see FIG. 32) on the P table 2F side. Specifically, information on the added ball number counter, information on the subtracted ball number counter, and information on the counted ball number counter are included. The number of game balls is not included in the latest game table information, and is transmitted from the P table 2F side to the CU 3F side as the count value of the game ball number counter as will be described later.

  Information on these counters is collectively transmitted to the CU side as a response. The added ball number counter is a counter that counts the added ball number. The added ball is the sum of “the number of winning balls × the number of winning balls” and “the number of back balls”. The back ball is a foul ball. That is, the addition ball indicates the number that the addition ball counter should add to the game ball. The subtraction ball number counter is a counter that counts the number of subtraction balls. The subtraction ball is the “number of fired balls”. That is, the number of balls detected by the output change from on to off of the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF. Note that the “number of balls to be subtracted” does not include the “number of balls to be counted”. The counting ball counter is a counter that counts the counting balls. The counting ball is “the number of balls converted from game balls to holding balls by the counting operation”.

  When a back ball is generated, the back ball is returned to the hitting ball launching position and the ball hitting operation is performed with the ball feeding to the hitting ball launching position being stopped so that all the back balls are fired into the game area. Even if a back ball is generated, the back ball may be controlled not to be counted as an additional ball. In this case, “addition balls = number of winning balls × number of winning balls”.

  For example, when a pachinko ball placed in the game area 27F wins and the winning information is transmitted from the main control board 16F to the payout control board 17F, the adding ball to which the gaming ball is added based on the winning information The added ball number counter counts the number, and the value (added ball number) of the added ball number counter is transmitted from the P stand 2F side to the CU 3F side. Moreover, the subtraction ball counter counts the number of shot balls as the number of subtraction balls based on the output change from on to off of the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF due to the pachinko ball being shot in the game area 27F, The value of the subtraction ball number counter (the number of subtraction balls) is transmitted from the P stand 2F side to the CU3F side.

  Alternatively, the payout control unit 171F counts the number of game balls as the number of counting balls by pressing the counting button 28F, and transmits the value of the counting ball number counter (counting ball number) from the P stand 2F side to the CU3F side.

  On the P stand 2F side, every time the values of the addition ball counter, the subtraction ball counter, and the counting ball counter are transmitted to the CU 3F side, the count values are stored in the previous game machine information storage area (the RAM of the payout control unit 171F). Etc.) are stored (rewritten) as backup data, and the values of the added ball counter, subtracted ball counter, and counted ball counter as the latest game table information are cleared to 0 (excluding the game ball counter). In the present embodiment, “clear” has the same meaning as “initialization”.

  As a result, in the storage area of the previous game table information (game table information transmitted immediately before), data of the number of added balls, the number of subtraction balls, and the number of counted balls, which are the game table information transmitted to the CU3F side immediately before, are backed up. Stored as data. When the latest gaming machine information is not transmitted from the P stand 2F side to the CU 3F side, this backup data includes not only the value of each counter of this time but also the value of each previous counter that has not been sent at the next transmission. It is intended to enable transmission.

  In addition, the payout control board 17F updates the value of the game ball counter in response to the occurrence of a prize, the firing of a ball, the occurrence of a back ball, and the occurrence of a counting ball (conversion from a game ball to a holding ball), The updated value of the game ball counter is transmitted to the CU3F side as the number of game balls.

  On the CU3F side, in the accumulated data storage area in the RAM, the number of game balls, the number of cards held (hereinafter also simply referred to as the number of balls), the number of stored balls, the balance, the total number of added balls (total number of added balls), the total The number of subtracted balls (cumulative number of subtracted balls) and the number of balls held at the time of card insertion are stored. The number of cards possessed is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the number of possessed balls paid out (the number of balls converted from the number of cards possessed to the number of game balls) from the number of balls possessed when the card is inserted, and adding the counted number of balls. That is, the card possession number is the number of possession possessed by the player at the present time.

  The total number of added balls is added based on the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number) transmitted from the P stand 2F side, and the number of balls is updated. Further, the number of balls is updated by subtracting the total number of subtraction balls based on the value of the subtraction ball counter (the number of subtraction balls) transmitted from the P stand 2F side. Further, the number of cards held is added and updated based on the value of the counting ball counter transmitted from the P platform 2F. Thus, the CU3F can manage the latest information by updating the total added ball number, the total subtracted ball number, and the card holding ball number with the latest game table information transmitted from the P table 2F one by one. It becomes possible.

  As shown in the figure, the CU 3F has an area for storing game balls, and also receives a count value of a game ball counter (hereinafter also referred to as game ball number or game ball total number information) from the P stand 2F side. Yes. The CU3F updates the area for storing game balls in the following procedure. That is, the CU3F stores the value based on the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number), the value of the subtracted ball number counter (number of subtracted balls), and the value of the counted ball number counter transmitted from the P side. The number of game balls being updated is updated, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the game ball counter transmitted from the P platform side at the same timing matches the updated number of game balls. If they match, the game is allowed to continue, but if they do not match, control to shift to an error state is performed.

  As a result, for example, an error notification is performed by the abnormality notification lamp or the indicator 312F, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or the hall server 801F (in this case, the hall Error notification may be performed by the management computer or the hall server 801F). As a result, a predetermined notification that prompts an artificial response by a staff member is performed.

  Instead of shifting to an error state and stopping the game, the number of game balls stored on the CU3F side is replaced with the count value of the game ball number counter transmitted from the P unit 2F side. Also good. Alternatively, it may be corrected to an average value of the number of game balls managed on the CU3F side and the number of game balls stored on the P stand 2F side.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the number of game balls is also stored on the CU3F side, but it is determined whether or not the number of game balls matches the number of game balls managed and stored on the P unit 2F side. (CU3F side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the number of game balls stored on the P stand 2F side does not match the number of game balls stored on the CU 3F side due to fraud or other circumstances, it can be checked. Here, the determination function is provided on the CU3F side. For example, the number of game balls stored on the CU3F side and stored on the P unit 2F side by the hall server 801F or hall management computer connected to the CU3F. The number of game balls being played may be received, and it may be determined whether or not the two match.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the CU3F has a storage area for storing the number of cards held and the number of stored balls, a storage area for storing the card balance of the received (inserted) card, and the total number of added balls (the number of added balls). (Cumulative total), the total number of subtracted balls (total number of subtracted balls), and a storage area for storing balls when the card is inserted. The CU control unit 323F (see FIG. 32) stores a stored ball in response to an input requesting the use of the stored ball (for example, pressing input of a replay button 319F provided on the CU 3F (when no holding ball is present)). Subtract a certain number of balls from the area.

  The CU control unit 323F (see FIG. 32) is an input requesting the use of the ball (for example, pressing input of the replay button 319F provided on the CU3F when the ball is present (however, when the ball is present)) Accordingly, a predetermined number of balls are subtracted from the storage area for storing balls. Further, the CU control unit 323F (see FIG. 32) subtracts a predetermined value from the storage area for storing the card balance in response to an input requesting the use of the card balance (for example, pressing input of the ball lending button 321F).

  When a player performs an operation to deduct the value from the player's own gaming value (for example, prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of stored balls) and use it for the game, the number of balls for the withdrawal The number of balls to be added to the number counter is transmitted from the CU3F side to the P stand 2F side. In response to this, the P stand 2F side adds and updates the game ball counter.

  On the other hand, in the gaming system according to the present embodiment, it is possible to accept a so-called wagon service order in which the gaming value owned by the player is withdrawn and exchanged for a drink or the like. However, access to wagon services with game balls is restricted, and wagon services can only be received with holding balls. This is an image of prohibiting the use of the ball before counting remaining in the dish by hand and using it for the wagon service in the conventional enclosing circulation pachinko machine in which each counter is provided.

  For this reason, in the present embodiment, when the operation for performing the wagon service is executed, if the number of possessed balls is less than the number corresponding to the desired menu of the wagon service, the player is prompted to perform the counting operation. ing. When the player performs a counting operation at that time, the number of counting balls based on the operation is transmitted from the P stand 2F side to the CU 3F side. On the CU3F side, in response to this, the number of game balls is subtracted and the number of cards held is added and updated.

<Commands and responses sent and received between the CU and the P platform>
Next, with reference to FIG. 35, an outline of commands and responses transmitted / received between the CU (card unit) 3F and the P unit (pachinko machine) 2F will be described.

  FIG. 35 shows the transmission direction, whether the data to be transmitted is a command or a response, the name of transmission information, and its outline.

<< 1. Recovery request, 2. Recovery response >>
First, a command named recovery request is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F. This recovery request command is for requesting recovery information to the P base 2F. In response to this recovery request, a response named recovery response is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The response of this recovery response notifies the CU3F of recovery information.

  The recovery request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F after the CU 3F completes the authentication. The recovery request command requests recovery information from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F, and the CU 3F transmits the command first after the authentication is completed. The recovery request includes “serial number”, “command”, “previous last transmission serial number”, and “previous final transmission count serial number”. “Serial number” is a sequence number (1 to 255). “Command” is a command code for the recovery request, and is represented by binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  The “last last transmission serial number” is the serial number of the command of the status information request last transmitted to the P unit 2F at the previous connection. When “Previous Last Transmission Sequence Number” is “0”, this indicates a state where there is no stored sequence number. The “previous last transmission serial number” is a serial number that stores the “sequential number” as the previous final transmission serial number (serial number) on the P unit 2F and CU3F side when the status information response is received at the CU3F when the P unit 2F transmits the status information response. It is.

  “Previous last transmission count sequence number” is a count sequence number of a response to the status information request last transmitted to the P-unit 2F at the previous connection. “Last transmission count sequence number” indicates that there is no stored sequence number when “0”. The “previous last transmission count sequence number” is a sequence number that stores the count sequence number as the previous last transmission count sequence number on the P unit 2F and CU3F side when the status information response is received to the CU3F when the P unit 2F transmits the status information response. .

  In the recovery process (number of balls) of the P base 2F, the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F in the counting history sequence described later, and the “store code” held by the P base 2F And the coincidence determination with “SC board ID” is performed, and if they coincide, the following processing is performed. If they do not match, the count request ball count = 0 is set in the subtraction register and notified to the user program.

  The P stand 2F refers to the “previous last transmission count sequence number” notified from the CU 3F, and when the CU 3F has not performed the count process for the count request, sets the count request ball count = 0 in the subtraction register. The user program executed on the P platform 2F is notified. When the counting process has been performed by the CU 3F, the count request ball number notified to the CU 3F is set in the subtraction register and notified to the user program. If all the store codes held by the P platform 2F are “F” (hexadecimal number), it is determined that the store codes match. Further, when the “store code” notified from the security board 325F and the “store code” held in the P stand 2F do not match, the user program side is notified of the store code mismatch via the register. Note that, when the P unit 2F receives a recovery request command from the CU 3F, it notifies the user program side via the register.

  The response of the recovery response is a response to the recovery information held in the P base 2F to the CU 3F. Recovery information includes “Serial Number”, “Command”, “Last Last Sending Serial Number”, “Last Inserted Card ID”, “Previous Card Insertion Time”, “Last Last Sent Additional Serial Number”, “Unit Price”, “Game Information” It includes “presence / absence of storage”, “previous gaming machine information”, and “previous gaming information”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  “Previous last transmission serial number” is data of a serial number included in the response of the status information response last transmitted to the CU 3F at the time of the previous connection. When “0”, there is no stored serial number. “Previously inserted card ID” is data of the card ID of the card that was being inserted at the previous connection, and “0” indicates that there is no inserted card. The payout control unit 171F of the P table 2F stores and holds the card ID that was being inserted based on the information transmitted from the CU3F.

  “Previous card insertion time” is data on the insertion time of a card that was being inserted at the time of the previous connection, and when it is “0”, there is no inserted card. This data is also represented by year information as 2 digits YY, month information as 2 digits MM, day information as 2 digits DD, time information as 2 digits hh, minute information as 2 digits mm, and second information as 2 digits ss. It is. The “previous last transmission addition serial number” is an addition serial number included in the response of the status information response last transmitted to the CU 3F at the previous connection, and when “0”, there is no additional serial number. The “ball unit price” is a unit price per ball (0.01 yen to 99.99 yen) played on the P platform 2F. “Game information storage presence / absence” is “0x00” when game information is not stored, and “0x01” when game information is stored.

  “Previous game machine information” is game machine information previously notified to the CU 3F, and includes information on “game ball number”, “game ball information”, “count request ball number”, and “counting serial number”. “Number of game balls” is the number of game balls previously notified to the CU 3F. “Game ball information” is the game ball information notified last time. The game ball information is, for example, information such as the number of fired balls, the number of balls that have passed through the outlet, and the total number of prize balls that have been previously notified to the CU 3F. The “count required ball number” is the number of game balls requested to be counted. “Counting sequence number” is the counting sequence number notified to the CU3F last time.

  The “previous game information” is game information previously notified to the CU 3F, and includes information on “number of game information” and “game information 1” to “game information n”. The “number of game information” is the number (0 to n) of game information notified to the CU 3F last time. Note that n = 0 to 22 and the length is variable. “Game information 1” is the game information 1 previously notified to the CU 3F. “Game information n” is the game information n previously notified to the CU 3F. The game information n includes, for example, type information or game prize ball information that was previously notified to the CU 3F.

  The “previous last transmission addition serial number” is a serial number stored as the last final transmission addition serial number on the CU3F side and the P base 2F when the status information request is transmitted in the CU3F and when the status information request is received in the P base 2F.

  In the recovery process (game information) of the P table 2F, the “store code” and “SC substrate ID” notified from the security board 325F in the counting history sequence described later, the “store code” held in the P table 2F, and A match with “SC board ID” is determined, and if the “store code” does not match, the recovery data is not processed. If they match, the following processing is performed.

  When there is recovery data of game information, “game information storage presence / absence” is stored: set to 0x01, the previous “game ball number”, the previous “game ball information”, the previous “count request ball number”, the previous “ The recovery data held by the P table 2F is set in the “counting serial number”, the previous “number of game information”, and the previous “game information 1 to n”. When there is no recovery data for game information or when the last transmission serial number is 0, the “game information storage presence / absence” is set to “0x00” without storage, the previous “game ball information”, the previous “count request ball count”, the previous “0” is set in the “counting serial number” and the previous “number of game information”. However, the number of game balls notified last time is set as the number of game balls. If all the store codes held by the P platform 2F are “F” (hexadecimal number), it is determined that the store codes match.

  When it is determined that the “store code” notified from the security board 325F does not match the store code held by the P platform 2F, the card is processed as having no card. That is, ALL “0” is set for “last inserted card ID” and “previous card insertion time”.

  The P base 2F stores the serial number at the time of the status information request response as the previous last transmission serial number. If the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F do not match the information held by the P units, the last transmission serial number = 0 is notified. If the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F match the information held in the P units, the last transmitted serial number stored is notified.

  The P base 2F stores the counting sequence number as the last last transmission counting sequence number when transmitting the status information response. If the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the SC 325b do not match the information held in the P units, the last transmission count serial number is notified as 0. If the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F match the information held in the P units, the last transmitted transmission number is stored.

  In addition, when the process of the “last previous transmission serial number” notified from the P unit 2F has not been performed, the CU 3F performs the recovery process using the previous game machine information. When the “last last transmission serial number” process is being performed, the CU 3F performs the recovery process using only the previous game machine information. However, the number of balls is not recovered.

  In addition, when the recovery process cannot be performed due to a mismatch of communication partners (for example, replacement of the CU 3F or the P base 2F), it may be possible to manually correct by POS based on the display information of the P base 2F. For example, the display information of the P platform 2F can be displayed using the liquid crystal display screen of the variable display device 278F. Alternatively, a display device that is controlled by the payout control unit 171F may be further provided on the P platform 2F, and information for manual correction may be displayed on the display device. Note that POS refers to a free gift management system for exchanging free gifts and managing free gifts. In addition, POS is not limited to those for exchanging prizes or managing prizes, but records general sales information for each sale of merchandise at a store and uses the aggregated results as inventory management or marketing materials. It may be management (Point Of Sales system).

<< 3. Recovery request 2, 4. Recovery response 2 >>
A command named recovery request 2 is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. The command of this recovery request 2 notifies the added recovery information to the P unit 2F. In response to this recovery request 2, a response named recovery response 2 is transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F. This response of the recovery response 2 notifies the processing result of the added recovery information to the CU 3F.

  The command of the recovery request 2 is to notify the addition recovery information to the P unit 2F, and includes data of “serial number”, “command”, “previous last transmission additional serial number”, and “number of additional balls”. Yes. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. The recovery request 2 is transmitted when the CU 3F determines that the additional ball recovery process needs to be performed on the P platform 2F. The CU 3F compares the “previous last transmission addition sequence number” included in the recovery response received from the P platform 2F with the “previous final transmission addition sequence number” stored in the CU 3F. It is determined that processing is not necessary, and in the case of mismatch, it is determined that addition ball recovery processing is necessary. When it is determined that addition ball recovery processing is necessary, a recovery request 2 is transmitted.

  The “last last transmission addition serial number” included in the recovery request 2 is data of the addition serial number of the command of the status information request last transmitted to the P-unit 2F at the time of the previous connection. This is data on the number of balls added.

  Next, the recovery process of the P platform 2F will be described in detail. In the recovery process of the P unit 2F, if the P unit 2F has not performed the process of the “previous last transmission serial number” notified from the CU 3F based on the recovery request 2, the number of balls is referred to the game ball. This is a process of performing addition.

  The response of the recovery response 2 notifies the processing result of the added recovery information to the CU 3F on the P platform 2F, and includes “serial number”, “command”, and “recovery result”. The “recovery result” is a recovery result process OK when “0x00”, and a recovery result process NG when “0x01”. In addition, when the P stand 2F cannot receive the additional number of balls, the process NG is returned as a recovery result.

  When the recovery process (additional number of balls) of the P unit 2F is performed, if the P unit 2F has not performed the process of the “last previous transmission addition serial number” notified from the CU3F, the process OK is processed as a “recovery result” to the CU3F. And the number of balls to be added notified from the CU3F is set in the addition register and notified to the user program. When the number of added balls notified from the CU3F = 0, the number of added balls = 0 is set in the addition register, notified to the user program, and the process OK is returned to the CU3F. However, if the game table state 1 responds with the game ball addition result (Bit5 = 1) in the state information response when the CU state of the state information request to be described later is a game ball addition request (Bit = 1), a “recovery” is sent to the CU3F. Processing NG is returned as a “result”, and the number of balls to be added = 0 is set in the addition register and notified to the user program.

  When the “previous last transmission addition serial number” notified from the CU3F is the same as the “previous final transmission addition serial number” held by the chip of the P stand 2F, the number of balls to be added = 0 is set in the addition register, The user program is notified, and processing NG is returned as a “recovery result” to the CU 3F. If the “last last transmission addition serial number” notified from the CU3F = 0, regardless of the number of additional balls notified from the CU3F, the number of additional balls = 0 is set in the addition register, and the user program is notified to the CU3F. The process OK is returned.

  In addition, at the timing when the recovery process is completed (for example, when the recovery completion flag is set), the “previous last transmission addition serial number” notified from the CU3F is notified to the user program via the register regardless of the recovery result. . When the recovery request 2 is not received, the “previous last transmission addition serial number” held by the chip of the P platform 2F is notified to the user program at the timing when the recovery process is completed.

<< 5. 5. Communication start request, Communication start response >>
A communication start request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This communication start request command requests the P base 2F to start communication. In response to this communication start request, a response to the communication start response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. This communication start response is a response to the CU3F to start communication.

  The communication start request command notifies the P base 2F that communication has started normally. The P base 2F that has received the communication start request clears the recovery information stored so far. The communication start request command includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. The CU 3F sets the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value) after the communication start request, and the P unit 2F also sets the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value) after receiving the communication start request.

  The response of the communication start response notifies the CU 3F that the communication has started normally, and the CU 3F clears the recovery information. The response of the communication start response includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

<< 7. 7. Communication end request, Communication end response >>
A communication end request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This communication end request command requests the P unit 2F to end communication. In response to this communication end request, a response of a communication end response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. The response of the communication end response is a response to the CU3F for the communication end.

  The communication end request command notifies the P unit 2F that the communication has ended normally, and includes data of “serial number” and “command”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The response of the communication end response is to notify the CU 3F that the communication has ended normally, and the CU 3F and the P stand 2F stop communication and wait for restart after the notification. The response of the communication end response includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

<< 9. Status information request >>
A status information request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This status information request command is for requesting the status of the CU 3F to the P base 2F. The CU 3F periodically checks the state of the P stand 2F using this command. The status information request command includes the number of balls to be added from the CU3F side to the P stand 2F side shown in FIG.

  Specific data of this status information request includes “serial number”, “command”, “CU state”, “additional ball number”, “additional serial number”, “counting serial number”, “ball unit price”, and “counting receipt time”. Is included. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The “CU state” represents the state of the CU 3F notified to the P base 2F, and indicates that the card is being inserted when Bit 0 is “1”, and the card is not inserted when “0”. That is, Bit0 represents a state in which a card (general card / member card) is inserted in CU3F. In addition, a general card is being inserted by depositing a stock card (general 0 yen 0 coin card) stocked in advance in the card stock section of the CU3F.

  When Bit 1 is “1”, the card unit is being opened, and when it is “0”, the card unit is being closed. That is, Bit1 notifies the card unit opening state to P stand 2F according to the state of CU3F. The timing for notifying the opening of the card unit is, for example, when the opening of the card unit is completed. The timing for notifying that the card unit is closed is, for example, when the store is closed. When the same state changes from opening to closing, the P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F as a count information of all the game balls it holds as a count information response.

  When Bit 2 is “1”, the card return preparation is in progress, and when “0”, the card return preparation is not in progress. The CU3F notifies the P stand 2F of “preparing for card return” for a certain period (10 seconds) by setting this bit during each operation of card return, simple leaving, and meal break. When the operation of the counting button 28F is detected, the P table 2F has operated the counting button once or a plurality of times if it receives a status information request with the bit being prepared for card return turned on. Regardless of the operation duration, regardless of the operation duration time, all the stored game balls are notified to the CU 3F by the status information response as the number of balls.

  When Bit 3 is “1”, a game ball addition request is shown, and when Bit 3 is “0”, no game ball addition request is shown. That is, Bit3 requests addition of game balls (the number of added balls) at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and stored ball payout operations.

  When Bit 4 is “1”, completion of counting ball reception is indicated, and “0” indicates that counting ball is not received. Bit 4 notifies the P stand 2F that the receipt is completed when the counting ball is received. That is, it is used to confirm delivery of the response “count ball” of the state information response. When receiving the counting ball reception completion, the P stand 2F checks whether the counting sequence number is the same as that of the P stand 2F, and if it does not match, notifies the CU 3F without subtracting the number of game balls.

  When Bit 5 is “1”, card removal is waiting, and “0” indicates completion of card removal. Bit5 notifies the P stand 2F that the card is waiting to be removed from the CU 3F. Bit 6 to Bit 7 are not used.

  The “added ball number” is the added ball number of game balls, and the data of the added ball number is valid only when Bit 3 in the CU state is “1”. The “addition serial number” is an addition sequence number (0 to 255), and is notified by updating (+1) the sequence number when a game ball addition request is made. The “counting sequence number” is a counting sequence number (0 to 255), and the count sequence number received when the count is requested is notified as it is. However, if the continuity of the counting sequence number is not established, the counting is not received.

  The “ball unit price” is a unit price (0.01 yen to 99.99 yen) per game ball played on the P platform 2F. The unit price notified from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F is stored in, for example, the RAM of the payout control board 17F of the P stand 2F. And P stand 2F notifies ball unit price memorized by RAM to CU3F by a status information response when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, when recovery information for returning from a communication disabled state is requested from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F (recovery request command is transmitted from the CU 3F), the P unit 2F receives a response to the response of the recovery response. Set unit price and send to CU3F. That is, the ball unit price is not output to the outside except for notifying the CU 3F at the time of recovery response. The unit price stored in the P stand 2F is set in the response of the recovery response when the recovery request command is transmitted from the CU 3F, and is transmitted to the CU 3F. Thereby, it is possible to accurately grasp the unit price of the game balls that have been played on the P platform 2F before the recovery, and the player can be resumed with an appropriate game value after the recovery. Further, by not outputting the ball unit price stored in the P stand 2F to the outside other than notifying the CU 3F at the time of a recovery response, security is secured so that the ball unit price is not changed illegally. Furthermore, the ball unit price stored in the P unit 2F prohibits overwriting a new unit price when the P unit 2F holds the number of game balls. In addition, even when the P stand 2F holds the number of game balls, overwriting of the ball unit price stored in the P unit 2F is permitted and converted into a ball unit price overwritten with the number of game balls held. May be configured to update.

  The “count reception time” is information for notifying the P table 2F of the time when the CU 3F received the count request from the P table 2F, and the CU state Bit 4 (game ball count reception response) is “1” ( It is valid only when it is completed. The “count reception time” information is notified to the P platform 2F, but is processed only within the CPU of the payout control unit 171F, and stored in a RAM or the like accessible from the outside without being notified to the user program. Absent. Therefore, the information of “count reception time” is deleted in the CPU of the payout control unit 171F, so that security can be ensured.

<< 10. Status information response >>
In response to the status information request, a response of the status information response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. This response of the status information response notifies the CU 3F of the information / status of the P platform 2F. The response of the status information response includes the latest game table information and the number of game balls shown in FIG.

  The specific data of this status information response includes “sequential number”, “command”, “number of game balls”, “number of fired balls”, “number of balls passed through outro”, “total number of ball balls”, “count request ball” Data of “number”, “counting serial number”, “launch strength”, “game table state”, “fraud detection information” and “game information” are included. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The “number of game balls” is the current number of game balls (the number of game balls as a result of calculating addition / subtraction). “Number of game balls” calculates the number of game balls held by the CU 3F using the “total number of ball balls”, “number of fired balls”, and “count ball number” described later. Thereafter, the CU 3F checks whether the calculated number of game balls of the CU 3F matches the number of game balls of the P unit 2F.

  “Number of fired balls” is the number of fired balls (summed if there are balls fired multiple times at the time of transmission). However, if there are back balls, subtract the number of back balls. That is, the “number of fired balls” (subtraction) is data to be subtracted from the number of game balls held by the CU 3F. When the data is received without holding the card, the CU 3F does not subtract the number of game balls. CU3F does not perform subtraction when the number of game balls held by CU3F itself is zero.

  “The number of balls that have passed through the outlet” is the number of balls that have passed through the outlet 154F (when there are multiple passing balls at the time of transmission, they are added together).

  “Total number of prize balls” is the total number of prize balls in the prize ball information 1-n. The prize ball information 1-n is the number of prize balls for each prize opening type such as a start opening, a big winning opening, a winning opening (ordinary winning opening), and the like. Note that the “total prize ball count” (addition) does not include the “addition request ball count” transmitted from the CU 3F. Further, the CU3F adds the data of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls held. When the total prize ball number data is received without holding the card, the CU 3F does not add the number of game balls.

  The “count request ball number” is the number of game balls requested to be counted. That is, the “count ball” (subtraction) is data that is subtracted from the number of game balls held by the CU 3F and added to the number of cards held. The number of counting balls is not used for the data of the number of subtraction balls transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. When the data is received without holding the card, the CU 3F does not subtract the number of game balls. CU3F does not perform subtraction when the number of game balls held by CU3F itself is zero.

  However, when the card unit opening state changes from opening to closing, the game balls held by the gaming machine are counted and set as the number of counting balls. When the card unit opening state is open, the operation of the counting button 28F is performed, so that the number of game balls is counted and set as the number of counting balls. However, when the card unit opening state changes from opening to closing, the game balls are automatically counted and set as the counting balls without waiting for the operation of the counting button 28F.

  The “counting serial number” is a counting sequence number (0 to 255), and is updated (+1) and notified when a counting is requested.

“Launch strength” is information on the launch strength of a game ball.
The “gaming table state” indicates the state of the P table 2F at the time when the command for requesting the state information is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P table 2F. The “gaming table state 1”, “gaming table state 2”, “ It includes information on “game table state 3” and “game table error state”.

  Bit 0 of “gaming table state 1” indicates whether the game is permitted or prohibited. When “0”, the game is permitted, and when “1”, the game is prohibited. Bit1 indicates whether or not the fan (player) is playing (balls are being fired), and is “0” when waiting (the fan is not firing a ball), and “1”. A game is in progress (a state in which a fan is firing a ball), but there is a game ball, and a game is being played in a state in which the launch handle (hitting ball operation handle 25F) is touched (a state in which the touch sensor is touched).

  Bit 2 indicates the presence / absence of a game ball (detection of no game ball). When “0”, there are a number of game balls, and when “1”, there is no game balls. Bit 3 indicates whether or not the whereabouts of all the fired balls are confirmed in a state where the fire of the balls is stopped. That is, it shows whether all the floating balls in the game area 27 have been collected. However, it does not include ball stoppages due to a fire stop switch (also called a single shot switch). When it is “0”, the game is incomplete (a state where all balls are unconfirmed), and when it is “1”, a game is complete (a state where all balls are confirmed). If the completion of the game is not confirmed for 15 seconds or more after stopping the ball firing, the P stand 2F times out and the game is completed.

  Bit 3 indicates whether or not the whereabouts of all the fired balls are confirmed in a state where the fire of the balls is stopped. “0” indicates game ball indefinite (state where all balls are undetermined), and “1” indicates game ball definite (state where all balls are definite). Here, for example, if the P ball 2F has not been able to confirm the whereabouts of the game ball for 15 seconds or more after stopping the ball launching, it will time out and determine the game ball. Further, the P stand 2F is set in a state in which the whereabouts of the game balls are determined (game ball determination) when the power is turned on or the RAM is cleared.

  Bit 4 indicates whether or not there is a game ball count request (whether or not a count button is pressed). When “0”, there is no request, and when “1”, there is a count ball payout request at the start of counting. When the counting operation is detected, the P platform transmits this counting request ON state information response to the CU 3F and confirms whether or not the counting request has been received. When “1”, it is a count request. Bit 5 indicates the processing result of the game ball addition, which is addition OK when “0” and addition NG when “1”. In addition, when the P platform 2F makes an addition NG response, the addition sequence number is notified without being updated. Bit 6 indicates a pressed state of the firing stop switch. When “0”, the switch is released, and when “1”, the switch is pressed. Bit 7 is reserved.

  Bit 0 of “gaming table state 2” represents jackpot information jackpot 1 (all jackpots), and “1” is set during all jackpots. Bit 1 represents big hit 2 of big hit information (big hit + small hit), and sets “1” during all big hits and small hits. Bit 2 represents the big hit 3 of the big hit information (big hit of the big ball), and “1” is set during the big hit where the big ball is big. Bit 3 represents big hit 4 of big hit information (big hit of small ball), and “1” is set during big hit with small ball. Bit 4 represents a big hit 5 of the big hit information (a big hit in the outgoing ball), and “1” is set during the big hit in the middle of the outgoing ball. Bit5 to Bit7 are reserved.

  Bit 0 of “gaming table state 3” represents a big hit in the gaming state information + short time, and “1” is set in the big hit and short time. Bit1 represents the probability change of the game state information, and “1” is set during the probability change. Bit 2 represents the time of the game state information, and “1” is set during the time reduction. Bit 3 indicates that the game state information is changing, and “1” is set during the change. Bit4 to Bit7 are reserved.

  The “gaming table error state” indicates an error code occurring in the P table 2F, and each error code is expressed using Bit0 to Bit5. Note that there is no error when Bit 0 to Bit 5 are all “0”. Bit 6 is information for specifying a place where an error has occurred, and represents payout control when “0” and main control when “1”. Bit 7 indicates an error output method. When it is “0”, only an alarm is issued, and when it is “1”, it indicates an alarm + output to the hall server 801F.

  The “fraud detection information” is information detected by the P stand 2F at the time when the command for requesting the status information is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F. , “Illegal detection information 1” to “fraud detection information 4” and “additional serial number” are included.

  The “fraud detection state 1” is fraud detection information of the main control board 16F. Bit 0 of “fraud detection state 1” indicates fraud detection information of radio wave sensor detection when “1”. Bit1 indicates that it is the positive detection information that the magnetic sensor is not detected when “1”. Bit2 represents fraud detection information for fraud detection when “1”. Bit3 to Bit7 are reserved.

  The “fraud detection state 2” is fraud detection information of the payout control board 17F. Bit 0 of “fraud detection state 2” indicates fraud detection information for opening the glass plate when “1”. Bit 1 represents fraud detection information for opening the frame body when “1”. Bit 2 represents fraud detection information of radio wave sensor detection when “1”. Bit 3 represents fraud detection information of the proximity sensor abnormality when “1”. Bit 4 represents fraud detection information for detecting a prize ball goto when “1”. Here, the “goto” is an illegal act of acquiring a ball in an illegal manner in a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine. Bit 5 represents fraud detection information for complex goth detection when “1”. Bit 6 represents fraud detection information for fraud addition detection when “1”. Bit 7 represents fraud detection information for nighttime frame opening / monitoring SW abnormality detection when “1”.

  “Injustice detection information 1” is data indicating information on detection of a prize ball sensor ball (the number of winning inconsistent balls). The “fraud detection information 1” is valid when Bit 4 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”. “Injustice detection information 2” is data indicating information of composite sensor goto detection (number of fired / OUT inconsistent balls). That is, it is data indicating information when an inconsistency between the number of fired balls and the number of balls out (number of balls passing through the outlet) is detected. “Unauthorized detection information 2” is valid when Bit 5 of “Unauthorized state 2” is “1”. “Falsification detection information 3” is data indicating information of fraud addition detection (number of fraud addition balls). The “fraud detection information 3” is valid when Bit 6 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”. “Falsification detection information 4” is data indicating nighttime frame opening information. The “fraud detection information 4” is valid when Bit 7 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”.

  Bit 7 of “illegal detection information 4” is information indicating whether or not the night monitoring switch abnormality 4 has occurred, and indicates “normal” when “0” and abnormal 4 occurrence when “1”. Bit 6 is information indicating whether or not the nighttime monitoring switch abnormality 3 has occurred, and represents “normal” when “0” and abnormal 3 occurrence when “1”. Bit 5 is information indicating whether or not the night monitoring switch abnormality 2 has occurred, and indicates “normal” when “0” and abnormal 2 occurrence when “1”. Bit 4 is information indicating whether or not the night monitoring switch abnormality 1 has occurred, and represents “normal” when “0” and abnormal 1 occurrence when “1”. Bits 0 to 3 are information indicating the number of opening of the main body frame. When the bit is “0”, there is no opening, and “1” to “15” indicate the number of opening. The number of times of opening is counted up to 15 times, and the count after 16 times is held at 15 times.

  “Addition sequence number” is a sequence number for addition, and the addition sequence number received at the time of addition request is notified as it is. However, if the continuity of the addition sequence number is not established, the addition NG is notified.

  The “fraud detection state 3” is fraud detection information of the payout control board 17F. Bit 0 of “fraud detection state 3” indicates fraud detection information of other store game ball detection when “1”. Bit 5 of “fraud detection state 3” indicates that when “1”, the card unit to which the P unit 2F was connected in the past was the development CU3FD (development CU connection). Bit 6 of “illegal detection state 3” indicates that the card unit to which the P stand 2F was connected in the past when “1” is the game board development jig 3E (game board development jig connection). . Bit 7 of “illegal detection state 3” indicates that the gaming machine connected when “1” is a gaming machine simulator (gaming machine simulator connection). Bit1 to Bit4 are reserved. In addition, the other store game ball detection is, for example, a sensor is provided in the collection balls passing path of P units, the sensor reads identification information (such as a marking on the surface) provided on the game ball, the game ball of the own store It is determined whether or not it matches the identification information. In the case of a mismatch, it is assumed that the game balls of other stores are mixed in the game balls, and Bit 0 of “injustice detection state 3” is set to “1” and notified to the CU 3F.

  The “game information” is information on the P device 2F at the time when the command for requesting the state information is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P device 2F. The “game information number”, “type information 1” to “type information n” , “Count information 1” to “count information n”.

  “Number of game information” is the number (n) of type information / count information, and n = 0 to 22 (variable length). “Type information 1” to “Type information n” indicate game type information 1 to game type information n, respectively. The type information is data type information from Bit 4 to Bit 7 and indicates the data type of the game information. When it is “0”, there is no information, when it is “1”, when it is “2”, it is a big prize opening. “3” is a winning opening, “4” is the number of symbol stops, “5” is a big hit, and “6” is a small hit. Bit 0 to Bit 3 are data number information, which indicates the data number for each data type of game information. When “0”, there is no information, and when “1” to “15”, each data number is indicated. . For example, when the data type is a big hit of “5”, the data number is “1”, the ball is large, “2” is the ball is small, “3” is the ball, “4” to “6” It is a spare time. Further, when the data type is a small hit of “6”, the data number is a small hit when “1”, and a spare when “2” to “15”.

  “Count information 1” to “Count information n” indicate game count information 1 to game count information n, respectively.

  Here, when the data type is a start opening, a large winning opening, and a small winning opening, the count information is information on the number of winning balls from Bit 4 to Bit 7, and the winning ball at the time of winning for each type information of game information. The numbers indicate the number of award balls when “1” to “15”. Bit 0 to Bit 3 are information on the number of wins, which indicates the number of wins (cumulative) for each type of game table information, and each of the numbers “1” to “15” represents data on the number of wins. In the count information, when the data type is the symbol stop count, Bit 4 to Bit 7 are fixed to “0”, Bit 0 to Bit 3 indicate the symbol stop count, and when “1” to “15”, the symbol stop count Represents. In the count information, when the data type is big hit or small hit, Bit 4 to Bit 7 are fixed to “0”, Bit 0 to Bit 3 indicate the number of hits, and when “1” to “15”, the number of hits is shown. It represents.

  Furthermore, the response of the state information response includes a “launch intensity signal”, a “passing area signal”, a “during fluctuation signal”, and a “handle touch signal”.

  The “fire strength signal” indicates the fire strength T that is the detection result of the fire strength sensor 19 described above. As described above, in the present embodiment, the firing intensity T is a variable value that varies from 0 (minimum value) to 99 (maximum value) in accordance with the amount of steering operation. In addition, when the communication interval (for example, 200 msec) between the P stand 2F and the CU3F is shorter than the interval between the pachinko balls (for example, 0.6 sec), a firing intensity signal is basically output for each ball. become. Further, the firing intensity signal may be output as a set with data indicating whether or not it has actually been fired.

  “Passing area signal” indicates the above-described passing area signal. As described above, in the present embodiment, the pass area signal is one of the pass area signals A1 to A8. Each passing area signal is associated with the firing intensity T at the time when each passing area signal is detected.

  The “changing signal” indicates that the symbol displayed on the variable display device 278 </ b> F is fluctuating as the pachinko ball passes through any of the start winning holes 275, 276, and 277.

  The “handle touch signal” indicates that the touch sensor detects that the player is touching the hitting operation handle 25F.

<< 11. Card insertion notification, 12. Card insertion response >>
A card insertion notification command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F. This card insertion notification command is for notifying the P unit 2F of card insertion. In response to this card insertion notification, a response of a card insertion response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. This response to the card insertion response is a response to the effect that the card insertion notification has been received with respect to the CU 3F.

  The card insertion notification command notifies the card ID and insertion time of the inserted card to the P base 2F when the card is inserted, and “sequential number”, “command”, “card ID”, “card insertion time”, Data of “store code” and “SC board ID” are included. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  “Card ID” is identification ID information of an IC card inserted into the CU 3F, and is used for associating with a game ball held by the P stand 2F. “Card insertion time” is the time when the IC card is inserted into the card insertion / eject port 309F (see FIG. 1) of the CU3F. The year information is two digits YY, the month information is two digits MM, and the day information is two digits. The data is DD, time information is represented by two digits hh, minute information is represented by two digits mm, and second information is represented by two digits ss. The card insertion time is used to determine whether the game ball held on the P platform 2F is the current day ball or the past ball.

  The “store code” is a store identification code in which the CU 3F is installed, and is used for associating with a game ball held by the P stand 2F. It is also used to determine whether or not the CU3F has been moved to the store. The CU3F stores a store code where the CU3F is installed. The store code is notified from the security board 325F with information added thereto. The “SC board ID” is an SC board ID for identifying the CU3F, and is used to determine whether or not the CU3F has been replaced. The SC board ID is added to the security board 325F and notified to the P platform 2F. The payout control unit 171F of the P table 2F stores information notified by the card insertion notification command such as the card ID (C-ID) and the card insertion time. The “store code” and “SC board ID” are not notified to the user program side and are deleted in the payout control circuit.

  The response of the card insertion response notifies the CU 3F that the card insertion notification has been normally received, and includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The operation of the P stand 2F at the time of card insertion / return notification will be described. First, a card or general card is inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309F of CU3F, or a card is notified to the P stand 2F as a card insertion notification by depositing a general 0 yen 0 coin card. Information such as ID and card insertion time is notified. When there is a card insertion notification, the P table 2F backs up information such as the card ID and the card insertion time. However, when a card insertion notification command is received and a status information request including information on the status of the CU 3F being inserted into the card (Bit 0 = 1 in the CU status) is received (determined that the card is being inserted in the P stand 2F) ), The P base 2F transmits only a response without backing up information such as the card ID and the card insertion time. When the card return button 322F of the CU 3F is pressed, a card return notification is made to the P base 2F, and the P base 2F clears information such as the backed up card ID and card insertion time. The condition for canceling the card insertion state is when the P stand 2F receives the card return notification command.

<< 13. Card return notice, 14. Card return response >>
A card return notification command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F. This card return notification command is for notifying the P unit 2F of the card return. In response to this card return notification, a response of a card return response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. The response of this card return response is a response to the card return to the CU3F.

  The card return notification command is for notifying the P platform 2F of the card return, and the CU 3F transmits the notification when the “card return” button is pressed. The card return notification includes data of “serial number” and “command”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The response to the card return response is to send a response to the card return notification to the CU 3F, and includes data of “serial number”, “command”, “card ID”, and “card insertion time”. “Serial number”, “command”, “card ID”, and “card insertion time” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. Note that the CU3F does not return the card if the card ID included in the command does not match the ID of the currently inserted card or there is a problem with the card insertion time included in the command. , And processing such as prohibiting the writing of the holding ball to the card.

  Here, the operation of the P stand 2F at the time of card insertion notification or card return notification will be described. At the time of card insertion notification, if the CU3F is used to insert a member card, a general card, or a deposit to a general 0 yen 0 coin card, the P stand 2F backs up the card ID and the card insertion time. When an operation of pressing the “card return” button is performed on the CU 3F at the time of the card return notification, the P stand 2F clears the card ID and the card insertion time.

<< 15. Communication test request, 16. Communication test response >>
A communication test request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This communication test request command notifies the P unit 2F of test data. In response to this communication test request, a response of a communication test response is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The response of this card return response is a response of test data to the CU3F.

  The communication test request command notifies the P unit 2F of test data. Note that the test data notified to the P platform 2F is not encrypted. The communication test request command includes data of “serial number”, “command”, and “test data”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. “Test data” is test data to be notified to the P base 2F and is arbitrary data.

  The response of the communication test response notifies the CU3F of test data. Note that the test data notified to the CU3F is not encrypted. The response of the communication test response includes data of “serial number”, “command”, and “test data”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. “Test data” is test data notified to the CU 3F, and is arbitrary data.

<< 17. Count history request, 18. Counting history response >>
A count history request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This count history request command is for requesting a count history to the P base 2F. In response to this counting history request, a response to the counting history response is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The response to the counting history response is to notify the counting history to the CU3F.

  The count history request command requests a count history to the P base 2F, and the CU 3F transmits the count history sequence to the P base 2F after the authentication sequence. The count history request includes data of “serial number”, “command”, “store code”, and “SC board ID”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The “store code” is a store identification code in which the CU 3F is installed, and is used for associating with a game ball held by the P stand 2F. The store code is notified from the security board 325F with information added thereto. The “SC board ID” is an SC board ID for identifying the CU3F, and is used to determine whether or not the CU3F has been replaced. The SC board ID is added to the security board 325F and notified to the P platform 2F.

  A process for detecting the shipment maker code of the SC board ID will be described. The SC board ID includes an identification code and a shipping manufacturer code. The P units recognize connected units (commercial CU3F, development unit, etc.) by detecting the shipping manufacturer code included in the SC board ID.

  Specifically, a description will be given of a case where the P platform detects whether a unit to be connected is a development unit or a game board development jig. When the game history when these development units and game board development jigs not used for commercial use are connected to the unit (CU3F) used for commercial use after that, the game balls given during development This causes a problem that allows a game to be played during commercial use. Therefore, in order to avoid the problem, the P stand 2F detects whether the development unit or the game board development jig is connected when connected to the unit, and stores the result in the recovery register.

  In order to detect whether the development unit or the game board development jig is connected when connected to the unit, the P base 2F, the shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID before the count history request, and the count history request The shipping manufacturer code of the later SC board ID is compared. First, if the shipment maker code of the SC board ID before the count history request is “None”, the development unit or the game board development jig is detected regardless of the shipment maker code of the SC board ID after the count history request. do not do. Even if the shipment maker code of the SC board ID before the count history request matches the shipment maker code of the SC board ID after the count history request, it is not detected as a development unit or a game board development jig.

  However, when the shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID before requesting the counting history and the shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID after requesting the counting history match the upper byte, but the lower byte is different, it is detected as a development unit. Also, the upper byte of the shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID before requesting the counting history is the code of the commercial unit, and the upper byte of the shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID after requesting the counting history is the code other than the game board development jig Also detected as a development unit. If the upper byte of the shipping maker code of the SC board ID before requesting the counting history is the code of the commercial unit, and the upper byte of the shipping maker code of the SC board ID after requesting the counting history is the code of the game board development jig, the game board Detect with development jig.

  The P stand 2F stores the detection that the development unit is connected by setting Bit 4 of the recovery register to “1”, and the detection that the game board development jig is connected is the recovery register. This bit is memorized by setting Bit 5 to “1”.

  If the shipment maker code of the SC board ID before the count history request is “none”, the shipment maker code of the SC board ID stored in the P base 2F is a unit newly connected after the recovery process is performed. The shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID is overwritten. When the shipment maker code of the SC board ID before the count history request is “present”, the shipment maker code of the SC board ID stored in the P base 2F is subjected to the recovery process if there is no game ball to be recovered. After that, the shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID of the newly connected unit is overwritten. However, the shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID stored in the P base 2F is the same as the shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID of the newly connected unit after the recovery process if there is a game ball to be recovered. Prohibit overwriting. It should be noted that the prohibition state of overwriting the shipment maker code of the SC board ID is canceled by clearing the RAM of the P unit 2F (particularly clearing the number of game balls). By prohibiting the overwriting of the shipping maker code of the SC board ID when there are game balls, the number of game balls given by the development unit is recovered as the number of game balls that can be played by the connected commercial unit thereafter. This can be prevented.

  The response of the counting history response is to notify the counting history to the CU 3F, and the P unit 2F receives the counting history request command and transmits the counting history information stored in the P unit 2F to the CU 3F. . The count history response includes data of “serial number”, “command”, “count history result”, “count history 1”, and “count history 2”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  “Counting history result” is information indicating whether or not the counting history is stored in the P table 2F by the counting history process in the P table 2F. Here, the counting history is a history of the number of game balls paid out to the CU3F side as the number of counting request balls from the P table 2F side during the period from the counting request ON state to the counting request OFF state. “Card ID”, “Counting receipt time” included when receiving a count receipt response (count response ON) from the CU3F, and the cumulative number of count balls dispensed up to the count request OFF state “cumulative count balls” It also includes information on “number”. Note that the P platform 2F holds the history of the past two times (the history of the number of game balls in the period from the counting request ON state to the counting request OFF state is one time).

  In the count history result, “0x00” indicates that there is no history, “0x01” indicates that there is a history (with information on count history 1), and “0x02” indicates that there is a history (with information on count history 2).

  “Counting history 1” is the most recent history (final counting) of the past two histories, and includes information on “card ID”, “counting reception time”, “cumulative counting ball number”, and “game ball number”. Is included. “Card ID” is identification information of the card inserted into the CU 3F at the time of counting request. The “count reception time” is the time when the CU 3F receives the number of game balls requested to be counted from the P stand 2F. The “cumulative counting ball number” is the cumulative number of counting balls counted during the period from the counting request ON state to the counting request OFF state. The “number of game balls” is the number of game balls held on the P stand 2F at the end of counting.

  “Counting history 2” is an old history (counting immediately before the last counting) of the past two times, and includes “card ID”, “counting reception time”, “cumulative counting ball number” and “game ball”. Contains number information. The information of “card ID”, “counting reception time”, “cumulative counting ball number”, and “game ball number” is the same type of information as included in “counting history 1”, and detailed description thereof will not be repeated. .

  Next, conditions for outputting the count history data held by the P platform 2F to the CU 3F will be described. When the P store 2F matches the “store code” and “SC board ID” held in the “store code” and “SC board ID” included in the count history request command received from the CU 3F in the counting history sequence, The “counting history result”, “counting history 1”, and “counting history 2” are included in the response of the counting history response and output to the CU 3F. Further, if the “store code” stored in the count history request command received from the CU 3F matches the “store code” stored in the P table 2F, even if the “SC board ID” is different, the count history response Including “counting history result”, “counting history 1”, and “counting history 2” in the response to the CU3F. This takes into account changing the combination of P stand 2F and CU 3F in the store, and if it is in the same store, it is disadvantageous even if the counting history data stored in P stand 2F is transferred to another CU 3F Is not given.

  However, if the “store code” stored in the “store code” included in the count history request command received from the CU 3F is different from the “store code” stored in the P table 2F, It is prohibited to include the “counting history result”, “counting history 1”, and “counting history 2” in the response of the response to output to the CU 3F. Even if the same CU3F is moved to another store, even if it is connected to the P stand 2F holding the same “SC board ID”, if the counting history data is taken over, it is disadvantageous to the other store. It is because there is a possibility of giving.

  Of course, the P base 2F outputs the counting history data stored in the P base 2F when not connected to the CU3F but connected to the game board development jig or the development unit, or when not connected to any unit. There is no. By restricting the output of the counting history data, the security of the game machine including the P machine 2F and the P machine 2F is enhanced.

<Main sequences processed between CU and P>
Next, based on FIGS. 36 to 45, processing is performed between the CU 3F and the P base 2F by processing executed by the CPU mounted on the CU control unit 323F and the CPU mounted on the payout control board 17F. The main sequence will be described.

<< Send command and response >>
First, transmission of commands and responses between the CU 3F and the P base 2F will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU3F (primary station) to the P station 2F (secondary station), and the P station 2F returns a response to the CU3F in response to the command. In other words, the business message transmission is a command / response system in which the CU 3F is the primary station and the P stand 2F is the secondary station.

  The period from the transmission of the first command to the P stand 2F from the CU 3F to the transmission of the next command is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds. Further, the period from the transmission of the response from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F until the transmission of the next response is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds.

  Thus, both a command and a response are transmitted at intervals of 200 ms between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F. On the other hand, by operating the hitting operation handle 25F, the P platform 2F hits 100 pachinko balls into the game area 27F per minute, so the hitting time interval is 0.6 seconds. As a result, a plurality of commands and responses are transmitted and received while firing one ball.

  Therefore, responses for notifying the amount of change in the number of game balls are sequentially transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F at intervals shorter than the ball firing time interval. As a result, the P stand 2F can notify the CU 3F of the amount of change in the number of game balls.

  Here, the transmission interval of the command and the response is set to 200 ms, but the transmission interval may be longer or shorter than this. For example, the transmission interval may be a firing time interval of the P base 2F. It is also possible to match with

<< Communication line disconnection detection on CU side >>
Next, processing when communication disconnection is detected on the CU3F side will be described. When the response is not received within 200 ms after the CU 3F transmits the command to the P base 2F, the same command is transmitted to the P base 2F again. Further, if no response is received within 200 ms, a second retransmission is performed in which the same command is transmitted to the P platform 2F. The same command is retransmitted up to 14 times on the P platform 2F. If a response is not received from the P platform 2F even after the 14th retransmission, the CU 3F determines that the communication is abnormal after 3 seconds and sets “communication cut off”. This communication abnormality may be caused when the connector of the CU 3F is disconnected from the connector of the P base 2F, or the connection wiring is disconnected or the power supply of the P base 2F is cut off. The CU3F does not increment the serial number when retransmitting the command.

<< Communication line disconnection detection on P side >>
Processing when communication disconnection is detected on the P platform 2F side will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P base 2F, and the P base 2F returns a response to the CU 3F in response to the command. Thereafter, when the state in which the command from the CU 3F is not transmitted to the P stand 2F continues for 3 seconds, the P stand 2F determines that the communication is cut off, stops the driving of the firing motor 18F, and stops the game. The cause of this communication disconnection may be the disconnection of the CU3F connector and the P-base 2F connector, disconnection of the connection wiring, or power supply disconnection of the CU3F.

  The command and response for detecting communication disconnection on the P platform 2F side include recovery request / recovery response, recovery request 2 / recovery response 2, communication start request / communication start response, notification end request / communication end response, and communication. Does not include test request / communication test response command and response.

<< Power-on >>
Next, connection sequence processing at power-on will be described. The sequence process shown in FIG. 36 is a process executed when communication is resumed after the communication between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F is normally completed. More specifically, it is executed when communication is resumed after the power of the CU3F is turned off while the card is not inserted. A typical example is a case where the power supply is turned off at the amusement hall after one day of business is finished, and the power supply is turned on at the start of business the next day.

  First, power is turned on. When the power is turned on, the P base 2F stops the firing motor 18F to stop the game, and then starts communication. Thereafter, an authentication sequence is started, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F. The CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 19 is started, and when a counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P base 2F, the counting history data stored in the P base 2F is transmitted to the CU 3F. . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the previous last transmission sequence number and the last last transmission count sequence number to the P unit 2F, and requests recovery information from the P unit 2F. The P base 2F refers to the previous last transmission count serial number notified from the CU 3F and executes the count recovery process. Specifically, the P base 2F refers to the last transmission count sequence number last time, and if the CU 3F has not performed the counting process, it is assumed that no counting request has been made, and if the CU 3F has already performed the counting process, Subtract the number of balls from the previous number of game balls to determine the game balls.

  After executing the count recovery process, the P table 2F returns the game information recovery data backed up inside the P table 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F) to the CU 3F as a response (recovery response). The recovery information includes a previous last transmission sequence number, a previously inserted card ID, a previous card insertion time, a previous last transmission addition sequence number, a previous game machine information, and the like.

  In the CU3F that has received the recovery response, if the previous last transmission addition serial number process included in the recovery information has not been executed, the CU3F additional recovery process is performed using the previous game machine information included in the recovery information. When performing the addition ball recovery process, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F and transmits recovery data to the P unit 2F. This recovery data includes the previous last transmission serial number and the number of additional balls.

  In response to this, the P base 2F executes an addition recovery process based on the received recovery data, and returns the result as a response to the CU 3F (recovery response 2). In addition, when the P stand 2F cannot receive the additional number of balls, a recovery process NG is returned as a recovery result.

  This recovery process is a process for recovering the consistency of each other's data between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F, and is executed not only when the power is turned on, but also when a trouble occurs and is recovered. Executed.

  The CU3F counts up the serial number each time a command such as a recovery request is transmitted. However, it does not count up when retransmitting a command. When the P unit 2F receives a command having the same serial number as the previously received serial number, it determines that a communication failure has occurred and the CU 3F has retransmitted the command. The CU 3F transmits a command, and backs up the sequence number when a response with the same sequence number is notified from the P unit 2F. When transmitting a response corresponding to the received command, the P base 2F notifies the CU 3F of the received serial number as it is. The P base 2F backs up the serial number when the response is transmitted.

  After the authentication sequence is completed, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request command to the P platform 2F with the serial number “1”. The P platform 2F returns the received serial number “1” as it is to the CU 3F as a response to the recovery response. Further, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request 2 command to the P unit 2F with a serial number “2”. The P platform 2F returns the response of the recovery response 2 to the CU 3F as it is with the received serial number “2”.

  Thereafter, the CU 3F counts up the serial number to “3”, and transmits a communication start request command to the P unit 2F. When the CU 3F does not transmit the recovery request 2, the serial number is “2” which is one countdown (−1). In response to this, the P unit 2F clears the recovery data. Then, the P platform 2F returns a response to the communication start response to the CU 3F with the received serial number “3”. Thereafter, a status information request command and a status information response response are transmitted and received between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F.

  The CU 3F counts up the serial number to “4” and transmits a status information request command to the P unit 2F. The status information request command includes information on the unit price of the balls. By transmitting the ball unit price to the P stand 2F, the P stand 2F can recognize whether the game ball is playing at 4 yen per ball or whether the game is played at 1 yen per ball. . Further, since the status information request command is transmitted in a cycle of 200 ms as described above, it is possible to transmit information of the ball unit price up to three times to the P platform 2F during a cycle of 600 ms that the game ball is fired. is there. Therefore, it is possible to change the unit price for each game ball played on the P platform 2F. If the unit price can be managed for each game ball in a small number (for example, one ball unit), the player's request (for example, a desire to play a game slowly with a small amount, or the remaining number of game balls in a short time) It is possible to provide a variety of games tailored to the demand for consumption. The command of the status information request transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F described below includes the ball unit price information, but is not specified when the information of the unit price is not directly related to the content of the sequence to be described. In response to this, the P table 2F updates the game table information, the game information, and the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the updated data every time a response of the status information response is transmitted. Then, the P platform 2F returns the response of the status information response to the CU 3F with the received serial number “4”. The response of the status information response does not include information on the unit price of the ball. This prevents illegally changing the information of the ball unit price currently being played on the P stand 2F and sending it to the CU 3F and illegally managing the ball unit price of the game ball managed by the CU 3F. . Thereby, the security of the game system can be improved.

  In response to this, the CU3F updates the previous last transmission sequence number, and backs up the updated data every time a response to the status information response is received.

  Thereafter, the CU3F counts up the serial number to “5” and transmits a status information request command to the P unit 2F, and the P unit 2F sends the response of the status information response to the CU3F with the received serial number “5”. Reply to

<< Card insertion >>
Processing of the CU 3F and the P stand 2F when a card is inserted will be described. The CU 3F shown in FIG. 37 transmits a command for a status information request including a serial number = n and a card return ready status = OFF to the P-unit 2F before card insertion. In response to this, the P unit 2F returns a response of the status information response including serial number = n and game prohibition to the CU 3F.

  Thereafter, in the CU3F, when a card is inserted, the card reader / writer outputs a command signal for taking the card into the card reader / writer, and the card reader / writer reads information (card ID, etc.) recorded in the taken-in card. A process at the time of card insertion, such as receiving the read information, is executed. Note that information (card ID or the like) recorded on the card read by the card reader / writer may be stored in the CU3F.

  The CU3F is in a card information inquiry state for a predetermined period after the card is inserted. This is in the midst of verifying whether the inserted card is appropriate, whether it is a membership card registered at the game hall, or inquiring the hall server 801F, for example, holding balls, storage balls, and the remaining amount of the card. This means that the process of displaying the fact on the display 312F and displaying on the display 54F on the P platform 2F side is being executed.

  Since the CU 3F does not authenticate the inserted card while displaying that the inserted card is being inquired on the display 312F, the status information request including the serial number = n + 1 and the card return ready state = OFF. Is sent to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P unit 2F returns a response of the status information response including serial number = n + 1 and game prohibition to the CU 3F. The display 54F on the P platform 2F side is controlled by the display control unit 350F of the CU 3F to display that the card is being inquired.

  After that, when the inserted card is authenticated, the CU 3F stores the card ID and the card insertion time of the card in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F, and the serial number = n + 2, the card ID, the card insertion time, and the store code. And a card insertion notification command including the SC board ID is transmitted to the P base 2F. The store code and the SC board ID are information added to the command when the card insertion notification command passes through the security board 325F. In response to this, the P unit 2F backs up the received card ID, card insertion time, store code, and SC board ID data to the RAM of the payout control unit 171F, and a response to the card insertion response including the serial number = n + 2 Is returned to CU3F. Also in CU3F, the card ID of the inserted card is stored in the RAM or the like of CU control unit 323F.

  In response to this, the CU 3F sends a status information request command including a serial number = n + 3 and a card return ready state = ON to the P unit 2F, thereby notifying the P unit 2F that the card is being inserted. . The P unit 2F receives the notification that the card is being inserted, permits the game, and returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 3 and the game permission to the CU3F. To notify.

  While the card is being inserted, the CU 3F sends a status information request command including a serial number = n + 4 and a card return ready state = ON to the P unit 2F. Is returned to CU3F.

  Further, a case where a card insertion notification command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F during card insertion will be described. First, the CU 3F transmits a card insertion notification command including a serial number = n + x, a card ID, a card insertion time, a store code, and an SC board ID to the P unit 2F. When a card insertion notification command is transmitted during card insertion, the transmitted card ID and card insertion time are often different from the card ID and card insertion time of the card being inserted, and are stored in the P base 2F. There is a high possibility that fraud that intentionally changes the current card ID or the card insertion time has been performed.

  In response to this, the P table 2F does not back up the received card ID, card insertion time, store code, and SC board ID data to the RAM of the payout control unit 171F. Whether or not the card is being inserted in the P stand 2F can be easily determined based on the card return preparation state = ON information included in the state information request command.

  Next, the P base 2F returns a response of the card insertion response including the serial number = n + x to the CU 3F without performing backup of the received card ID, card insertion time, and the like. Note that the CU3F does not store the card ID, the card insertion time, and the like transmitted by the card insertion notification command in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F. Thereby, the card ID is intentionally transmitted to the P base 2F during the card insertion, and the illegal action such as falsification of the card ID stored in the P base 2F can be prevented, and security is improved. Can do.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing processing at the time of insertion executed by the CU 3F when a card is inserted into the CU 3F. In the present embodiment, the steps indicated by broken lines indicate the control contents of the modification. The solid arrows indicate the flow of control, and the two-pointed arrows indicate the flow of information to be transmitted. In FIG. 38, each step of S1 to S7 is executed by CU3F. Further, S8 to S10 and S12 to S15 are executed by the P stand 2F. More specifically, the deletion process of S8 to S10, S12, S13, and S15 is executed by an effect control board provided on the P base 2F, and the transmission process of S14 and S15 is provided with an effect control unit. The effect control board transmits to the payout control unit 171F, and the payout control unit 171F transmits to the CU3F.

  First, in step (hereinafter simply referred to as S) 1, the CU determines whether or not it is interrupted. Whether or not the game is being interrupted is determined based on whether or not an interrupt operation has been performed and a game interruption sequence has been executed. If it is suspended, it is determined in S2 whether or not the C-ID and type of the inserted card matches the C-ID and type of the suspended card. If not, the process proceeds to S5. The inserted card is ejected and a transition is made to standby. In FIG. 38, the “type” is not shown.

  On the other hand, if the C-ID and type of the inserted card and the C-ID and type of the interrupted card match, the interrupted player returns to the gaming machine and starts the game. Therefore, the control advances to S4, the suspended state is canceled, and the process of restarting the game is executed in S6.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1 that it is not interrupted, it is determined in S3a whether or not a card is already inserted. Whether or not the card is being inserted is determined based on whether or not the card reader provided in the card insertion / discharge port 309F accepts the card. If it is determined in S3a that the card is not being inserted, the process of storing the C-ID and type of the inserted card and transmitting it to the P table 2F is performed in S3. In the P stand 2F, the C-ID and type are received, and the received C-ID and type and the C-ID and type stored in the backup area (for example, a backup data storage unit provided on the production control board). Are compared (S8). Then, in S9, it is determined whether or not the comparison results match. If they do not match, it is determined that a player different from the player who has left the seat has started playing, and the subroutine program for this insertion processing ends. .

  If it is determined in S3a that the card is being inserted, in order to prevent the C-ID and type different from the C-ID and type of the card being inserted from being overwritten and stored in the CU3F or P stand 2F, S3 Skip processing in.

  In this way, the player identification information storage means (current player game history data storage section) for storing the player identification information (C-ID) and the same determination means (S8, S9) for performing the same determination processing are used. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the same determination processing function on the communication means side (the payout control part 171F side), and the display control means is sufficient. A common communication means can be used between the gaming machine having the game machine and the game machine having no display control means.

  In addition, you may perform the process of S15 and S7 as control content of a modification. Through S15, the game history data, C-ID, and type stored in the backup area (backup data storage unit) are transmitted to CU3F and then deleted. The CU3F receives it and transmits the received data to the hall server (upper server) 801. The hall server 801F backs up the received game history data, C-ID, and type.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that they match in S9, the process proceeds to S12, in which the game history data in the backup area (backup data storage) is returned to the current area (for example, the backup data storage unit provided on the effect control board), and the game history is recorded. The addition update of the game history data is newly started from the data.

  In addition, you may perform the process of S10, S13, and S14 as a control content of a modification. If YES in S9, the control proceeds to S10, where it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has elapsed since the previous card was ejected. If it is determined that the game history data, the game history data, the C-ID, and the type in the backup area (backup data storage unit) are deleted in S13. Further, after S12, a notification that the players are the same is transmitted to the CU in S14. In addition, as a control content of a modification, you may control to perform all the processes of S10, S13, S14 and the processes of S15, S7.

  The conditions for overwriting (updating) the card ID and insertion time will be described in more detail. As described above, the card ID and the insertion time are prohibited from being updated during card insertion. As a prohibiting condition, the relationship between the card insertion notification command and the CU status included in the status information request command will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 39 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the relationship among a card insertion notification command, a CU state included in a state information request command, and a card insertion state.

  First, FIG. 39A shows an example in which the CU state included in the status information request command is in the card insertion state (Bit0 = “1”) before the P table 2F receives the card insertion notification command. ing. The state (1) shown in FIG. 39 (a) is a card insertion waiting state, and the card unit notifying command is not received by the P base 2F, and the CU state included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3F. Is when the card is not being inserted (Bit0 = "0"). In this case, since the CU 3F is not inserting the card, the P base 2F can overwrite the card ID and the insertion time.

  Next, a state (2) shown in FIG. 39A is a card insertion preparation state, and the card insertion notification command is not received by the P base 2F, but is included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3F. This is a case where the CU state to be inserted is card insertion (Bit0 = "1"). Also in this case, since the CU 3F is not inserting the card, the P base 2F can overwrite the card ID and the insertion time. The state (3) shown in FIG. 39 (a) is a card insertion state, and the P unit 2F receives a card insertion notification command, and the CU state included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3F is the card. This is the case during insertion (Bit 0 = “1”). In this case, the P base 2F is prohibited from overwriting the card ID and the insertion time because the CU 3F is inserting the card.

  Next, state (4) shown in FIG. 39 (a) is a card return preparation state, and the P table 2F has not received the card return notification command, but is included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3F. This is a case where the CU state to be displayed is not card insertion (Bit0 = "0"). In this case, overwriting of the card ID and the insertion time is prohibited in the P base 2F on the assumption that the CU 3F has not yet returned the card and the card is being inserted. The state (5) shown in FIG. 39 (a) is a card return state, and the card unit 2F receives the card return notification command, and the CU state included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3F is the card insertion. This is the case (Bit 0 = "0"). In this case, since the CU 3F is not inserting the card, the P base 2F can overwrite the card ID and the insertion time.

  FIG. 39B shows an example in which the CU state included in the status information request command becomes the card insertion state (Bit0 = “1”) after the P unit 2F receives the card insertion notification command. The state (1) ′ shown in FIG. 39B is a card insertion waiting state, and the card insertion notification command has not been received by the P base 2F, and the CU included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3F. This is a case where the card is not being inserted (Bit0 = "0"). In this case, since the CU 3F is not inserting the card, the P base 2F can overwrite the card ID and the insertion time.

  Next, a state (2) ′ shown in FIG. 39B is a card insertion preparation state, and the card unit 2F received the card insertion notification command, but is included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3F. This is a case where the CU state is not card insertion (Bit0 = "0"). Also in this case, since the CU 3F is not inserting the card, the P base 2F can overwrite the card ID and the insertion time. The state (3) ′ shown in FIG. 39B is a state in which a card is being inserted, and the CU state included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3F when the P base 2F receives the card insertion notification command. This is the case when the card is being inserted (Bit0 = "1"). In this case, the P base 2F is prohibited from overwriting the card ID and the insertion time because the CU 3F is inserting the card.

  Next, a state (4) ′ shown in FIG. 39B is a card return preparation state, and the P table 2F has not received the card return notification command, but the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3F This is a case where the included CU state is not card insertion (Bit0 = "0"). In this case, overwriting of the card ID and insertion time is prohibited for the P base 2F on the assumption that the card is being inserted because the CU 3F has not yet returned the card. The state (5) ′ shown in FIG. 39 (b) is a card return state. When the P table 2F receives a card return notification command, the CU state included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3F is the card. This is a case where no insertion is in progress (Bit0 = "0"). In this case, since the CU 3F is not inserting the card, the P base 2F can overwrite the card ID and the insertion time.

  In this way, by limiting the conditions for overwriting (updating) the card ID and insertion time, the card ID or the like is intentionally transmitted to the P base 2F, and the card ID stored in the P base 2F is falsified. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as doing and improve security.

<< Prepaid loan >>
Next, a process for lending a game ball from the prepaid balance of the inserted card will be described. In the sequence process shown in FIG. 40, the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted card is 500 yen, and the number of game balls is 50 balls. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a game ball addition request = OFF, and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU 3F. In this way, the addition sequence number is not updated while the addition request is not generated.

  Thereafter, when the player performs a lending operation (ball lending operation) in which the “lending” button is pressed once, the CU 3F lends the remaining amount of 500 yen, that is, 125 balls. When the ball lending button (lending button) 321F is pressed, the CU 3F confirms prepaid consumption for 500 yen and backs up the data of the number of added balls = 125. In this way, the remaining amount consumption is determined on the CU3F side alone at the stage where the lending operation is performed. Thereafter, the CU3F is being displayed for addition. During this addition display, the display unit 54F displays that 125 balls have been withdrawn from the remaining amount and are being added to the game balls.

  Next, the CU 3F makes a game ball addition request to the P stand 2F. Therefore, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F. The serial number is incremented to “n + 1” and the addition number of game balls is requested, so that the additional serial number is also incremented to “m + 1”. The CU 3F counts up the addition sequence number to “m + 1”, updates the previous last transmission addition sequence number to “m + 1”, and backs up the data. In response to this, the P stand 2F updates the number of game balls to the number of game balls = 50 (current number of game balls) +125 (number of additional balls) = 175, and updates the last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1”. Back up the data. Since the P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F of the number of game balls = 175 and the game ball addition result = OK, the serial number = n + 1, the number of addition balls = 175, the game ball addition result = OK, and the addition serial number = m + 1. The response of the status information response including it is returned to CU3F. Since it is a response to the game ball addition request, the addition serial number is not counted up and is set to “m + 1” as it is.

  Thereafter, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 2, a game ball addition request = OFF and an addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F, and the P unit 2F has a serial number = n + 5, the number of additional balls = 175, and A response of the status information response including the addition serial number = m + 1 is returned to the CU3F. When the game ball addition request is OFF, the status information request and the status information response count up the serial number, but do not count up the additional serial number.

≪Mochitama payout and savings ball payout (replay) ≫
Next, the process of paying out and holding out the stored balls will be described. In FIG. 44, the initial number of game balls is 50 balls. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a game ball addition request = OFF, and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU 3F. In this way, the addition sequence number is not updated while the addition request is not generated.

  After that, when the player presses the holding ball payout button or the replay button 319F in a state where there is a holding ball or a storage ball, the CU 3F determines the consumption of 125 balls from the holding ball or the storage ball. As described above, the consumption of the holding balls or the storage balls is determined on the CU3F side alone at the stage where the operation of pressing the holding ball payout button or the replay button 319F is performed. In addition, when both the holding ball and the storage ball exist, consumption of the holding ball is given priority.

  In place of the control to prioritize the holding ball, a storage ball replay button and a holding ball replay button are provided, and the player can select and operate either the storage ball consumption or the holding ball consumption by operating the selection. You may do it. In other words, the replay button is used to obtain a game ball (game point) from a stored ball (stored medal) and a game ball (game point) from a stored ball (stored medal) replay button. You may comprise two with a holding ball (pointing) replay button.

  CU3F notifies the addition request | requirement of the number of additional balls = 125 to the P stand 2F after confirming the consumption from a holding ball or a storage ball. Specifically, the CU 3F displays that a game ball addition process is in progress, and sends a status information request command including serial number = n + 1, game ball addition request = ON, number of additional balls = 125, and addition serial number = m + 1. Transmit to P platform 2F. In order to make a game ball addition request, the serial number is counted up to “n + 1”, and the additional serial number is also counted up to “m + 1”. Further, the CU 3F updates the previous last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1” and backs up the data. In response to this, the P stand 2F updates the number of game balls to the number of game balls = 50 (current number of game balls) +125 (number of additional balls) = 175, and updates the last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1”. Back up the data. Then, the P stand 2F returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of additional balls = 175, the game ball addition result = OK and the additional serial number = m + 1 to the CU 3F. Since this is a response to a game ball addition request, the addition serial number is not counted up and remains “m + 1”.

  Thereafter, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 2, a game ball addition request = OFF and an addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F, and the P unit 2F has a serial number = n + 2, an additional ball number = 175 and A response of the status information response including the addition serial number = m + 1 is returned to the CU3F.

<< Game Ball Count (Normal) >>
Next, the normal counting process of counting and subtracting a part of the game balls will be described. FIG. 42 shows a case where the counting button is pressed without detecting a card return operation. Therefore, all the bits in the card return ready state transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F are OFF (= 0). For this reason, description of the bits in the card return preparation state is omitted below.

  Also, in FIG. 42, the number of balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or visitor card) is “0” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “800” balls. Yes.

  Here, an example will be described in which counting in units of 100 points continues while the operation of the counting button is detected, and the counting operation ends when the operation of the counting button is no longer detected.

  First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a card return ready state = OFF, a counting serial number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 800, the counting serial number = m, the counting ball number = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU 3F.

  For the serial number n transmitted from the CU 3F, the serial number n + 1 is returned from the P stand 2F. In response to the counting sequence number m transmitted from the CU 3F, the same counting sequence number m is returned from the P stand 2F. This is because the counting sequence number is a special sequence number that is updated when a counting request is generated, and is updated when the counting is completed.

  Thereafter, the player presses the counting button 28F. In FIG. 42, immediately after an operation of pressing the count button 28F once, a command for status information request including a serial number = n + 1, a card return ready state = OFF, a count serial number = m, and a count response = OFF is sent from the CU3F. It is transmitted to the P platform 2F.

  When the operation of the count button 28F is detected, the P platform 2F transmits a status information response of serial number n + 1 in which the count request value is specifically set to 100 as a response to the command of the status information request to the CU 3F. However, at this stage, the P base 2F does not execute counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the state information response of the serial number n + 1, the number of game balls is still 800. Since this status information response is a message indicating a counting request, the counting sequence number is counted up to “m + 1”. At this time, the P unit 2F updates the previous last transmission count sequence number, and backs up the updated last transmission count sequence number and the count request state ON data.

  CU3F which received the status information response of serial number n + 1 adds the number of balls equivalent to the requested number of balls and updates the display of balls to 100. That is, the CU control unit 323F transmits a count display command to the display control unit 350F. In response to the instruction, the display control unit 350F controls the display 54F on the P platform 2F side. As a result, the display 54F displays an image in which the number of game balls is counted and the number thereof decreases, while the number of holding balls increases.

  In this case, it is conceivable to perform an effect display such that game balls are guided and counted by each counter one by one. Another example of the effect display may be a display in which the number of game balls is converted to the number of balls in time. For example, the data for the number of balls and the data for the number of balls are shown in a bar graph, and the number of balls in the game ball number is increased while the number of balls in the game ball is increased while the number of balls in the game ball is decreased. The display to move to the bar graph may be repeated. In addition, as another example of the effect display, the current game ball number data and the number of possession balls data are digitally displayed as they are, and the number of possession balls is increased while decreasing the number of game balls, or a part of the number of game balls It is possible to repeat the display for moving the number of balls to the number of balls, and various display effects.

  Further, the CU 3F updates the previous last transmission count sequence number to “m + 1” and backs up the data. Subsequently, the CU 3F transmits a status information request with a serial number n + 2, a count serial number m + 1, and a count response = ON to the P platform 2F to notify that the requested count has been completed.

  Receiving this status information request, the P platform 2F finally subtracts the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of balls counted = 100, and updates the display of the game ball number display 29F from 800 to 700. At this stage, although the count request state of the P base 2F is OFF, since the count button is continuously pressed, the P base 2F transmits a second count request to the CU 3F. That is, a status information response of serial number n + 2 in which the count request value is specifically set to 100 is transmitted to CU3F. However, even at this stage, the P base 2F does not execute counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the status information response of the serial number n + 2, the number of game balls = 700. Since this status information response is a message transmitted as a new count request, the count sequence number is incremented to “m + 2”, the previous last transmission count sequence number is updated, and the updated last transmission count sequence number is updated. Back up data with counting request status ON.

  CU3F which received the status information response of serial number n + 2 adds the ball | bowl equivalent to the number of count balls requested | required, and updates the display of a ball | bowl to 200. Further, the CU 3F updates the previous last transmission count sequence number to “m + 2” and backs up the data. Subsequently, the CU 3F transmits a status information request with a serial number n + 3, a count serial number m + 2, and a count response = ON to the P platform 2F to notify that the requested count has been completed.

  The P table 2F that has received this status information request subtracts the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of counting balls = 100, and updates the display of the game ball number display 29F from 700 to 600. However, at this stage, the player's hand is separated from the counting button, and the counting operation is completed. For this reason, the P base 2F notifies the CU 3F of the completion of counting with a status information response of serial number n + 3. That is, with the current number of game balls = 600, a status information response of count request = OFF and count ball count = 0 is transmitted to the CU 3F. In addition, since all the counting operations corresponding to the counting request have been completed, the counting sequence number included in this status information response remains m + 2 and is not updated.

  CU3F which received this status information response determines with completion of counting. Although not shown, the CU 3F transmits a status information response of serial number n + 4, counting serial number m + 2, card return preparation state = OFF, and counting response = OFF to the P base 2F.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the information state response for notifying the number of balls to be counted is transmitted from the P cars to the CU, the game balls for the counting balls are subtracted quickly on the P cards side. In the stage where the information status response for notifying the number of balls is transmitted and the receipt confirmation is received from the CU, the P machines subtract the game balls.

<< Counting history processing >>
Next, processing of count history data stored in the P platform 2F will be described. FIG. 43 is a sequence diagram for explaining processing of count history data stored in the P base 2F. In FIG. 43, the initial number of game balls is 600 balls. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n (not shown), a count serial number = m, and a count response = OFF to the P unit 2F. In the P platform 2F, the player operates the counting button 28F from the response of the status information response transmitted before receiving the status information request command until the response to the status information request command is transmitted. The counting process is started.

  Then, in the P stand 2F, the response of the status information response including the serial number = n (not shown), the number of game balls = 600, the counting serial number = m + 1, the counting ball number = 100 and the counting request = ON is returned to the CU 3F. Here, in the P platform 2F, the counting request is changed from the OFF state to the ON state, so the counting history processing is started. Specifically, the P stand 2F uses the history of the number of game balls paid out to the CU 3F side as the count request ball number from the P stand 2F side between the count request ON state and the count request OFF state as a count history for one time. Remember. That is, when there are a plurality of count requests, the history from the count request ON state to the count request OFF state is stored as the first count request as the first count request. Thereafter, as the second count request, the history from the count request ON state to the count request OFF state is stored as the second count history. Although depending on the period during which the count button 28F is pressed, a response to a status information response including a plurality of count request ON states is received between the count request ON state and the count request OFF state. It is returned to CU3F. The count history to be stored includes the “card ID” at the time of the count request, the “count reception time” included in the status information response of the count response ON state from the CU3F, and the number of balls that have been paid out until the count request is OFF. The information includes the cumulative number “cumulative counting ball number” and “game ball number” at the end of counting.

  Next, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 1 (not shown), a count serial number = m + 1, and a count response = ON to the P-unit 2F to notify that the requested count has been completed. . At this stage, the number of balls counted = 100 is provisionally confirmed.

  Receiving this status information request, the P stand 2F subtracts the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of counted balls = 100, and the number of game balls is collated, and if it is 500 balls, the temporarily fixed 100 balls are confirmed. . Then, the display on the game ball number display 29F is updated from 600 to 500. Further, when the player continues to operate the counting button 28F, the P stand 2F has a serial number = n + 1 (not shown), the number of game balls = 500, the counting serial number = m + 2, the counting ball number = 100, and the counting request. A response of a status information response including = ON is returned to the CU3F. Next, the CU 3F sends a status information request command including a serial number = n + 2 (not shown), a count serial number = m + 2 and a count response = ON to the P unit 2F to notify that the requested count has been completed. . At this stage, the number of balls counted = 100 is provisionally confirmed.

  Receiving this status information request, the P stand 2F subtracts the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of counting balls = 100, and the number of game balls is collated, and if it is 400 balls, the temporarily fixed 100 balls are fixed. . Then, the display on the game ball number display 29F is updated from 600 to 500. After that, when the operation of the counting button 28F by the player is finished, the P stand 2F has a serial number = n + 2 (not shown), the number of game balls = 400, the counting serial number = m + 3, the number of counting balls = 100 and the counting request = Response of status information response including OFF is returned to CU3F. When the P stand 2F is changed to the counting request OFF state, the counting history stores 100 balls + 100 balls = 200 balls as the counting history 1 as the “cumulative counting ball number”. Further, the P stand 2F stores the number of game balls when changed to the count request OFF state in the counting history 1 as the “number of game balls” at the end of counting. Further, the P base 2F stores the “count reception time” included in the state information response of the count response ON state from the CU 3F in the count history 1. When a new history is stored in the counting history 1, if the counting history 1 already exists, the counting history 1 is stored as the counting history 2 and then the new history is stored in the counting history 1. . In addition, since the history for the past two times is stored in the P platform 2F, it is stored as the counting history 1 and the counting history 2, but even if the history for the past one time or the history for the past three times or more is stored. Good.

  As described above, it is possible to recover the number of game balls counted by storing the counting history, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the recovery processing by storing a plurality of past pieces.

<< Game Ball Count (Card Return) >>
Next, the game ball counting process when returning the card will be described. FIG. 44 is a sequence diagram for explaining a counting process when the player performs a card return operation. In FIG. 44, the number of card possessions specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is 0, and the initial number of game balls is 800. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a CU opening state = ON, a card return preparation state = OFF, a counting sequence number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 800, the counting serial number = m, the counting ball number = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU 3F.

  Thereafter, when the player stops the game or moves to another game table, the player presses the “card return” button. However, when the player presses the “return card” button, the number of game balls in the P stand 2F is 800 balls, and the CU 3F determines that the number of game balls in the P stand 2F is not zero. Further, since the player presses the “card return” button, the CU3F sets the card return ready state = ON, and the state information request including the serial number = n + 1, the CU opening state = ON, the counting sequence number = m, and the counting response = OFF. A command is transmitted to P unit 2F. Note that the CU 3F notifies the P stand 2F of the card return preparation state = ON notification for 10 seconds. Furthermore, since the number of game balls in the P stand 2F is 800 balls and not 0 balls, the CU 3F displays a display for prompting a counting operation on the display 54F or the like as a card return standby.

  In response to the display prompting the counting operation, the player presses the counting button 28F to perform an operation of converting the game ball into a holding ball. The P stand 2F determines that the counting operation for pressing the counting button 28F is a counting operation with the card return ready state = ON, and processes the counting in a lump instead of counting in units of 100 balls, for example.

  In order to notify the CU3F of a counting acceptance number of 800 balls, and a counting acceptance number request for 800 gaming balls, the P stand 2F has a serial number = n + 1, a gaming ball number = 800, a counting serial number = The response of the status information response including m + 1, the number of counting balls = 800 and the counting request = ON is returned to the CU3F. However, at this stage, the P base 2F does not execute counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the state information response of the serial number n + 1, the number of game balls is still 800. Further, since this status information response is a count request message, the P unit 2F counts up the count sequence number to “m + 1”, updates the previous last transmission count sequence number, and updates the previous last transmission count sequence number. Back up data with counting request status ON.

  In response to this, the CU3F adds the counted number of 800 balls to the number of held balls, and subtracts the counted number of 800 balls from the gaming ball number of 800 balls to 0 balls. Further, the CU3F backs up the updated data of the last transmission count sequence number last time. Then, in order to notify receipt of the counting ball, the CU 3F sends a command of status information request including serial number = n + 2, CU opening state = ON, card return preparation state = ON, counting serial number = m + 1 and counting response = ON. Send to.

  In response to the response from the CU 3F, the P stand 2F subtracts the counting ball number 800 from the gaming ball number 800 and displays the gaming ball number 0 on the display 54F or the like. Further, the P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F that the number of game balls is 0 and counting is completed, so that the sequence number = n + 2, the number of game balls = 0, the count sequence number = m + 1, the count ball number = 0, and the count request = OFF. A response of the status information response including is returned to the CU3F. Since the counting request is turned OFF, the counting sequence number remains m + 1 and is transmitted to the CU 3F without counting up.

  The CU3F counts the number of game balls by pressing the count button 28F and counting the number of game balls in a lump before 10 seconds have elapsed since the player pressed the card return button 322F, that is, in the card return preparation state. Card is returned to 0, so card return processing is executed. That is, the CU 3F transmits a card return notification command including the serial number = n + 3 to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of a card return response including the serial number = n + 3, the card ID held on the payout control board 17F, and the card insertion time to the CU 3F. After returning the card ID and the card insertion time to the CU 3F, the card ID and the card insertion time data held in the payout control board 17F are cleared.

  In response to this, the CU 3F performs a match determination between the card ID stored in the inserted card and the card ID received from the P stand 2F, and if it matches, returns the inserted card. If they do not match, error processing is performed and reported to the hall server 801F or the like. When the card IDs match, the CU 3F stores the number of balls 800 in the card (inserted card) that has been inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309F and returns the card to the player. In addition, when the player starts the game by depositing without inserting the card into the card insertion / discharge slot 309F, the card (stock card) stocked in the card stock section provided in the CU3F Store the number of balls 800 and return the card to the player. When the inserted card or stock card is returned, the CU3F transmits the card ID of the card and the data of the number of balls to the hall server 801F, and the hall server 801F associates the card ID of the card with the data of the number of balls. May be stored.

  Thereafter, since the card returned from the CU 3F can be removed from the card insertion / discharge port 309F, a part of the card is held in a state of protruding from the card insertion / discharge port 309F (card removal possible state). The CU 3F has a sensor that can determine whether or not the card can be removed in the vicinity of the card insertion / ejecting port 309F. If the sensor signal is in the ON state, the CU 3F is determined to be in the card removal possible state. If it is in the OFF state, it is determined that the card removal is complete.

  When the card return process is executed and the card can be removed, the CU 3F notifies the P stand 2F of information indicating that the card return ready state is OFF and the card is waiting to be removed. Therefore, the CU 3F sends a status information request command including the serial number = n + 4, the CU opening state = ON, the card return ready state = OFF, waiting for card removal = ON, the counting serial number = m + 1, and the counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. Send. In response to this, the P stand 2F displays “Please remove the card” on the variable display device 278F to the player in order to prevent forgetting to remove the card. Moreover, in order to notify the card removal, the P base 2F may turn on the LED or output a voice message “Please remove the card” with a speaker. Further, the P stand 2F transmits a status information response command including a serial number = n + 4, a game ball number = 0, a count serial number = m + 1, a count ball number = 0, and a count response = OFF to the CU 3F. The CU3F not only notifies the P stand 2F that the card can be removed, but also a hall computer that is a device connected to the CU 3F or the P stand 2F, a call lamp mounted on the P stand 2F. The device may be notified that the card can be removed. Thereby, it is possible to further prevent the user from forgetting to remove the card (removal of the recording medium) by notifying other than the CU 3F and the P stand 2F that the card can be removed.

  If the sensor attached in the vicinity of the card insertion / discharge port 309F is in an ON state, the CU 3F transmits a command for requesting a state information including “Waiting for card removal = ON” to the P base 2F. However, when the player removes the card from the card insertion / discharge port 309F, the sensor attached in the vicinity of the card insertion / discharge port 309F is turned off, so that the CU3F is waiting for the serial number = n + 5 and the card removal = OFF A command for requesting the status information including is transmitted to the P base 2F.

  In response to this, the P base 2F stops displaying “please remove the card” displayed on the variable display device 278F, and terminates the card removal notification. The notification of card removal is continued until a status information request command including ON card waiting = ON is received until a status information request command including OFF card waiting = OFF is received. Further, the P platform 2F transmits a status information response command including a serial number = n + 5 to the CU 3F.

  Note that the game ball counting process sequence when returning the card described with reference to FIG. 44 is not limited to when the card is returned, and the same process can be applied during simple leaving and meal breaks. Here, the simple leaving means that the game is interrupted for a short time of about 5 to 10 minutes in order to allow the player to make a small use. A meal break is a meal or break that is interrupted by a game such as 30 minutes longer than a simple leave.

<< Abnormal sequence >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a description will be given of the recovery processing of the number of game balls when the status information request is not reached due to power-off / communication line disconnection. In particular, FIG. 45 shows that there is a power interruption / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power supply of the P base 2F is once turned OFF and then turned ON again), and the status information request has not reached (from CU3F to the P base 2F). FIG. 11 is a sequence diagram for explaining a counting process in a case where a command has not arrived) and communication partners after recovery match.

  Referring to FIG. 45, before the power interruption occurs during the game, CU 3F transmits a status information request including serial number = n to P unit 2F. In response to this, the P table 2F sends a status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3 and the number of subtracted balls = 23 to the CU 3F in order to notify the CU 3F of the game table information. To do. The P table 2F updates the previous last transmission serial number as the previous game table information to “n”.

  CU3F receives the status information response of serial number = n, updates the previous last transmission serial number to “n”, and backs up. Further, based on the information of the number of game balls = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23, the number of game balls, the number of added balls, and the number of subtracted balls stored therein are updated.

  Then, after a power interruption occurs in the P stand 2F during the game, when a status information request including a serial number = n + 1 is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F, the P stand 2F is in a power cut off state. Status information request cannot be received. After that, since the status information response from the P stand 2F is not transmitted, the CU 3F performs control to detect and stop the communication line disconnection after 3 seconds. From the time when the P table 2F transmits a response of the status information response to the CU 3F until the power is cut off, the game is continued in the P table 2F and the game table information is changed, the number of game balls = 450, the number of additional balls = 6. Number of balls to be subtracted = 36, which is the latest game table information. On the other hand, the game table information of the number of game balls already transmitted = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtraction balls = 23 is the previous game table information.

  Thereafter, the power failure of the P base 2F is restored, and the P base 2F starts to operate. When the P base 2F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P base 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The The CU3F transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server (the key management server 800F via the hall server 801F), and whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered. Ask them to check whether they have returned the results. If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 46 is started. When a counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F, the counting history data stored in the P unit 2F is transmitted to the CU 3F. . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1 and the previous last transmission serial number = n to the P unit 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P stand 2F first receives the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F, and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P stand 2F. Are matched, and if they match, the following processing is performed. In the P unit 2F, whether or not the previous last transmission sequence number = n of the received recovery request matches the previous last transmission sequence number = n backed up inside the P unit 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F). Determine whether. If they match, it can be determined that the status information response last transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F before the communication disconnection has reached the CU 3F. In this case, the status information response is included in the status information response. The game information is updated on the CU3F side based on the game information to be played. Therefore, in this case, the P stand 2F returns a recovery response (serial number = 1, ball unit price) to the CU 3F as no game information storage (specifically, no previous game stand information). If the previous last transmission sequence number = n of the received recovery request does not match the previous last transmission sequence number = n backed up inside the P unit 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F), the communication is interrupted. Since it can be determined that the status information response last transmitted from the P-unit 2F to the CU3F before the CU3F has not reached the CU3F, in such a case, the game information is stored (specifically, the previous game table information A recovery response (sequence number = 1, ball unit price) including game information is returned to the CU3F. The P stand 2F transmits the response of the recovery response including the ball unit price when transmitting the response to the CU 3F, and transmits the ball unit price of the game ball played before the recovery process to the CU 3F. As a result, the game can be played after the recovery process at the unit price of the game balls played before the recovery process. The ball unit price information is also included in the response of the recovery response transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F, which will be described later.

  In FIG. 45, CU3F does not store the game information included in the recovery response, and therefore does not perform the addition recovery process. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the recovery response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2F as the recovery response is an appropriate value. The first check process is executed. Since no game information is stored, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request including serial number = 2 to the P unit 2F without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F. When the CU 3F transmits a communication start request command to the P platform 2F, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2F receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3F. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P base 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P base 2F is started, the CU 3F transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P base 2F. Upon receiving this, the P table 2F notifies the CU 3F of unreported game table information (the number of game balls as the latest game table information = 450, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36) as a status information response. Update the last transmission serial number and back up the data. Specifically, the status information response includes transmission sequence number = 3, number of game balls = 450, number of added balls = 6, and number of subtracted balls = 36. CU3F receives a status information response including unreported gaming machine information, updates the last transmission number last time, and backs up the data. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Execute the process.

<< Counting history sequence >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, processing for reading the count history stored in the P platform 2F to the CU 3F will be described. FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing for reading the count history stored in the P platform 2F to the CU 3F. First, the CU 3F transmits a count history request command including a serial number = n, a store code, and an SC board ID to the P platform 2F. The P stand 2F compares the store code transmitted from the CU 3F with the card insertion notification command and stored with the store code transmitted from the CU 3F with the count history request command. When the store code matches with the comparison result, the P table 2F sets the stored count history 1 and count history 2 data to the response of the count history response so that it can be transmitted to the CU 3F. Then, the P platform 2F returns a response to the counting history response including the serial number = n, the counting history 1 and the counting history 2 to the CU 3F.

  On the other hand, if the store code does not match as a result of the comparison, the P platform 2F sets data as no counting history in the response of the counting history response transmitted to the CU3F. Although not shown, the P base 2F returns a response of a counting history response including a serial number = n and no counting history to the CU 3F.

  Thus, the counting history sequence can recover the number of game balls counted by transmitting the counting history stored in the P platform 2F to the CU 3F, and can further recover a plurality of past (counting history 1 and counting history). By transmitting 2) to CU3F, the accuracy of the recovery process can be improved. Note that the plurality of count histories transmitted to the CU3F is not limited to two times, and may be three or more count histories.

<Management of gaming machines>
Next, a system for managing the history of gaming machines from shipment to disposal will be described. FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining the flow of history information (machine history information) from shipment to disposal of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the target of the gaming machine that manages the history is not limited to the above-described enclosed circulation type gaming machine (P 2F), and includes a conventional CR gaming machine. Of course, the target gaming machine includes not only pachinko gaming machines but also S machines (slot machines) 2SF corresponding to P machines 2F described later, conventional pachislot machines, and the like.

  Referring to FIG. 47, when a gaming machine is shipped from a gaming machine manufacturer to Hall A, the gaming machine manufacturer's server (not shown) sends shipping information regarding the shipped gaming machine to a communication line. The information is input to the machine history management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF registers the input shipping information in the storage area of the server.

  FIG. 48 is a diagram showing details of a flow until shipping information is registered in the history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment.

  Referring to FIG. 48, when ordering a gaming machine from a gaming machine maker, Hall A sends a sales contract to the gaming machine maker. When the gaming machine manufacturer receives the sales contract sent from Hall A, it confirms the order of the gaming machine according to the sales contract. When the gaming machine manufacturer confirms the order, it sends a copy of the warranty card and the certification notice to Hall A and starts production of the gaming machine. The gaming machine manufacturer ships the produced gaming machine to Hall A from the gaming machine manufacturer (delivered to Hall A). In addition, after a gaming machine to be shipped to Hall A is delivered to a carrier, the gaming machine manufacturer's server inputs shipping information regarding the gaming machine to the machine history management center 800AF via a communication line. When the history management center 800AF receives the input of the shipping information, it registers it in the storage area of the server.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example of specific contents of the shipping information. Specifically, FIG. 49A is a diagram showing items registered as shipping information. FIG. 49B is a diagram showing registration classifications included in the registration type.

  Referring to FIG. 49A, the shipping information includes registration type, game board production number, main board management number, main control chip ID number (main chip ID), main control product code, and gaming machine. It includes a frame manufacturing number, a payout board management number, a payout control chip ID number (payout chip ID), a payout control product code, a shipping date, a company code, a hall code, and a cancellation flag.

  The registration type indicates whether the gaming machine to be shipped is a conventional CR gaming machine, an enclosed circulating gaming machine (P stand 2F), a gaming board with a replaced part, or a gaming machine frame. This is information to specify. Specifically, in FIG. 49B, when the registration type number is “11” to “14”, the gaming machine to be shipped is a CR gaming machine, and when “21” to “25”. Indicates that the gaming machine to be shipped is P 2F. Furthermore, the registration type numbers “11” to “14” indicate that the game board, the gaming machine frame, the gaming board + the gaming machine frame, and the gaming board (parts replacement) are replaced. Also, the registration type numbers “21” to “25” indicate that they are replaced gaming boards, gaming machine frames, gaming boards + gaming machine frames, gaming board parts, gaming machine frame parts, respectively. When replacing the board of the game board or the board of the gaming machine frame, the board management number after replacement is set and registered when the base is replaced. In addition, replacement of parts in which the production numbers of the game board and the gaming machine frame are changed is registered as new shipment. Note that the name of the gaming machine manufacturer and the model name of the gaming machine are specified by the registration type.

The game board production number and main board management number are information according to a two-dimensional code.
The main control chip ID number is information read by an ID reader, and is set only in the case of the P unit 2F (setting is not necessary in the conventional CR gaming machine). The main control product code is the product code of the main control chip (setting is not necessary in the conventional CR gaming machine).

  The gaming machine frame manufacturing number and the payout board management number are information according to a two-dimensional code. Note that the payout board management number does not need to be set in a conventional CR gaming machine.

  The payout control chip ID number is information read by an ID reader, and is set only in the case of the P unit 2F (setting is not necessary in the CR gaming machine). The payout control product code is a product code written in the payout control chip (setting is not necessary in the CR gaming machine).

  The shipment date is the date when the gaming machine is shipped, and is the date when shipment is confirmed. The business operator code is information for specifying the name of the carrier. The hole code is information for identifying the hall name of the delivery destination. The cancellation flag is set to “0” when shipping information is registered, and “1” when canceling registered shipping information. When the gaming machine manufacturer has registered incorrect shipping information in the machine history management center 800AF, the gaming machine manufacturer sets a cancellation flag for the incorrect shipping information to “1” and registers it again in the machine history management center 800AF.

  When the history management center 800AF receives the shipping information with the cancellation flag set to “1”, the history management center 800AF cancels the registration of the shipping information with the same content as the received shipping information and the cancellation flag set to “0”. That is, the shipping information having the same content as the shipping information including the cancellation flag set to “1” is deleted from the storage area of the history management center 800AF. Therefore, the history management center 800AF can easily cancel the shipping information by setting the cancellation flag to “1” (ON state).

  Further, the machine history management center 800AF can accept the shipment information including the cancellation flag set to “1” until a predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, after the predetermined condition is satisfied, the shipping information having the same contents as the shipping information including the cancellation flag set to “1” cannot be registered in the history management center 800AF.

  Here, examples of the predetermined condition include time and period. Therefore, the machine history management center 800AF can be set to accept the shipping information including the cancellation flag set to “1” until 8:00 pm on the day when the shipping information to be canceled is registered. Therefore, the history management center 800AF can easily cancel the shipping information by setting the cancellation flag to “1” (ON state), and after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, after 8:00 pm on the registration date) ) Can be prevented from tampering with shipping information.

  If the gaming machine is an enclosed circulating gaming machine (P 2F), the main control chip ID number or the payout control chip ID number serves as identification information for identifying the individual gaming machine, and the gaming machine has a conventional CR In the case of a gaming machine, at least one number of a gaming board manufacturing number, a main board management number, a gaming machine frame manufacturing number, and a payout board management number is identification information for identifying an individual gaming machine.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 49 (a), the shipping information is made the same format regardless of whether the gaming machine is an enclosed circulating gaming machine (P 2F) or a conventional CR gaming machine. In the management center 800AF, the history of the enclosed circulation type gaming machine (P stand 2F) and the conventional CR gaming machine can be managed in a unified manner.

  Referring to FIG. 47 again, when a gaming machine is delivered to hall A from a gaming machine manufacturer and the gaming machine is installed in hall A, the server (not shown) in hall A is connected via a communication line. Installation information regarding the installed gaming machine is input to the machine history management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF associates the input installation information with the shipping information registered at the time of shipping and registers them in the storage area of the server.

  FIG. 50 is a diagram showing details of a flow until installation information is registered in the machine history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 50A is a diagram showing the flow when the hall computer (not shown) installed in the hall A and the history management center 800AF are not configured to be communicable. . In FIG. 50 (a), the conventional CR gaming machine is mainly used, and the conventional CR gaming machine is installed in the hall A where the hall computer and the machine history management center 800AF are not connected by a communication line. The case is assumed.

  FIG. 50B is a diagram showing the flow when the hall computer and the history management center 800AF are configured to be communicable. In FIG. 50 (b), the case is mainly the case of an enclosed circulating game machine (P stand 2F), and the P stand 2F is installed in the hall A where the hall computer and the machine history management center 800AF are connected by a communication line. Is assumed.

  Referring to FIG. 50 (a), when a gaming machine is delivered from hall A to Hall A, a copy of the gaming machine delivery form is sent from Hall A to the gaming machine manufacturer. When the gaming machine manufacturer receives a copy of the gaming machine delivery form, the gaming machine installation information is input from the gaming machine manufacturer to the machine history management center 800AF via the communication line, and the input installation information is stored in the storage area of the server. be registered. When installation information is registered in the machine history management center 800AF, the registration result is output via a communication line or as a document. In Hall A, when a jurisdiction implementation inspection is conducted and a change approval notification is made, the delivered gaming machine is installed at a predetermined location in Hall A.

  Referring to FIG. 50B, when a gaming machine is delivered from hall A to Hall A, a copy of the gaming machine delivery form is sent from Hall A to the gaming machine manufacturer. Thereafter, in Hall A, a jurisdiction implementation inspection is performed, and when a change approval notification is made, the delivered gaming machine is installed at a predetermined location in Hall A. Since the hall computer and the history management center 800AF are configured to be connectable via a communication line, when the gaming machine installed in the hall A is turned on, the history is automatically transferred from the hall computer. Installation information is transmitted to the management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF associates the received installation information with the shipping information registered at the time of shipping and registers them in the storage area.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the installation information input to the history management center 800AF in FIG. Referring to FIG. 51, the installation information includes a registration type, a game board production number, a main board management number, a gaming machine frame production number, an installation date, a hall code, and a cancellation flag. Since the registration type, game board production number, main board management number, gaming machine frame production number, hole code, and cancellation flag are the same as those described in FIG. 49, detailed description thereof will not be repeated. .

  As described above, in the case of FIG. 50 (a), since it is assumed that a conventional CR gaming machine is mainly installed in Hall A, the registration type numbers are “11” to “14”. Become. The installation date is, for example, the planned opening date of the warranty card.

  From the above, in the case of FIG. 50 (a), the machine history management center 800AF has the gaming machine manufacturer name, model name, gaming board production number, main board management number, as installation information input from the gaming machine manufacturer. A game frame serial number, installation date, and installation hall name are registered.

  In the case of FIG. 50 (b), the machine history management center 800AF has, as installation information automatically transmitted from the hall computer, a gaming machine manufacturer name, model name, installation date, installation destination hall name, The main control chip ID and the payout control ID are registered. The history management center 800AF may receive the above-mentioned part of information as installation information, and register information that is common with the shipping information with reference to the shipping information.

  Referring again to FIG. 47, when the gaming machine installed in hall A is removed, the removal information from hall A is written in a document or the like, and the document is sent to history management center 800AF. Based on the removal information sent to the machine history management center 800AF, the removal information is registered in the storage area of the server by inputting necessary information from the input means (terminal not shown) of the machine history management center 800AF. If the document is not sent to the machine history management center 800AF, it is determined that the gaming machine has been removed from the hall A when second-hand movement information or disposal information described later is registered in the machine history management center 800AF. The removal information may be registered.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a flow until removal information is registered in the history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 52A is a diagram showing the flow when the hall computer installed in the hall A and the history management center 800AF are not configured to be communicable. In FIG. 52A, it is assumed that a conventional CR gaming machine is mainly installed in Hall A where the hall computer and the machine history management center 800AF are not connected by a communication line.

  FIG. 52B is a diagram showing the flow when the hall computer and the history management center 800AF are configured to be communicable. In FIG. 52 (b), it is assumed that the P unit 2F is mainly installed in the hall A where the hall computer and the history management center 800AF are connected by a communication line.

  Referring to FIG. 52 (a), when the gaming machine installed in Hall A is removed, the gaming machine is removed based on the issued change approval application. When the gaming machine is removed, a document including removal information is sent from the hall A to the machine history management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF registers the removal information in the storage area based on the sent document.

  Referring to FIG. 52B, since the hall computer and the history management center 800AF are configured to be able to communicate with each other, the history management center 800AF is based on the installation information registered in the storage area. If a certain period of time (for example, one month) has passed and no communication with the gaming machine that should have been installed in Hall A, it is determined that the gaming machine has not been operated and has been removed. Then, the removal information is registered in the storage area. As in FIG. 52A, the history management center 800AF may register the removal information in the storage area based on the document sent from the hall A.

  When a conventional CR gaming machine is to be removed, the machine history management center 800AF has a gaming machine manufacturer name, a game board production number, a main board management number, a game frame production number, a removal date, and removal as removal information. The hall name is registered. In addition, when the P stand 2F is removed, in the machine history management center 800AF, a removal control board management number is further registered as removal information in addition to each information registered in the case of a conventional CR gaming machine. Is done.

  Referring to FIG. 47 again, when the gaming machine removed from hall A is received in the seller's warehouse and the received gaming machine is delivered to another hall B, the seller will enter the application documents. The used movement information is entered and sent to the machine history management center 800AF. The machine history management center 800AF registers second-hand movement information in the server from the input means of the machine history management center 800AF based on the sent application documents. When the history management center 800AF and the management computer owned by the dealer are configured to be communicable, the management computer inputs the used movement information to the history management center 800AF via the communication line. Also good.

  When a gaming machine delivered from a dealer is delivered to another hall B and the gaming machine is installed in another hall B, the installation is performed in the other hall B as shown in FIG. Information is registered in the server of the machine history management center 800AF. Also, when the gaming machine installed in Hall B is removed, the removal information is registered in the machine history management center 800AF according to the flow described with reference to FIG.

  Next, when the gaming machine removed from Hall A is collected by the processing company and the collected gaming machine is discarded, the disposal information is entered in the application document from the processing company, and the document is recorded. It is sent to the management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF registers the discard information in the storage area by inputting necessary information from the input means in the own device. When the history management center 800AF and the management computer of the processing company are configured to be communicable, the management computer can input the discard information to the history management center 800AF via the communication line. Good.

  Further, when the gaming machine traded in from the hall A by the gaming machine maker is discarded, the hall computer inputs the discard information regarding the gaming machine to be discarded via the communication line to the history management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF registers the input discard information in the storage area of the server.

  FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a flow until discard information is registered in the machine history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment.

  Referring to FIG. 53, when a gaming machine maker accepts acceptance of trade-in of a gaming machine in hall A, the gaming machine is delivered from hall A to the gaming machine maker. When a gaming machine maker collects and stores the gaming machine and then discards it, it requests the disposal company (disposal company) to dispose of it. When the gaming machine manufacturer receives a notification from the processing company that the disposal of the gaming machine has been completed (processing details, etc.), the gaming machine manufacturer's server sends the disposal information about the gaming machine via the communication line. Input to the management center 800AF. When the history management center 800AF receives the input of the discard information, it registers it in the storage area of the server.

  FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the discard information input to the machine history management center 800AF.

  Referring to FIG. 54, the discard information includes registration type, discard date, game board manufacturer code, game board production number, main board management number, gaming machine frame manufacturer code, and gaming machine. It includes a frame manufacturing number, a payout board management number, a company code, and a cancellation flag. Since the registration type, game board production number, main board management number, gaming machine frame production number, and cancellation flag are the same as those described with reference to FIG. 49, detailed description thereof will not be repeated.

  The discard date is the date when the gaming machine is discarded. The game board manufacturer code is information for identifying the gaming machine manufacturer that manufactured the game board. The gaming machine frame manufacturer code is information for identifying the gaming machine manufacturer that manufactured the gaming machine frame. The business operator code is information for identifying the business operator that has performed the disposal process. Typically, it is the operator code of the processing company (disposal company), but when it is discarded by the gaming machine manufacturer, it becomes the operator code of the gaming machine manufacturer.

  When a conventional CR gaming machine is discarded, the machine history management center 800AF has a gaming machine manufacturer name, a gaming board production number, a main board management number, a gaming frame production number, a disposal date, and processing as disposal information. The trader name is registered. In addition, when the P unit 2F is discarded, in the machine history management center 800AF, in addition to each information registered in the case of a conventional CR gaming machine, a payout control board management number is further registered as discard information. Is done.

<Management of front frame and game board>
In the machine history management center described above, the configuration for managing the history of the gaming machine (P machine 2F) has been described. However, since the P machine 2F is formed by combining the front frame 5F and the game board 26F, the front frame 5F and the game It is also possible to manage the history separately for the board 26F. Therefore, machine history management of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F will be described below.

  FIG. 55 is a schematic diagram for explaining history management of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F according to the present embodiment. The machine history management center 800AF shown in FIG. 55 associates the information of the front frame 5F with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided on the payout control board 17F connected to the front frame 5F, and the main control board 16F connected to the game board 26F. The information of the game board 26F is stored in the table shown in FIG. 56 in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided in FIG. 56 to manage the history of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F. The history management center 800AF includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 8001F as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 8002F that stores operation programs and control data of the CPU 8001F, and a RAM that functions as a work area for the CPU 8001F. A (Random Access Memory) 8003F, an I / O port (Input / Output Port) 8004F, and a mass storage device 8005F such as an HDD (Hard Disk Drive) are provided.

  FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram of a table that stores information on the front frame 5F and information on the game board 26F in order to manage the machine history of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F. In the table shown in FIG. 56, a payout side table (FIG. 56 (a)) that stores information on the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the payout control board 17F, and a security chip ID of the main control board 16F. A main control side table (FIG. 56 (b)) for storing information on the game board 26F is included.

  Hereinafter, the machine history management of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. First, at the time of shipment and installation, (1) the semiconductor chip manufacturer 190F manufactures the payout control semiconductor chip 17aF and ships it to the frame manufacturer 191F, which is the manufacturer of the front frame 5F. (2) The semiconductor chip manufacturer 190F manufactures the main control semiconductor chip 16aF and ships it to the game board manufacturer 192F, which is the manufacturer of the game board 26F. The payout control semiconductor chip 17aF and the main control semiconductor chip 16aF are not limited to the case where they are manufactured by the same semiconductor chip manufacturer 190F, and may be manufactured by different semiconductor chip manufacturers 190F.

  (3-1) The semiconductor chip manufacturer 190F notifies the history management center 800AF of the payout control security chip ID of the manufactured payout control semiconductor chip 17aF, and inputs the payout control security chip ID into the payout side table. Update the payout table. Similarly, (3-2) the semiconductor chip manufacturer 190F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of the main control security chip ID of the manufactured main control semiconductor chip 16aF, and the main control side security chip ID is sent to the main control side table. To update the main control table.

  (4) The frame maker 191F incorporates the payout control semiconductor chip 17aF into the front frame 5F to manufacture the front frame 5F. Further, the frame maker 191F ships and installs the manufactured front frame 5F to the hall 193F. (5) The frame maker 191F notifies the history management center 800AF of information specifying the front frame 5F installed in the hall 193F, and updates the payout side table so as to be stored in association with the payout control security chip ID. As information specifying the front frame 5F, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), the front frame manufacturing number, the delivery board management number, the product code for delivery control, the carrier code, the hall code, the shipping date, and the installation Date and time are included. Further, the information specifying the front frame 5F may include a frame format name, a product code, and a manufacturer code.

  (6) The game board maker 192F incorporates the main control semiconductor chip 16aF into the game board 26F to manufacture the game board 26F. Further, the game board maker 192F ships the manufactured game board 26F to the hall 193F and installs the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in combination. (7) The game board maker 192F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of information specifying the game board 26F installed in the hall 193F, and updates the main control side table so as to be stored in association with the main control security chip ID. To do. As information for specifying the game board 26F, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), the model name of the gaming machine, product code, manufacturer code, game board production number, main control board management number, product code for main control , Carrier code, hall code, shipping date, and installation date and time.

  (8) The hall 193F operates the P stand 2F formed by combining the front frame 5F and the game board 26F. When driven, the P base 2F transmits gaming machine installation information (operation information) including the payout control security chip ID and the main control security chip ID to the key management server 800F. The key management server 800F authenticates the P machine 2F based on the gaming machine installation information transmitted from the P machine 2F, and transmits the necessary secret key to the P machine 2F. (9) The key management server 800F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of the gaming machine installation information, and pays out so as to store a pair (combined) main control security chip ID in association with the payout control security chip ID. The side table is updated, and the main control side table is updated so as to store a pair (combined) payout control security chip ID in association with the main control security chip ID. The machine history management center 800AF includes the gaming machine installation information transmitted from the key management server 800F, the contents of the payout side table and the main control side table updated by the semiconductor chip maker 190F, the frame maker 191F, and the game board maker 192F. Is matched.

  The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation. The history management center 800AF also manages the management status of the front frame 5F in which information such as the shipping date (information (3-1) and (5) shown in FIG. 56A) included in the payout table is updated. (Status) is “Shipment”, and the management status of the front frame 5F in which the information of the paired main control security chip ID (information (9) shown in FIG. 56A) included in the payout table is updated ( (Status) is determined as “installation”. Note that the management state (status) of the front frame 5F may be stored in the payout side table or in another storage area. In the case of initial failure after shipment registration, re-shipment is not performed.

  Similarly, the machine history management center 800AF uses the game board 26F in which information such as the shipping date (information (3-2) and (7) shown in FIG. 56B) included in the main control table is updated. The game state of the game board 26F in which the management state (status) is “shipped” and the information of the security chip ID for pair payout control included in the main control side table (information (9) shown in FIG. 56B) is updated The management state (status) is determined as “installation”. Note that the management state (status) of the game board 26F may be stored in the main control side table or in another storage area. In the case of initial failure after shipment registration, re-shipment is not performed.

  Next, at the time of storage, (10) When the hole 193F is replaced with a new front frame 5F and game board 26F, the installed front frame 5F and game board 26F are removed and stored in the warehouse. (11) The warehouse operator 194F notifies the history management center 800AF of the storage information of the front frame 5F removed from the hall 193F, and updates the payout side table so as to store it in association with the payout control security chip ID. Further, the warehouse trader 194F notifies the history management center 800AF of the storage information of the game board 26F removed from the hall 193F, and updates the main control side table so as to be stored in association with the main control security chip ID. As shown in FIG. 56, the storage information of the front frame 5F and the gaming board 26F includes the manufacturer of the gaming machine, the installation source hall, the removal date, the storage date, and the storage location.

  When the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are removed from the hall 193F, the operation information is not transmitted to the key management server 800F. That is, it can be considered that non-operating information has been transmitted to the key management server 800F from the removed front frame 5F and game board 26F. The non-operating information transmitted to the key management server 800F is further transmitted to the history management center 800AF. The machine history management center 800AF collates the non-operation information transmitted from the key management server 800F with the contents of the payout side table and the main control side table updated by the warehouse operator 194F.

  The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation. The history management center 800AF also manages the management status of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in which information such as the storage date (information (11) shown in FIG. 56) included in the payout table and the main control table is updated. (Status) is determined as “Storage”. When the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are removed, it is not always necessary to remove the front frame 5F and the game board 26F as a set, and either one may be removed and removed. In this case, the machine history management center 800AF updates only the information (11) (see FIG. 56) of either the payout side table or the main control side table.

  Next, at the time of resale, (12) the hall 193F requests the second trader 195F to resell the front frame 5F and the game board 26F stored by the warehouse trader 194F. The used trader 195F resells the stored front frame 5F and game board 26F to another hall and installs them in the hall. (13) The used trader 195F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of the resale information on the resold front frame 5F, and updates the payout side table so as to store it in association with the payout control security chip ID. In addition, the used trader 195F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of the resale information of the resold game board 26F, and updates the main control side table so as to store it in association with the main control security chip ID. As shown in FIG. 56, the resale information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F includes an installation source hall, a removal date, an installation date, and a sales company name.

  When the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are resold, they are installed in different halls, and the P frame 2F is operated by combining the front frame 5F and the game board 26F. When driven, the P base 2F transmits gaming machine installation information (operation information) including the payout control security chip ID and the main control security chip ID to the key management server 800F. The key management server 800F authenticates the P machine 2F based on the gaming machine installation information transmitted from the P machine 2F, and transmits the necessary secret key to the P machine 2F. Further, the key management server 800F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of the gaming machine installation information, and stores the pair (combined) main control security chip ID in association with the payout control security chip ID. The table is updated, and the main control side table is updated so as to store a pair (combined) payout control security chip ID in association with the main control security chip ID. The machine history management center 800AF collates the gaming machine installation information transmitted from the key management server 800F with the contents of the payout side table and the main control side table updated by the second-hand trader 195F.

  The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation. The machine history management center 800AF also manages the management status of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in which information such as sales company names (information (13) shown in FIG. 56) included in the payout side table and the main control sales table is updated. (Status) is determined to be “resale”, and the front frame 5F and the game in which the information of the pair security chip ID (information (9) shown in FIG. 56) included in the payout side table and the main control side table are updated The management state (status) of the panel 26F is determined as “installation”. When reselling the front frame 5F and the game board 26F, it is not always necessary to resell the front frame 5F and the game board 26F as a set, and either one may be resold. In this case, the history management center 800AF updates only the information (13) (see FIG. 56) of either the payout side table or the main control side table. Further, when reselling the front frame 5F and the game board 26F, it is not necessarily limited to reselling the front frame 5F and the game board 26F stored in the warehouse, but the front frame 5F and the game board 26F installed in the hall. May be resold. In addition, we do not re-ship at the time of resale.

  Next, at the time of disposal, (14) the hole 193F requests the disposal company 196F to discard the stored front frame 5F and game board 26F. The discard trader 196F discards the stored front frame 5F and game board 26F by an appropriate method. (15) The discarder 196F notifies the history management center 800AF of the discard information of the discarded front frame 5F, and updates the payout side table so as to store it in association with the payout control security chip ID. Further, the discarder 196F notifies the history management center 800AF of the discard information of the discarded game board 26F, and updates the main control side table so as to be stored in association with the main control security chip ID. As shown in FIG. 56, the discard information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F includes an installation source hall, a take-off date, and a discard date.

  When the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are discarded, the operation information is not transmitted to the key management server 800F. That is, it can be considered that the non-operation information is transmitted from the discarded front frame 5F and the game board 26F to the key management server 800F. The non-operating information transmitted to the key management server 800F is further transmitted to the history management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF collates the non-operation information transmitted from the key management server 800F with the contents of the payout side table and the main control side table updated by the discarder 196F.

  The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation. The history management center 800AF also manages the management status of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in which information such as the discard date (information (15) shown in FIG. 56) included in the payout table and the main control table is updated. (Status) is determined to be “Discard”. When discarding the front frame 5F and the game board 26F, it is not always necessary to discard the front frame 5F and the game board 26F as a set, and either one may be removed and discarded. In this case, the machine history management center 800AF updates only the information (15) (see FIG. 56) of either the payout side table or the main control side table. Further, when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are discarded, the front frame 5F and the game board 26F installed in the hall 193F are not necessarily limited to the case where the front frame 5F and the game board 26F stored in the warehouse are discarded. 26F may be discarded.

<Abnormality judgment of machine history management center>
If the machine history management center 800AF is abnormal as a result of comparing the gaming machine installation information and the non-operating information with the updated information as described above, the machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality. Specifically, a process for determining whether or not the machine history management center 800AF is abnormal will be described with reference to a flowchart. FIG. 57 is a flowchart for explaining abnormality determination processing for management of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F by the machine history management center 800AF. 58 is a diagram for explaining a table referred to in the flowchart shown in FIG.

  First, the machine history management center 800AF determines the management state (status) of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F based on information included in the payout side table and the main control side table (SF211). Specifically, the machine history management center 800AF includes the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in which information such as the discard date (information (15) shown in FIG. 56) included in the payout table and the main control table is updated. The management state (status) is determined as “discard”.

  Next, the history management center 800AF checks whether or not the transition from the previously determined management state to the currently determined management state is included in the transition prohibition table (SF212). As shown in FIG. 58A, the transition prohibition table indicates a management state in which transition is prohibited from the management state determined last time. Specifically, when the frame maker 191F manufactures and ships the front frame 5F, the front frame 5F is not discarded or resold. Therefore, in the transition prohibition table, the management state changes from “shipment” to “discard”. Transition to “resale” is prohibited. In addition, since the front frame 5F once installed, stored and resold is not shipped from the frame maker 191F, in the transition prohibition table, the management status is “installed”, “storage” and “resale” to “shipment”. ”Is prohibited. Further, since the discarded front frame 5F is not shipped, installed, stored, and resold, the management status is changed from “discarded” to “shipped”, “installed”, “stored”, and “resolded” in the transition prohibition table. ”Is prohibited. In the above-described transition prohibition table, the front frame 5F has been described as an example, but the same applies to the game board 26F.

  Next, when the change to the management state determined this time is not included in the transition prohibition table (SF212: N), the machine history management center 800AF, based on the information from the key management server 800F, the front frame 5F and the game board The operating state of 26F is determined (SF213). Specifically, the machine history management center 800AF determines that the gaming machine installation information is transmitted from the key management server 800F, and determines that the machine is operating, and when the non-operation information is transmitted from the key management server 800F (gaming machine installation information). Is not transmitted), it is determined as a non-operating state.

  Next, the machine history management center 800AF checks whether or not the management state determined this time in SF211 and the operation state determined in SF213 are included in the update abnormality table (SF214). As shown in the update abnormality table, FIG. 58 (b), the operation state prohibited in the management state determined this time in SF211 is shown. Specifically, when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are installed, they are in an operating state if they are within business hours, but are normally inactive if they are out of business hours. When the status is “Installation”, it is determined as abnormal if “Operates outside business hours”. Further, when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are not installed, the operation status is always inactive. Therefore, in the update abnormality table, the management status is “shipment”, “storage”, “resale”, and “discard”. When it becomes “operation”, it is determined as abnormal.

  Next, when the determined operating state is included in the update abnormality table (SF214: Y), the machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality (SF215). The means for notifying the abnormality in SF 215 may be any means such as displaying the abnormality on the display device of the history management center 800AF or outputting an alarm sound from the audio output device. The history management center 800AF also reports an abnormality (SF215) when the transition to the management state determined this time is included in the transition prohibition table (SF212: Y).

  The machine history management center 800AF ends the process when the determined operating state is not included in the update abnormality table (SF214: N).

  As described above, the history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment uses the payout side table that stores the history information of the front frame 5F in association with the payout control security chip ID and the history information of the game board 26F for main control. The main control side table stored in association with the security chip ID is included in the mass storage device 8005F, and the management status of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F based on the information stored in the payout side table and the main control side table by the CPU 8001F Judge abnormalities. Therefore, the history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment can manage the history by associating the front frame 5F and the game board 26F that may be distributed separately with each security chip ID.

<Communication between main control unit and payout control unit>
Next, communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F in the P stand 2F will be described in more detail. First, in the P stand 2F shown in FIG. 32, communication between the main control board 16F provided on the game board 26F and the payout control board 17F provided on the front frame 5F is performed by the main control provided on the main control board 16F. This is performed between the portion 161F and the payout control portion 171F provided on the front frame 5F. FIG. 59 is a schematic diagram for explaining communication performed between the main controller 161F, the payout controller 171F, and the communication control IC.

  The main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F illustrated in FIG. 59 are described below as being configured with one chip, but a similar function may be configured with a plurality of chips. The main control unit 161F includes a main control circuit 161aF, a communication control circuit 161bF, and a main control storage unit 161cF. The main control circuit 161aF performs various processes in the main control unit 161F (for example, a process of counting winning balls based on a signal from the winning sensor 162F or detecting fraud based on a signal from the radio wave sensor 163F). Is a circuit for executing a control program for The communication control circuit 161bF is a circuit for performing cryptographic communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. The main control storage unit 161cF is a storage device for storing a user program, a control program, and data to be executed by the main control unit 161F, and includes, for example, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric Random Access Memory) of a nonvolatile memory. . Note that since the main control storage unit 161cF includes FeRAM, the information stored in the FeRAM does not need to be backed up by an external power source.

  On the other hand, the payout control unit 171F includes a payout control circuit 171aF, a communication control circuit 171bF, and a payout control storage unit 171cF. The payout control circuit 171aF controls the various processing (the firing motor 18F via the firing control board 31F by the payout control unit 171F, or from the game ball to the holding ball to the CU3F based on the signal from the counting button 28F. A circuit for executing a control program for performing a process of requesting conversion). The communication control circuit 171bF is a circuit for performing cryptographic communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, and cryptographic communication between the payout control unit 171F and the communication control IC 325aF. The payout control storage unit 171cF is a storage device for storing a user program, a control program, data, and the like to be executed by the payout control unit 171F, and includes, for example, a FeRAM that is a nonvolatile memory. Since the payout control storage unit 171cF includes the FeRAM, the information stored in the FeRAM does not need to be backed up by an external power source.

  Further, the communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF will be described in detail. FIG. 60 is a block diagram for explaining a configuration of a communication control circuit 161bF for performing cryptographic communication with the payout control unit 171F. First, the communication control circuit 161bF has a plurality of functions, for example, an authentication communication function, an encryption communication function, an interrupt function, a recovery function, and the like.

  The authentication communication function is a function for mutual authentication with the payout control unit 171F in the front frame 5F. The encryption communication function is a function for encrypting and decrypting a message between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. The encryption communication function can be automatically inserted into a tamper-proof code message, or a code for detecting a communication error can be automatically inserted. Further, the encryption communication function can periodically pass information of the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F and receive information of the payout control unit 171F by setting a communication interval.

  For example, the interrupt function notifies an interrupt after completion of decryption of a message, or notifies an interrupt when the authentication state changes. The recovery function is a function for performing recovery communication with the payout control unit 171F in the encryption communication control unit 600F in response to a request from the user. Further, the communication control circuit 161bF can set a timeout time for communication response and can set a communication interval between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60, the communication control circuit 161bF has a plurality of registers that perform input / output with the control program executed by the main control circuit 161aF, and cryptographic communication for performing cryptographic communication with the payout control unit 171F. A control unit 600F is provided.

  Examples of the registers included in the communication control circuit 161bF include an authentication status register 611F, an authentication interrupt setting register 612F, a transmission data buffer 613F, a transmission data number register 614F, an information transmission clear register 615F, a main control game information register 616F, and a payout control game. An information register 617F, a recovery communication completion register 618F, an encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 619F, and the like are included.

  The authentication status register 611F indicates whether the chip ID of the main control unit 161F has been authenticated, the communication and authentication status between the card unit and the payout control unit, and the communication and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit. The status is written. In the authentication interrupt setting register 612F, whether or not to permit interruption for changing the state of chip ID authentication, authentication between the card unit and the payout control unit, and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit is set.

  The transmission data buffer 613F is a buffer for writing game information to be transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F (for example, the storage capacity is 128 bytes), and the game information is stored in the buffer by FIFO (First In, First Out). Written. Also, by configuring the transmission data buffer 613F with a non-volatile memory, communication information is written between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, and is written in the buffer that has not been transmitted due to communication failure. Is retained after return. Therefore, even when recovery communication is performed, recovery processing such as re-execution of the user program to generate game information written in the transmission data buffer 613F becomes unnecessary, and the processing load of the main control unit 161F is eliminated. Can be reduced. In addition, the amount of data required in the recovery process can be suppressed. Since the transmission data buffer 613F is composed of a nonvolatile memory, backup by an external power source is not necessary. Registers other than the transmission data buffer 613F are composed of a volatile memory.

  The transmission data number register 614F is a register for writing the number of data transmitted to the main control unit 161F payout control unit 171F, and monitors the number of data in the transmission data buffer 613F. The information transmission clear register 615F is a register for writing a request to clear data in the transmission data buffer 613F.

  The main control game information register 616F is a register into which data transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F is written. The data written in the main control game information register 616F is encrypted by the encryption communication control unit 600F and transmitted to the payout control unit 171F. The payout control game information register 617F is a register in which data transmitted from the payout control unit 171F to the main control unit 161F is written. The data written in the payout control game information register 617F is data decrypted by the encryption communication control unit 600F.

  The recovery communication completion register 618F is a register in which information indicating whether recovery communication is completed between the main control unit and the payout control unit is written. The encryption communication data clear request / completion register 619F is information that requests clearing of data such as a serial number held in the encryption communication control unit 600F communicating with the payout control unit 171F, and that the data has been deleted. This is a register in which information indicating (clear completion) is written.

  The communication control circuit 171bF is divided into a configuration for performing cryptographic communication with the main control unit 161F and a configuration for performing cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325aF. The communication control circuit 171bF performs communication control on a portion of the configuration for performing cryptographic communication with the main control unit 161F. A configuration part for performing cryptographic communication with the circuit 171b1F and the communication control IC 325aF will be described below as a communication control circuit 171b2F.

  First, FIG. 61 is a block diagram for explaining a configuration of a communication control circuit 171b1F for performing cryptographic communication with the main control unit 161F. First, the communication control circuit 171b1F has a plurality of functions, for example, an authentication communication function, an encryption communication function, an interrupt function, a recovery function, and the like.

  The authentication communication function is a function for mutual authentication with the main control unit 161F of the game board 26F and mutual authentication with the communication control IC 325aF of the CU3F. The encryption communication function is a function for encrypting and decrypting a message between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. The encryption communication function can be automatically inserted into a tamper-proof code message, or a code for detecting a communication error can be automatically inserted. In addition, the encryption communication function can periodically pass the information of the payout control unit 171F to the main control unit 161F and receive the information of the main control unit 161F by setting the communication interval.

  For example, the interrupt function notifies an interrupt after completion of decryption of a message, or notifies an interrupt when the authentication state changes. The recovery function is a function for performing recovery communication with the main control unit 161F and the communication control IC 325aF in the encryption communication control unit 700F in response to a request from the user. Further, the communication control circuit 171b1F can set a communication response time-out time and can set a communication interval between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 61, the communication control circuit 171b1F has a plurality of registers that perform input / output with the control program executed by the payout control circuit 171aF, and encryption communication for performing cryptographic communication with the payout control unit 171F. A control unit 700F is included.

  The registers included in the communication control circuit 171b1F include, for example, an authentication status register 711F, an authentication interrupt setting register 712F, a data reception register 713F, a reception data number register 714F, an information reception clear register 715F, a payout control game information register 716F, and a main control game. An information register 717F, a recovery request / completion register 718F, an encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 719F, and the like are included.

  The authentication status register 711F indicates whether or not the chip ID of the payout control unit 171F is authenticated, the communication and authentication status between the card unit and the payout control unit, and the communication and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit. The status is written. In the authentication interrupt setting register 712F, whether or not to permit interruption for changing the state of chip ID authentication, authentication between the card unit and the payout control unit, and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit is set.

  The data reception register 713F is a buffer (for example, having a storage capacity of 128 bytes) in which the game information transmitted from the main control unit 161F and received by the payout control unit 171F is written, and the buffer is a FIFO (First In, First Out) game. Information is written. In addition, by configuring the data reception register 713F with a nonvolatile memory, communication information is written between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. Is retained after return. Therefore, even when recovery communication is performed, recovery processing such as re-execution of the user program to generate game information written in the data reception register 713F becomes unnecessary, and the processing load of the main control unit 161F is reduced. Can be reduced. In addition, the amount of data required in the recovery process can be suppressed. Since the data reception register 713F is composed of a nonvolatile memory, backup by an external power source is not necessary. Registers other than the data reception register 713F are composed of a volatile memory.

  The reception data number register 714F is a register for writing the number of data transmitted from the main control unit 161F and received by the payout control unit 171F, and monitors the number of data in the data reception register 713F. The information reception clear register 715F is a register in which a request for clearing data in the data reception register 713F is written.

  The payout control game information register 716F is a register into which data transmitted from the payout control unit 171F to the main control unit 161F is written. The data written in the payout control game information register 716F is encrypted by the encryption communication control unit 700F and transmitted to the main control unit 161F. The main control game information register 717F is a register in which data transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F is written. The data written in the main control game information register 717F is data decrypted by the encryption communication control unit 700F.

  The recovery request / completion register 718F is a register in which information indicating whether or not recovery communication is requested between the main control unit and the payout control unit and information indicating whether or not the recovery communication is completed is written. The encryption communication data clear request / completion register 719F is information requesting to clear data such as a serial number held in the encryption communication control unit 700F communicating with the main control unit 161F, and that the data has been deleted. This is a register in which information indicating (clear completion) is written.

  In addition, the communication control circuit 171b1F includes a communication timeout time setting register 719aF, a communication interval time setting register 719bF, and a main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719cF.

  After the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F expires, the main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719cF transfers the data in the transmission data buffer 613F of the main control unit 161F to the data reception register 713F. This register sets the valid time that can be written. By setting the register, writing to the data reception register 713F can be performed even after the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F has expired (for example, from 5 seconds to 15 seconds). About seconds). As a result, for example, even if there is a floating ball (a ball that has not been dropped by being caught between the nails of the game area 27F) when authentication is cut off due to power interruption or disconnection, the floating ball has won a prize. It is possible to securely store and protect the information. Even in the case of a gaming machine having a stage with a long ball residence time, it is assumed that the effective period can be set long so that the information that the floating ball has won can be reliably stored.

  Originally, information cannot be written in the data reception register 713F via the encryption communication control unit 700F from the viewpoint of security after the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F has expired. However, in the data reception register 713F, for example, it is necessary to write information indicating that the floating ball has won after authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F has expired. Therefore, the communication control circuit 171b1F sets an effective time in the main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719cF, and this setting is performed in the encryption communication control unit 700F, whereby the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. Information can be written to the data reception register 713F via the encryption communication control unit 700F as long as it is within the valid period even after the authentication between and is terminated. It should be noted that the set value of the main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719cF can be read after this setting is made by the encryption communication control unit 700F.

  FIG. 62 is a block diagram for explaining the configuration of a communication control circuit 171b2F for performing cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325aF. As shown in FIG. 62, the communication control circuit 171b2F performs, for example, an authentication status register 721F, an authentication interrupt setting register 722F, a transmission data buffer 723aF, a data reception register 723bF, and a transmission data number register 724F in order to perform cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325aF. , Received data number register 725F, recovery communication addition sphere request register 726F, recovery communication subtraction sphere request register 727F, recovery request / completion register 728F, encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 729F, communication timeout timer-prescaler setting register 729aF, and communication It has a timeout time setting register 729bF and the like.

  The authentication status register 721F indicates whether or not the chip ID of the payout control unit 171F is authenticated, the communication and authentication status between the card unit and the payout control unit, and the communication and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit. The status is written. In the authentication interrupt setting register 722F, whether or not to permit interruption for changing the state of chip ID authentication, authentication between the card unit and the payout control unit, and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit is set.

  The transmission data buffer 723aF is a buffer for writing a business message to be transmitted from the payout control unit 171F to the communication control IC 325aF (for example, the storage capacity is 128 bytes), and the business message is written to the buffer by FIFO (First In, First Out). Is included. The data reception register 723bF is a buffer (for example, having a storage capacity of 128 bytes) in which a business message transmitted from the communication control IC 325aF and received by the payout control unit 171F is written, and a business message is stored in the buffer by FIFO (First In, First Out). Is written.

  By configuring the transmission data buffer 723aF and the data reception register 723bF with non-volatile memory, communication disconnection occurs between the payout control unit 171F and the communication control IC 325aF, and the buffer and register that have not been transmitted due to communication failure are stored in the buffer and register. The written business message is retained even after returning. Therefore, even when recovery communication is performed, recovery processing such as re-execution of a user program to generate a business message written in the transmission data buffer 723aF and the data reception register 723bF becomes unnecessary, and the payout control unit It is possible to reduce the processing load of 171F and the communication control IC 325aF. In addition, the amount of data required in the recovery process can be suppressed. Note that since the transmission data buffer 723aF and the data reception register 723bF are configured by a nonvolatile memory, backup by an external power source is not necessary. Registers other than the transmission data buffer 723aF and the data reception register 723bF are composed of a volatile memory.

  The transmission data number register 724F is a register for writing the number of data transmitted from the payout control unit 171F to the communication control IC 325aF, and monitors the number of data in the transmission data buffer 723aF. The reception data number register 725F is a register for writing the number of data transmitted from the communication control IC 325aF and received by the payout control unit 171F, and monitors the number of data in the data reception register 723bF.

  The recovery communication addition sphere request register 726F is a register in which the number of addition spheres is written when an addition sphere is generated as a result of recovery communication between the communication control IC and the payout control unit after power-off recovery. The recovery communication addition ball request register 726F is updated only when the recovery communication is completed. The recovery communication subtraction sphere request register 727F is a register in which the number of subtraction spheres is written when a subtraction sphere is generated as a result of recovery communication between the communication control IC and the payout control unit after the power-off recovery. Note that the recovery communication subtraction sphere request register 727F is also updated only when the recovery communication is completed.

  The recovery request / completion register 728F is a register in which information indicating whether or not recovery communication is requested between the communication control IC and the payout control unit and whether or not the recovery communication is completed are written. The encryption communication data clear request / completion register 729F is information that requests clearing of data such as a serial number held in the encryption communication control unit 700F communicating with the communication control IC 325aF, and that the data has been deleted ( This is a register in which information indicating "clear completion" is written.

<Recovery completion confirmation process>
Next, in the communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F return to the main control storage unit 161cF and the payout control memory when returning from a communication disabled state such as a power failure. The recovery process which transmits the predetermined information memorize | stored in the part 171cF is performed. Then, the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F perform a recovery completion confirmation process for resuming the generation of predetermined information by executing the user program on the condition that the recovery process ends. Specifically, the recovery completion confirmation process will be described with reference to a flowchart. FIG. 63 is a flowchart for explaining the recovery completion confirmation processing.

  First, when the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F are turned on in order to recover from an incommunicable state such as a power interruption, the main control circuit 161aF and the payout control circuit 171aF start processing of an authentication sequence. When the authentication is completed, the authentication results are written in the authentication status registers 611F and 711F of the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, respectively. Then, the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F confirm whether or not the authentication completion is written in the respective authentication status registers 611F and 711F (step SF291). When the authentication completion is not written in the respective authentication status registers 611F and 711F (step SF291: NO), the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F return to the process of step SF291.

  When the authentication completion is written in the respective authentication status registers 611F and 711F (step SF291: YES), the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F recover in the recovery communication completion register 618F and the recovery request / completion register 718F. It is confirmed whether or not a flag indicating completion is written (step SF292). If the flag indicating the completion of recovery is not written in the recovery communication completion register 618F and the recovery request / completion register 718F (step SF292: NO), the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F return to the process of step SF292.

  The main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F start the processing of the user program when the recovery completion flag is written in the recovery communication completion register 618F and the recovery request / completion register 718F (step SF292: YES). (Step SF293). As means for starting the processing of the user program, for example, a means for transmitting a signal for starting the processing of the user program to start the processing of the user program and a stopping means for stopping the processing of the user program are provided. There are means for starting the processing of the user program by releasing the means.

  As described above, since the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F do not start the processing of the user program until the recovery processing is completed, new information by the processing of the user program before the information to be restored by the recovery processing is determined. Is prevented from being written, the processing of the user program can be resumed appropriately.

<Commands and responses sent and received between the main control unit and the payout control unit>
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, an outline of commands and responses transmitted and received between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F will be described.

  FIG. 64 shows the transmission direction, whether the data to be transmitted is a command or a response, the name of transmission information, and its outline.

  First, a command named power-on notification is transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F. This power-on notification command notifies the payout control unit 171F that power is turned on and communication is started. The payout control unit 171F transmits a response named “power-on reception” to the main control unit 161F. This power-on reception response is a response that the main control unit 161F receives a power-on notification and starts communication.

  Next, a command having a game state notification is transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F. This gaming state notification command notifies the payout control unit 171F of the gaming state. The payout control unit 171F transmits a response named “game state response” to the main control unit 161F. This gaming state response is a response that a gaming state notification has been received with respect to the main control unit 161F.

<Main sequence processed between main control unit and payout control unit>
Next, based on FIG. 65 and FIG. 66, a main sequence processed between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F by processing executed by the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F will be described.

<< Communication sequence >>
First, referring to FIG. 65, a sequence that is processed between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F when the power is turned on will be described. The sequence shown in FIG. 65 is a process that is executed when communication is resumed after the communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F has ended normally.

  The communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F is performed by a polling method using the main control unit 161F as a primary station, and the polling interval is 200 ms. Note that communication of power-on notification and power-on reception is excluded. The payout control unit 171F sets “communication line disconnection” and stops the game when the request command from the main control unit 161F cannot be received even after 1 second has elapsed since the response was transmitted.

  Furthermore, the payout control unit 171F transmits a response command to the main control unit 161F only when normal data is received. If the main control unit 161F does not receive a response command within the polling interval time, it retransmits the command up to three times including the first time. The serial numbers used for transmission and reception are stored in the storage unit for both the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, and are used for command normality check, power-off recovery, and communication line disconnection recovery.

  Specifically, the communication sequence will be described. First, when power is turned on, communication of power-on notification and power-on reception is performed between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, and an authentication new sequence is started. . As described above, the authentication sequence is written in the authentication status registers 611F and 711F that the chip IDs of the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F are authenticated and the communication between the main control unit and the payout control unit is authenticated. . Furthermore, the process which produces | generates the encryption key and decryption key which are used for the encryption communication of the main control part 161F and the payout control part 171F by the said authentication sequence is performed. The communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F after the process is performed using the generated encryption key and decryption key.

  Next, after the authentication sequence is completed, the main control unit 161F transmits a gaming state notification command to the payout control unit 171F with a serial number “n”. The payout control unit 171F returns a game state reception response to the main control unit 161F as “n” without counting up the serial number. Furthermore, the main control unit 161F transmits a game state notification command to the payout control unit 171F with the serial number “n + 1”. The payout control unit 171F returns a game state reception response to the main control unit 161F as “n + 1” without counting up the serial number.

  Thereafter, the main control unit 161F counts up the serial number to “n + 2” and transmits a gaming state notification command to the payout control unit 171F. Then, the payout control unit 171F sets “n + 2” without counting up the serial number, and returns a game state reception response to the main control unit 161F.

  In the communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, the interval from the command transmission of the game number notification of the serial number “n” to the command transmission of the game status notification of the serial number “n + 1”, the game status notification of the serial number “n + 1” The interval from the command transmission to the command transmission of the game number notification of the serial number “n + 2” is 200 ms each.

<< Sequence after power off >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, a process when the status information request is unreached due to power interruption / communication line interruption will be described. In particular, FIG. 66 shows that there is a power interruption / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power supply of the payout controller 171F is once turned off and then turned on again), and the gaming state notification is not reached (from the main controller 161F). FIG. 10 is a sequence diagram for explaining processing when a post-recovery communication partner matches with a payout control unit 171F).

  Referring to FIG. 66, before the power interruption occurs during the game, main controller 161F transmits a gaming state notification including serial number = n to payout controller 171F. In response to this, the payout control unit 171F transmits a game state reception including the serial number = n to the main control unit 161F.

  Then, after a power interruption occurs in the payout control unit 171F during the game, when a game state notification including a serial number = n + 1 is transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F, the payout control unit 171F The game state notification cannot be received because of the state. Thereafter, since the gaming state reception from the payout control unit 171F is not transmitted, the main control unit 161F performs control to stop communication assuming that the power supply is cut off after one second.

  Thereafter, when an authentication sequence is started between the power-on and main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, the main control unit 161F includes a power source including serial number = 1 and main control serial number (previous last transmission serial number) = n + 1. The insertion notification is transmitted to the payout control unit 171F. Since the game state reception serial number transmitted to the main control unit 161F before the power interruption occurred is “n”, the payout control unit 171F has a payout control serial number backed up by the payout control unit 171F = n. Therefore, the payout control sequence number = n backed up by the payout control unit 171F does not match the main control sequence number = n + 1 backed up by the main control unit 161F. When the serial numbers do not match, the payout control unit 171F performs recovery processing on the information of the payout control unit 171F based on the recovery game information included in the power-on notification transmitted from the main control unit 161F. Thereafter, the payout control unit 171F transmits power-on reception including the serial number = 1 to the main control unit 161F.

  The main control unit 161F transmits a gaming state notification including a serial number = 2 to the payout control unit 171F. The payout control unit 171F performs processing with the contents after the recovery process, and transmits a game state reception including a serial number = 2 to the payout control unit 171F. Thereafter, similarly, the main control unit 161F transmits a gaming state notification including a serial number = 3 to the payout control unit 171F. The payout control unit 171F transmits the game state reception including the serial number = 3 to the payout control unit 171F.

  The above-described recovery process is performed because the serial numbers do not match, but information (for example, the number of game information, prize ball information, etc.) included in the recovery game information is the main control unit 161F and payout control. The recovery processing may be performed even if there is a mismatch with the unit 171F.

<Unauthorized gaming machine connection detection>
Next, a mechanism for detecting unauthorized gaming machines detected by the CU 3 will be described. The card unit that can be connected to the P unit 2F is not limited to a card unit that is used for commercial purposes (corresponding to the CU3F described above, hereinafter also simply referred to as CU3F or commercial CU). It may be a game board development jig for developing a board, a development card unit (development CU) used for the development of the P stand 2F, or the like.

  However, it is conceivable to illegally play a game on the P unit 2F by using a card unit that can be connected to the P unit 2F other than the commercial CU. For example, a large number of game balls are lent out to a P board 2F connected to a game board development jig or development CU other than a commercial CU and separated from the game board development jig or development CU, and then the P board 2F. It is conceivable to play a game illegally by connecting a commercial CU.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the operation of the commercial CU is detected by detecting whether the P stand 2F connected to the commercial CU has been connected to a game board development jig or development CU other than the commercial CU in the past. Stop. Specifically, a mechanism for detecting whether or not a game board development jig other than a commercial CU or a development CU has been connected in the past will be described with reference to the drawings.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining a detection mechanism when the P stand 2F connected to the game board development jig is connected to a commercial CU by unit replacement. First, the game board development jig 3EF shown in FIG. 67 includes a CU control unit 323F and a communication control IC 325aF that are the same as a commercial CU, except for having an SC 325EbF for developing P units. In addition, an identification ID indicating that it is a game board development jig is embedded in SC325EbF for P-unit development. Specifically, the identification ID is an identification code included in the SC board ID, and is stored in the SC325EbF as a part of the SC board ID.

  When the P board 2F is connected to the game board development jig 3EF as shown in FIG. 67, when the card insertion notification command is transmitted from the game board development jig 3EF to the P board 2F as a gaming machine message notification, The identification ID is transmitted from the development SC325EbF to the P platform 2F. The identification ID transmitted to the P platform 2F is stored in a register in the payout control circuit 171aF. The SC board ID of SC325EbF is stored in the register in the payout control circuit 171aF together with the identification ID. Note that only the identification ID may be backed up in another storage device of the payout control circuit 171aF.

  The SC board ID is stored in the register in the payout control circuit 171aF as described above, but is not notified to the user program 171pF executed by the payout control circuit 171aF. Therefore, the P base 2F cannot read the SC board ID from the payout control circuit 171aF, and the SC board ID cannot be illegally copied, so that the security is high. The SC board ID (including the identification ID) stored in the register of the payout control circuit 171aF can be erased by clearing the RAM of the payout control circuit 171aF.

  Next, processing when the unit is replaced from the game board development jig 3EF to the CU3F will be described. When the P stand 2F connected to the game board development jig 3EF is connected to the CU 3F by unit replacement, a gaming machine message notification is transmitted from the CU 3F in the processing of the authentication sequence after the power is turned on. With this gaming machine message notification, the SC board ID including the identification ID (identification information indicating that it is a commercial CU) is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the P stand 2F. Note that the timing for transmitting the SC board ID to the P stand 2F is not limited to the processing of the authentication sequence. For example, after the unit is replaced with the CU 3F and the P stand 2F is turned on, the player inserts the card. The timing at which the card insertion notification command is transmitted from the CU 3F as a gaming machine telegram notification may be used. In other words, any timing may be used as long as it can prevent the player from illegally using the number of game balls given by the game board development jig 3EF. In FIG. 67, in order to distinguish the identification ID from the SC 325EbF for developing the P unit and the identification ID from the commercial SC 325bF, the identification ID from the SC 325EbF for developing the P unit is illustrated. The identification ID is not shown.

  Upon receiving the identification ID from the commercial SC 325bF, the identification ID stored in the payout control circuit 171aF (identification ID of the card unit connected in the past) is the identification ID of the game board development jig 3EF. It is determined whether or not. Whether or not the P platform 2F is a connecting device other than the commercial CU3F without determining whether the identification ID stored in the payout control circuit 171aF is the identification ID of the game board development jig 3EF. You may just judge. If the payout control circuit 171aF determines that the stored identification ID is the identification ID of the game board development jig 3EF, the card unit connected in the past without notifying the identification ID stored in the user program 171pF. Is notified only that the game board development jig 3EF, and Bit 6 (connection of game board development jig) in the fraud detection state 3 included in the response of the status information response is set to “1”.

  Based on the information of Bit 6 in the fraud detection state 3 included in the response of the state information response transmitted as a gaming machine message response from the connected P stand 2F, the CU 3F is connected to the game board development jig 3EF. Is detected. Specifically, the SC 325bF reads information on Bit 6 in the fraud detection state 3, and if the information is “1”, it detects that the card unit connected in the past was the game board development jig 3EF. When the SC 325bF detects that the card unit connected in the past is the game board development jig 3EF, the SC 325bF stops communication with the CU control unit 323F. Thereby, CU3F can prevent performing an illegal game, without taking in information in game board development jig 3EF connected in the past into CU control part 323F. Further, when the CU 3F detects that the card unit connected in the past is the game board development jig 3EF, the CU 3F may notify by sound or light, or may notify the detection result to the upper server.

  In FIG. 67, the identification ID is written in the user program 171pF so that it can be easily understood that the information of Bit6 = "1" in the fraud detection state 3 is written in the user program 171pF. However, as described above, the stored identification ID itself is not notified. In addition, the identification ID is changed from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F in order to easily express the state information response including the information of Bit 6 = "1" in the fraud detection state 3 from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. However, the stored identification ID itself is not notified.

  Of course, as described above, when the payout control circuit 171aF determines that the stored identification ID is the identification ID of the game board development jig 3EF, the flag (in the fraud detection state 3) Instead of writing to the user program 171 pF as Bit 6 (game board development jig connection) = “1”), the information of the identification ID itself of the game board development jig 3EF is written to the user program 171 pF as shown in FIG. It may be complicated. Further, it may be determined whether or not the identification ID of the game board development jig 3EF is based on the identification ID stored in the user program 171pF. Also, the information transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F is not a flag (bit 6 in the fraud detection state 3 (game board development jig connection) = “1”), but as shown in FIG. Information on the 3EF identification ID itself may be transmitted.

  Further, the P platform 2F stores the identification ID stored in the payout control circuit 171aF (the identification ID of the card unit connected in the past) without determining whether or not it is the identification ID of the game board development jig 3EF. The identification ID may be transmitted to the SC 325bF via the user program 171pF. That is, it may be determined whether the card unit connected in the past is the game board development jig 3EF or not by the P325 2F instead of the SC board 325bF and detecting the game board development jig connection.

  Also, when replacing the unit from the game board development jig 3EF to another game board development jig 3EF, the information of Bit 6 = "1" in the fraud detection state 3 is transmitted from the connected P stand 2F as described in FIG. The response of the status information response including it is transmitted. However, another game board development jig 3EF whose unit has been replaced has the shipped manufacturer code of the game machine development manufacturer code set in SC325EbF for P unit development, so that Bit6 = "6" It may be configured not to detect that the card unit connected in the past was the game board development jig 3EF while ignoring the information of 1 ″. In other words, if the card unit determines that the unit has been changed from the game board development jig 3EF to another game board development jig 3EF based on the shipping manufacturer code set in the SC, it detects an error in connection with the game board development jig. do not do. As a result, in the development process in which the connection between the game board development jig 3EF and the P stand 2F is repeated, processing for detecting an error in connection with the game board development jig is not performed, so that development and maintenance work is facilitated.

  FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining a detection mechanism when the P stand 2F connected to the development CU is connected to a commercial CU by unit replacement. First, the development CU3DF shown in FIG. 68 includes the same CU control unit 323F and communication control IC 325aF as the commercial CU, except that the development CU3DF has a development SC325DbF. In addition, an identification ID indicating that it is a development CU is embedded in the development SC325DbF. Specifically, the identification ID is an identification code included in the SC board ID, and is stored in the SC325DbF as part of the SC board ID.

  As shown in FIG. 68, when the P unit 2F is connected to the development CU3DF, when the card insertion notification command is transmitted from the development CU3DF to the P unit 2F as a gaming machine message notification, the identification ID is received from the development SC325DbF. It is transmitted to the P platform 2F. The identification ID transmitted to the P platform 2F is stored in a register in the payout control circuit 171aF. The SC board ID of SC325DbF is stored in the register in the payout control circuit 171aF together with the identification ID. Note that only the identification ID may be backed up in another storage device of the payout control circuit 171aF.

  Next, processing when the unit is replaced from the development CU3DF to the CU3F will be described. When the P platform 2F connected to the development CU3DF is connected to the CU3F by unit replacement, a gaming machine message notification is transmitted from the CU3F in the processing of the authentication sequence after the power is turned on. With this gaming machine message notification, the SC board ID including the identification ID (identification information indicating that it is a commercial CU) is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the P stand 2F. Note that the timing for transmitting the SC board ID to the P stand 2F is not limited to the processing of the authentication sequence. For example, after the unit is replaced with the CU 3F and the P stand 2F is turned on, the player inserts the card. The timing at which the card insertion notification command is transmitted from the CU 3F as a gaming machine telegram notification may be used. In other words, any timing may be used as long as it can prevent the player from illegally using the number of game balls given by the development CU3DF. In FIG. 68, in order to distinguish the identification ID from the development SC 325 DbF and the identification ID from the commercial SC 325 bF, the identification ID from the development SC 325 DbF is illustrated, and the identification ID from the commercial SC 325 bF is illustrated. Not shown.

  Upon receiving the identification ID from the commercial SC 325bF, the P base 2F determines whether or not the identification ID stored in the payout control circuit 171aF (identification ID of the card unit connected in the past) is the identification ID of the development CU3DF. . The P platform 2F determines whether or not the identification ID stored in the payout control circuit 171aF is a connection device other than the commercial CU3F without determining whether the identification ID is the identification ID of the development CU3DF. Just be fine. When the payout control circuit 171aF determines that the stored identification ID is the identification ID of the development CU3DF, the card unit connected in the past without notifying the identification ID stored in the user program 171pF is for development. Only the fact that it is a CU3DF is notified, and Bit 5 (development CU connection) of fraud detection state 3 included in the response of the state information response is set to “1”.

  In CU3F, the card unit connected in the past was the development CU3DF based on the information of Bit5 in the fraud detection state 3 included in the response of the state information response transmitted as a gaming machine message response from the connected P stand 2F. Detect that. Specifically, the SC 325bF reads the information of Bit5 in the fraud detection state 3, and if the information is “1”, it detects that the card unit connected in the past was the development CU3DF. When the SC 325bF detects that the card unit connected in the past is the development CU 3DF, the SC 325bF stops communication with the CU control unit 323F. As a result, the CU3F can prevent an unauthorized game from being performed without taking the information in the development CU3DF connected in the past into the CU control unit 323F. Further, when the CU 3F detects that the card unit connected in the past is the development CU 3DF, the CU 3F may notify by sound or light, or may notify the detection result to the upper server.

  In FIG. 68, the identification ID is written in the user program 171pF in order to easily understand that the information of Bit5 = "1" in the fraud detection state 3 is written in the user program 171pF. However, as described above, the stored identification ID itself is not notified. In addition, the identification ID is changed from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F in order to express in an easy-to-understand manner the state information response response including the information of Bit 5 = "1" in the fraud detection state 3 from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F However, the stored identification ID itself is not notified.

  Of course, as described above, when the payout control circuit 171aF determines that the stored identification ID is the identification ID of the development CU3DF, the flag included in the response to the status information response (Bit5 (development of fraud detection state 3) Instead of writing in the user program 171 pF as “CU connection for use CU” = “1”), the information of the identification ID of the development CU3DF itself may be written in the user program 171 pF as shown in FIG. Further, based on the identification ID stored in the user program 171pF, it may be determined whether or not it is the development CU3DF identification ID. Also, the information transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F is not a flag (bit 5 in the fraud detection state 3 (development CU connection) = “1”), but the identification ID itself of the development CU 3DF as shown in FIG. May be transmitted.

  Furthermore, the P stand 2F does not determine whether the identification ID stored in the payout control circuit 171aF (the identification ID of the card unit connected in the past) is the identification ID of the development CU3DF or not. A configuration in which the ID is simply transmitted to the SC 325bF via the user program 171pF may be employed. In other words, it may be determined whether the card unit connected in the past is the development CU 3DF or not by the P unit 2F, not by the SC 325bF, and detecting the development CU connection.

  Also, when a unit is replaced from a development CU3DF to another development CU3DF, a response of a status information response including information of Bit 5 = “1” in the fraud detection state 3 from the connected P unit 2F as described in FIG. Will be sent. However, in another development CU3DF whose unit has been replaced, since the shipping manufacturer code of the game device development manufacturer code is set in the development SC325DbF, the transmitted information of Bit5 = “1” in the fraud detection state 3 transmitted. May be configured not to detect that the card unit connected in the past was the development CU3DF. In other words, if the card unit determines that the unit has been replaced from the development CU3DF to another development CU3DF based on the shipping manufacturer code set in the SC, the card unit does not detect the development CU connection error. As a result, in the development process in which the connection between the development CU 3DF and the P stand 2F is repeated, the process of detecting an error in the development CU connection is not performed, so that the development and maintenance work becomes easy.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is detected whether or not the P stand 2F connected to the CU3F has been connected to the game board development jig 3EF or development CU3DF other than the CU3F in the past, and the CU control unit Since the communication with the H.323F is stopped and the operation of the CU3F is stopped, it is possible to prevent an illegal game by connecting to the game board development jig 3EF or the development CU3DF other than the CU3F in the past. For example, before connecting the P stand 2F to a commercial CU3F, connect it to the game board development jig 3EF or development CU3DF and lend a large number of game balls, and use the game balls lent after connecting to the commercial CU3F. And fraud in playing games can be prevented.

  Next, a case where a gaming machine simulator other than the P stand 2F is connected to a commercial CU3F will be described. FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining a detection mechanism when a gaming machine simulator is connected to a commercial CU3F. Here, the gaming machine simulator is a device for connecting, for example, to inspect whether the commercial CU3F operates normally, and can virtually output signals and information necessary for the inspection to the commercial CU3F. it can. Therefore, in order to prevent unauthorized gaming information from being transmitted by intentionally connecting a gaming machine simulator, a commercial CU3F determines whether it is connected to a gaming machine simulator or connected to the P stand 2F. It is necessary to detect.

  First, the gaming machine simulator 2AF shown in FIG. 69 has a payout control unit 171AF as with the P stand 2F. The payout control unit 171AF includes a payout control circuit 171AaF and a user program 171ApF executed by the payout control circuit 171AaF. In the user program 171 ApF, an identification ID indicating that it is a gaming machine simulator 2AF is embedded.

  As shown in FIG. 69, when the gaming machine simulator 2AF is connected to a commercial CU3F, a gaming machine message notification command and a gaming machine message response response are communicated between the CU3F and the gaming machine simulator 2AF. For example, the CU3F transmits a state information request command for notifying the gaming machine simulator 2AF of the state of the CU3F. When the gaming machine simulator 2AF receives a status information request command from the CU 3F, the gaming machine simulator 2AF transmits a response of a status information response to notify the CU 3F of game information, a gaming machine state, and the like.

  Information for notifying the CU 3F that it is connected to the gaming machine simulator 2AF is included in the response of the status information response transmitted to the CU 3F. Specifically, the gaming machine simulator 2AF sets Bit 7 (gaming machine simulator connection) of fraud detection state 3 included in the response of the state information response = “1” based on the identification ID embedded in the user program 171ApF.

  In CU3F, the connected gaming machine is a gaming machine simulator based on the information of Bit7 in the fraud detection state 3 included in the response of the status information response transmitted as a gaming machine message response from the connected gaming machine simulator 2AF. Detect that. Specifically, the SC 325bF reads Bit7 information in the fraud detection state 3, and if the information is “1”, it detects that the connected gaming machine is a gaming machine simulator. When the SC 325bF detects that the connected gaming machine is a gaming machine simulator, the SC 325bF stops communication with the CU control unit 323F. Thereby, CU3F can prevent performing an illegal game, without taking in the information of connected gaming machine simulator 2AF into CU control part 323F. Further, when the CU3F detects that the connected gaming machine is a gaming machine simulator, the CU3F may notify the user by sound or light, or notify the host server of the detection result.

  Note that the identification ID is given from the gaming machine simulator 2AF to express the state information response including the information of Bit 7 = “1” in the fraud detection state 3 from the gaming machine simulator 2AF to the CU 3F in an easily understandable manner. It is shown as transmitted to CU3F.

  Of course, the information transmitted from the gaming machine simulator 2AF to the CU 3F is not a flag (bit 7 in fraud detection state 3 (gaming machine simulator connection) = “1”), but identifies the gaming machine simulator 2AF as shown in FIG. Information on the ID itself may be transmitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is detected whether the gaming machine connected to the CU3F is the commercial P stand 2F or the gaming machine simulator 2AF, and the communication with the CU control unit 323F is stopped and the CU3F Since the operation is stopped, it is possible to prevent illegal gaming by intentionally connecting the gaming machine simulator 2AF to the CU 3F. For example, the gaming machine simulator 2AF can count a large number of game balls with respect to the CU 3F, and the waiting ball counted after connecting to the P stand 2F can be rented as a game ball to prevent fraud. .

<Slot machine>
Next, a slot machine will be described as another example of the gaming machine. FIG. 70 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front door of the slot machine is opened. In the description so far, the slot machine is also abbreviated as “S” in the following, because the pachinko machine is abbreviated as “P”.

  The above gaming system using game balls and holding balls is also applied to S units in the same manner. However, in the S platform, the game is played without using balls, and hence the game balls will be referred to as game points and the holding balls as points.

  Referring to FIG. 70, S platform (slot machine) 2SF is provided such that front door 2bSF is openable and closable with respect to main body frame 2aSF with its left edge as the center of swing. Although not shown in FIG. 70, a CU is connected to the left side of the S base 2SF in the same manner as the P base.

  In S 2SF, the number of bets is set by using game points, and the game points are added and updated in accordance with winning. For this reason, when a game is played on the S platform 2SF, a medal insertion operation is not necessary. Therefore, the S stand 2SF is not provided with a medal insertion slot and a medal payout opening.

  Inside the casing of the S unit 2SF, reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are juxtaposed in a horizontal direction. Of the symbols arranged on the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF, three consecutive symbols are arranged so as to be seen from a see-through window provided on the front door 2bSF. A plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a predetermined order on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF.

  A touch panel type display 510F is provided in a portion surrounding each reel 2LF, 2CF, 2RF of the front door 2bSF. The display 510F is a display corresponding to the P displays 54F, and displays various types of information (game points, points, etc.) similar to the display 54F, as well as the number of bets set in the game. Is displayed. The display unit 510F is connected to the display control unit 350F of the CU similarly to the display unit 54F of FIG. 32, and display control is performed on the CU side. The indicator 510F is not provided in a portion surrounding each of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF, but is provided at a lower panel portion (position below the start switch 7SF shown in FIG. You may provide in the panel part provided with the conventional S medal payout opening.

  Further, a 7-segment display 50SF is provided in a lower portion of the display 510F. The 7-segment display 50SF is a display corresponding to the P 7-segment display 50F, and displays various types of information (such as the number of times the front door 2bSF is opened) of the same type as the 7-segment display 50F.

  In addition, the front door 2bSF has a single BET switch 5SF operated when setting the number of bets using “game points = 1” corresponding to one medal, and the maximum determined according to the game state. When setting the number of bets (for example, “game point = 3” in the normal game state before BB occurrence and RT (Replay Time) where the winning probability of replay is high, “game point = 2” in the bonus) A MAXBET switch 6SF that is operated when the game is started, a start switch 7SF that is operated when the game starts, and stop switches 8LF, 8CF, and 8RF that are operated when the rotations of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF are stopped. Yes.

  In the case of playing a game on S units 2SF, first, similarly to P units, after securing game points using adjacent CUs, the number of bets is set using the game points. The game points are obtained by withdrawing the balance of the prepaid card inserted into the CU, the points, or the stored medals (corresponding to P stored balls) deposited in the game hall. In order to use game points, one-sheet BET switch 5SF or MAXBET switch 6SF may be operated. In the present embodiment, for example, by setting the number of bets to 1, the game points are deducted by 1, and the display of the game points on the display 510F is also subtracted and updated. When the bet number is set, the pay line determined according to the bet number and the game state is valid, and the operation of the start switch 7SF is valid, that is, the game can be started.

  When the start switch 7SF is operated while the game can be started, the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8LF, 8CF, 8RF is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2LF, 2CF, 2RF is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window.

  Then, all the reels 2LF, 2CF and 2RF are stopped, so that one game is finished, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) on the activated pay line is assigned to each reel 2LF, 2CF, When the display is stopped as a result of 2RF, a winning occurs, a game point determined according to the winning is given to the player, and the display of the game point on the display 510F is also added and updated.

  In the case of S units, it is possible to count game points as in the case of P units. As shown in FIG. 70, the S stand 2SF is provided with a counting button 28SF for counting game points and converting them into points. The ball lending button, the return button, and the replay button are provided on the CU side (see FIG. 32). The player executes the counting operation based on an arbitrary timing or a display for prompting the counting operation on the display 510F in the same manner as the P units. Then, the game points are counted, and the state where the game points are decreased while the points are increased is displayed on the display 510F. The ball lending button may be provided not on the CU side but on the P platform side and the S platform side. In that case, the operation signal of the ball lending button may be directly input to the CU 3F, or may be transmitted to the CU 3F as a status information response via the P base 2F or the S base 2SF. .

  The types of winning combinations are determined according to the state of the game, but can be broadly divided into special roles with a shift to the big bonus (BB) and regular bonus (RB), and small roles with payout of medals. And a re-gamer (replay) that allows the next game to be started without the need to set the bet amount.

  Which of a plurality of types of winning combinations is to be won or whether any winning combination is to be determined not to win is determined by, for example, the main control unit (S) controlling the S stand 2SF when a start operation is detected. Equivalent to the main controller 161F of the base). The main control unit of the S base 2SF is mounted on a main control board corresponding to the main control board 16F mounted on the P base 2F. The main control unit determines the presence / absence of a winning combination by, for example, drawing a random number generated from a predetermined random number generator or generated on software.

  After that, the main control unit waits for the reel stop operation by the player, draws in the symbol corresponding to the winning combination in the predetermined frame number range based on the stop operation time, otherwise draws another symbol Is controlled to stop the three symbols and determine whether or not there is a prize. If the main control base determines that a winning is made, the main control base transmits a signal corresponding to the type of winning to the payout control unit (corresponding to the payout control unit 171F in FIG. 32). The payout control unit gives the player a number of game points corresponding to the signal (adds game points).

  The payout control unit of the S platform 2SF is mounted on a payout control board (not shown). The payout control board is delivered from the frame maker to the hall in a state of being attached to the main body frame 2aSF by the frame maker.

  On the other hand, the main control board (not shown) of the S stand 2SF is delivered to the hall from the slot machine manufacturer separately from the main body frame 2aSF in a state of being attached to a board mounting board for connecting wiring.

  With the S units, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and variable display capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each of which can be identified A slot machine in which one game is completed when a display result is derived to the device and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device, and the display result is displayed on the variable display device. Before deriving, predetermining means for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings to occur, and control for causing the variable display device to derive a display result according to the determination result of the predetermining means A slot machine is configured that includes a derivation control means for performing and a granting means for imparting a game value when the winning occurs.

  FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various data stored in each of the card unit and the slot machine and its transmission / reception mode. The transmission / reception mode shown in FIG. 71 is obtained by replacing the terminology of FIG. 34 described as the configuration of P units with that for S units, and the mode is the same as that described with reference to FIG. Now, further explanation is omitted.

  The information to be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 2F includes a winning information signal that can specify the winning opening and the number of winning prizes for the game balls, as described above for the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the current gaming state. A pending storage number signal that can specify the latest pending storage number may be included. Note that the information output to the outside of the pachinko machine 2F is not configured to be output to the outside from the information output circuit as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, but is output from the main control unit 161F via the payout control unit 171F. You may make it do.

  As described above, since the game control microcomputer provided on the main control board 16F performs data processing such as addition / subtraction processing, the information on the number of reserved memories is recognized as the latest information. Therefore, a reserved memory number signal that can specify the latest reserved memory number in the current gaming state can be output from the game control microcomputer to the outside via the information output circuit or the payout control microcomputer.

  In addition to the above-described information, the game control microcomputer on the main control board 16F includes a launch stop signal, a radio wave sensor detection signal, a magnet in addition to the information described above. Various information may be transmitted by various signals such as a sensor detection signal, an illegal winning detection signal, and a game state information setting completion signal, and the various information may be managed on the payout control microcomputer side.

  Here, the firing stop signal is a firing stop switch when the touch sensor does not detect the player's hand contact in the hitting operation handle 25F (a switch for forcibly stopping the firing when operated). Is operated, the hitting operation handle 25F is not rotated more than a certain rotation angle, or the card unit (CU) 3F and the pachinko machine (P stand) 2F are not electrically connected. This is output when the game control microcomputer determines that a predetermined firing stop condition is satisfied.

  The radio wave sensor detection signal is transmitted to the main control board 16F by the radio wave detection signal from the radio wave sensor (radio wave switch) 163F that detects abnormal radio waves (illegal radio waves). A sensor error is determined and output based on the determination.

  The magnet sensor detection signal indicates that the magnet sensor (magnet switch) for detecting abnormal magnetism (illegal magnetism) is connected to the main control board 16F (game control microcomputer), and a magnet is used to Based on an illegal game using a magnet such as changing the trajectory, a magnetism sensor signal is input to the main control board 16F based on an illegal game using a magnet, and a magnet sensor error is determined in the game control microcomputer. Is output based on.

  The unauthorized winning detection signal is sent to the winning winning opening of the winning sensor 162F in a state in which the counting winning switch is connected to the main control board 16F and the winning switch is closed. When an illegal winning error is determined by detecting a winning ball in the big winning mouth in the gaming control microcomputer based on the detection signal of the winning sensor for detecting the winning ball of the game, an output is made based on the determination. .

  The game state information setting completion signal is output when the setting of various game information (game state information) transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F is completed when the power of the pachinko machine (P units) 2F is turned on. The Such a game state information setting completion signal is used as a trigger signal for starting communication between the CU3F side (card unit side) and the P stand 2F side (pachinko machine side), for example.

  In addition to the information as described above, the microcomputer for game control on the main control board 16F from the payout control microcomputer on the payout control board 17F includes the following glass frame / main body frame opening signal, the number of winnings. Various information such as abnormal signal, illegal addition detection signal, radio wave sensor detection signal, proximity sensor abnormal signal, night open detection signal, counting notification request signal, card removal waiting signal, and power saving transition request signal The various information may be managed on the game control microcomputer side.

  The glass frame / main body frame opening signal is generated when the detection signal from the glass door opening detection switch 12F or the front frame opening detection switch 13F is input to the dispensing control board 17F. When the opening of the front frame 5F is determined, the output is made based on the determination.

  The winning number abnormality signal confirms whether the number of winnings per unit time is equal to or greater than a predetermined number in the payout control microcomputer with respect to the number of winnings by the winning detection signal input from the main control board 16F to the payout control board 17F. Whether or not the winning number is abnormal is determined based on the determination, and when it is determined that the winning number is abnormal, an output is made based on the determination.

  The illegal addition detection signal indicates that an illegal addition error is determined by the payout control microcomputer when the payout control board 17F receives a coin addition request from the CU3F in a state other than when the card is inserted into the CU3F. Based on the output.

  The radio wave sensor detection signal is a radio wave sensor error in the payout control microcomputer because the radio wave detection signal from the radio wave sensor (radio wave switch) 173F that detects abnormal radio waves (illegal radio waves) is input to the payout control board 17F. Is determined and output based on the determination.

  Proximity sensor abnormal signal is generated by winning sensor 162F, ball raising switch (upper) 41aF, foul ball detection switch 330F, out ball detection switch 701F, and launch ball detection switch due to a change in capacitance due to the passage of the ball. It is composed of proximity switches to be detected. For such proximity switches, the dispensing control microcomputer determines whether or not there is an abnormality based on the number of balls detected, and when the abnormality is determined, the determination Is output based on. For example, when only the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF is always turned on by an improper radio wave, the shot of the ball is not detected. On the other hand, when the actually fired ball is collected and detected by the shot ball detecting switch, It is determined that the proximity sensor is abnormal because wrinkles occur in the number of fire balls and recovery balls (out balls).

  The night open detection signal is output when it is determined in the payout control microcomputer that either the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F is opened as follows. At night when the pachinko machine 2F is turned off, the glass door 6F is detected based on the detection signals output from the glass door opening detection switch 12F and the front frame opening detection switch 13F by the above-described counting counter operated by the backup power supply. The number of times the front frame 5F has been opened is counted. Then, when the power of the pachinko machine 2F is turned on, either the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F is opened in the payout control microcomputer by the count value of each opening number output from the count counter to the payout control board 17F. Is determined. It is also possible to detect the nighttime opening of only one of the glass door 6F and the front frame 5F and output the nighttime opening detection signal.

  The count notification request signal is output to make a request to notify the count value when it is determined in the payout control microcomputer that a count request has been made in response to the operation of the count button. Such a count notification request signal is used, for example, to execute audio output and numerical display related to counting by the main board.

  The card removal waiting signal is output to notify the card return ready state OFF and card removal waiting ON information when the payout control microcomputer determines that the card can be removed by the CU 3F.

  When the touch sensor does not detect the player's hand contact (for example, when it has not detected for a predetermined period) in the payout control microcomputer, the power saving transition request signal is “0”. When it is determined that a predetermined power saving control transition condition is satisfied, for example, when a card is not inserted into the CU3F or when a variable display is stopped, for example, the brightness of the liquid crystal backlight Is output as an operation request signal for shifting to a power saving state in which predetermined power saving control is performed such as a decrease in light emission and stop of light emission of various lamps.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, an example is shown in which the information output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a winning information signal that can identify the winning mouth and the number of winning prizes that the game ball has won. Such an external output of the winning information signal may be applied to the pachinko machine (P units) 2F.

  In addition, it is possible to transmit various signals such as the reserved memory number signal, the emission stop signal, and the radio wave sensor detection signal described as signals to be transmitted from the game control microcomputer of the pachinko machine 2F to the payout control microcomputer. The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above may be applied. In addition, the transmission of various signals such as the glass frame / main body frame opening signal and the winning number abnormality signal described as signals to be transmitted from the payout control microcomputer of the pachinko machine 2F to the game control microcomputer has been described above. You may apply in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

<Modifications and feature points>
Next, modifications and feature points of the embodiment described above are listed.

  (1) When a slot machine (S units), which is an example of a gaming machine, is applied to the above gaming system, for example, there are P units of reels and various sensor parts attached to the reels and a main control board for controlling the reels. Corresponding to the board, other configurations correspond to P game frames. However, the S units do not require the various detection switches 41aF, 701F, 33F, the firing control board 31F, and the firing motor 18F of the game frame shown in FIG.

  A conventional S unit is provided with a credit function. When this function is enabled, the credit is subtracted when the number of bets is set, and the credit is added when a winning occurs. However, there is an upper limit for credits, and when a winning occurs when the number of credits reaches the upper limit value, medals are paid out from the hopper.

  On the other hand, in the S units according to the present embodiment, game points are subtracted when the bet number is set, and game points are added when a winning occurs. Further, when the game points reach a predetermined number, a display for prompting a counting operation is made, and the gaming points are converted into points by performing the counting operation. For this reason, it is not necessary to pay out medals when the credit reaches the upper limit unlike the conventional S units. As a result, it is not necessary to provide a hopper on the S platform according to the present embodiment.

  As a result, the amusement hall does not need to secure a large number of medals, reducing the economic burden. The game arcade is also freed from operations such as replenishment / collection of medals and maintenance operations to deal with clogged medals. The player is relieved from the hassle of inserting medals for each betting operation after the credit is full, and can easily concentrate on the game.

  On the other hand, if S units become medalless, a player who has won a large number of medals will not be able to act to show off his arms by stacking boxes with medals beside the seat. Inconvenience arises. However, in the present embodiment, such a problem can be prevented by providing a function for displaying a dollar box. In addition, it is desirable for the dollar box display in the case of S units to have a large number of medals loaded instead of a large number of balls.

  When S machines are applied as a gaming machine, each type of data is expressed as follows using two types of data, “Points” and “Game Points”, and “Credit” and “Credit Excess Points”. It is also possible to configure a gaming system that is converted. Note that these four types of data are displayed on the S displays 510F.

  First, when a conversion operation (lending operation, saving medal payout operation, or point payout operation) from a prepaid card balance, a saving medal, or a point is detected, each is withdrawn and converted into a game point. The

  A game point is data corresponding to a medal in a conventional slot machine. For this reason, for example, it is desirable to display the number of game points on the display 510F and display the number of medal images corresponding to the game points. For example, when a pseudo-insertion medal operation (for example, an operation of pushing a medal) such that a player touches the medal image and inserts it into the slot machine is detected, the medal image disappears and the game points are subtracted. Instead, one bet is set. By performing such a pseudo medal insertion operation three times, the bet number is set to the maximum value of three.

  Thereafter, when a pseudo medal insertion operation is further detected, a credit is added in accordance with the detection. An upper limit value (for example, 50) is set for the credit, and when the credit exceeds the upper limit value, a credit excess point is added.

  The betting amount setting can be performed using the game points as described above, and can also be performed using credits. In other words, if there is an operation of the single BET switch 5SF, the bet number setting value is incremented by 1, and the credit is decremented by 1. If the MAXBET switch 6SF is operated, the bet number is set to 3, and the credit is subtracted according to the bet number setting.

  As a result of the game, when a winning occurs, a number of points corresponding to the winning is added to the credit. When a winning that exceeds the upper limit of credit occurs, the score for the excess is stored as a credit excess point. This credit excess point corresponds to a medal to be paid out when a winning occurs exceeding the upper limit of credit in the conventional slot machine. For this reason, for example, it is desirable to display the credit excess points on the display 510F and to display the number of medal images corresponding to the credit excess points. Further, it is desirable to change the color of this medal image so that it can be distinguished from the medal image corresponding to the game point.

  Further, it is desirable that the credit excess points are converted into game points by the player's operation. For example, when a pseudo medal conversion operation (for example, an operation of pushing a medal) is performed such that the player touches the medal image corresponding to the credit excess point and converts it to a game point, the medal image disappears and the credit excess Points are subtracted and game points are added.

  Alternatively, if the credit becomes less than the upper limit value, the credit excess point may be automatically converted into credit.

  When the player performs a counting operation, each of the game points, credits, and credit excess points is counted and converted into points. As a result, the player's points are posted as “card possession number + game points + credits + credit excess points”. The “card possession number” is the number of points before conversion (the number of possessions currently owned by the player) that has not been converted into game points.

  In the above description, the four types of data of points, game points, credits, and credit excess points may be stored on both sides by exchanging data between the CU and S units. You may memorize | store only in the S stand side only by CU side. Further, the credit excess point may be a target for dollar box display.

  Moreover, although the example using a credit excess point was demonstrated in the above description, it is not necessary to use a credit excess point. In this case, when the credit limit is exceeded, it may be added to the game points.

  (2) In this embodiment, a game point is added by consuming card frequency. Alternatively, game points are added by consuming stored balls (stored medals). That is, the card frequency or the stored ball is converted into game points. On the other hand, the card power and the stored balls are not converted into points (count balls, count medals). However, the card power and the stored ball may be once converted into points.

  (3) In this embodiment, game points are converted into points by counting operation. The conversion rate in this case is 1: 1. However, the conversion rate in the case of conversion may be other than 1: 1. For example, when 100 game points are converted, 97 points obtained by subtracting three of them may be converted into points. Or you may make it convert into the number of game balls obtained by multiplying a predetermined ratio of less than 100% with respect to a point.

  (4) The recording medium for recording the holding point in an identifiable manner may use a mobile terminal such as a smartphone. In this case, the communication unit for communicating with the mobile terminal is provided in the CU3F, and the CU recognizes the ID stored in the mobile terminal by holding the mobile terminal over the communication unit. The game is made possible by the procedure as described above. On the other hand, at the end of the game, the portable terminal is again held over the communication unit, so that the score at the end of the game is added to the player's score through the ID.

  (5) The operation means for counting game points may be provided on the CU side. In this case, the operation means may be displayed on a touch panel, or may be constituted by a physical switch.

  (6) When an uncounted game point remains when the card return operation is performed, it is desirable to display a message prompting the counting on the P-unit or the CU side display. However, instead of such a configuration, when an uncounted game point remains when the card return operation is performed, the counting display is automatically started and the display on the P table or the CU side is used. It may be notified that automatic counting has started because there are still uncounted game points, or that, in addition, the card will be returned after completion of automatic counting.

  Alternatively, when an uncounted game point remains when the card return operation is performed, it is determined that there is a possibility that the player may leave the table temporarily, and the display (CU side or P stand side) You may display the message which confirms whether it is temporary leaving. Further, the display device may be constituted by a touch panel so that the player can input a response to the message. Furthermore, if the response input is the end of the game, a message prompting the counting operation is displayed. On the other hand, if the response input is temporarily away from the desk, the card may be temporarily ejected while the ID of the card is stored on the CU side, the P platform side, or both. Thereafter, when a card with the same ID is inserted, the game is resumed from the original state.

  (7) The counting time from the start of the counting operation to the completion of the counting display is based on the game points when the game points are less than the first reference value and when the game points exceed the first reference value. The increasing rate of the counting time may be reduced. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect of counting display as if counting real spheres, and it is possible to prevent an excessive amount of time until counting is completed due to an increase in game points. Further, when the game points exceed a certain reference value, all the counting times may be the same. Alternatively, the same counting time may be adopted regardless of the number of game points without providing a reference value.

  (8) In the above-described embodiment, the glass door 6F opening detection and the front frame 5F opening detection are detected by the separate glass door opening detection switch 12F and the front frame opening detection switch 13F. Alternatively, both may be detected by a common detection switch.

  (9) As the counting operation means for counting the game balls, one that exhibits a counting function when operated a predetermined number of times twice or more may be employed. As a result, erroneous operation can be prevented. Further, in this case, one function may be used to exhibit another function different from the counting function. For example, when there is no operation for a predetermined time (for example, within 1 second) after the operation is performed once, a function for turning on a lamp for calling a store clerk is exhibited, and 2 within 1 second from the operation. When the second operation is detected, it is conceivable to perform the counting function.

  (10) When the counting operation button is operated for less than a predetermined time (short-time operation), for example, the first number of balls is counted, and when operated for a predetermined time or longer (long-time operation), the first operation is performed according to the operation time. It is desirable to control so that the number of balls larger than the number of balls of 1 is counted. For example, it is conceivable that 100 balls are counted in the short-time operation, while a predetermined number exceeding 100 balls, for example, 200 balls or 400 balls, is counted in the long-time operation. Also, the number of game points to be counted may be controlled to be different depending on the long press time of the counting operation button. For example, it is conceivable that 100 balls start to be counted by long-pressing for 1 second, and if the long-pressing continues for 5 seconds as it is, all the remaining balls are counted. Alternatively, it may be controlled such that a predetermined number is counted by one operation and all remaining balls are counted by the fifth operation.

  (11) (A) The fact that game points equal to or greater than the “predetermined number of points” are not stored does not count game points even if a counting operation is performed, and a notification to that effect is given. Also, (B) when the game points are counted until the stored game points reach the “predetermined number of points”, no more counting is possible, and control is performed so that a notification to that effect is given. Is desirable. The same number may be adopted as the predetermined number of points in these two cases (A) and (B), that is, the reference value may be different.

  (12) When the counting operation is performed while the ball is being fired, it is desirable to control the counting operation to be invalidated when the number of game balls at that time is equal to or less than a reference value. However, even if the number of game balls when the counting operation is detected during the ball firing exceeds the reference value, the number of balls counted in one counting operation is set to a predetermined number. In some cases, the counting operation may be invalidated when the value obtained by subtracting the predetermined number from the number of game balls when the counting operation is detected does not satisfy the reference value.

  Further, in order to invalidate the counting operation during the game, it is desirable to determine whether or not the game is in progress based on whether or not the ball firing operation is detected. Instead of this, or in addition to this, whether the number of in-game balls (floating ball floating in the game area 27F) is 0 (not in game) or not (in game) It may be determined whether or not. In addition, it is also possible to determine whether or not the game is in progress based on whether or not the variable display device is changing, whether or not it is a big hit, whether or not the attacker is open.

  Further, “in game” when S units are applied as a gaming machine to invalidate the counting operation during the game is, for example, a period from the start of rotation of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF to the stop. . Alternatively, it is a period from when the start operation is detected until the reels 2LF, 2CF, 2RF are stopped.

  (13) When the number of game balls is greater than a predetermined number regardless of whether or not a big hit is being made, a display prompting a counting operation may be performed.

  In addition, if the counting operation is not detected even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display for prompting the counting operation, the game ball may be forcibly stopped, and the firing is not forcibly stopped. It may be.

  (14) Referring to FIG. 34, the P platform includes a counting ball counter that temporarily stores the counted counting balls (held balls), but does not include a counter that stores the cumulative value of the counting balls. . However, a counting ball cumulative storage counter that stores the cumulative value of counting balls may be provided on the P platform side. In addition, the CU side is provided with an area for storing card holding balls (counting balls). If a holding ball is recorded on the inserted card itself, this area holds the card holding ball. The current number of players' balls, including balls, is stored. For this reason, only in this area, the number of counting balls counted by the player in the current game cannot be specified. Therefore, an area for storing the number of counting balls counted by the player in this game may be further provided on the CU side. In this case, the CU adds balls to the area based on the information on the number of balls that are sent from the P cars after the game starts, and when the balls are converted into game balls, Subtract the holding ball.

  (15) The display for prompting the counting operation may be a display of “Please play the game after the game balls remain, so please return it” or display the counting button 28F on the screen. The display may be blinking.

  (16) When the number of game balls is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (3,000 balls or more), control is performed so that “control for performing a display prompting a counting operation on a display device” is executed as “predetermined notification control”. Is desirable. Here, “prompt counting operation” means, for example, a message that displays “Counting operation because the number of game balls has reached the upper limit” or a message that simply displays “Counting operation is required.” It may be. Further, the “predetermined notification control” may be a control for outputting a notification sound for prompting a counting operation from a speaker. Further, the “notification” may not be “notification for prompting the counting operation” but simply notify that “the number of game balls has reached the upper limit” (not to prompt for the counting operation). .

  Further, when the game point is equal to or greater than a predetermined first reference value (3000 balls or more), “predetermined notification control” is performed, and thereafter, the game point is set to a second reference value greater than the first reference value. It may be controlled so that the game is disabled when the game point is reached, and the game is permitted (no firing prohibited) until the game point reaches the second reference value from the first reference value. In the case where the gaming machine is a slot machine, the inoperable state can be realized by controlling the start lever to operate so that the reel does not start rotating or the betting number setting is invalidated.

  (17) When a game using game points is being performed (while the ball is being fired), control is performed so that the counting operation is not validated unless there are more than a predetermined number of game points (for example, 250 points). It is desirable to do. Here, the predetermined number of points is not limited to 250 points, and may be any number as long as it is 1 point or more. However, for example, when an excessively small number of points such as one point is set, a malfunction occurs when the timing of firing and the timing of counting occur almost simultaneously. Alternatively, if a counting operation is detected when the number of points is equal to or less than a predetermined number (for example, 10 points or less) and the counting operation is detected, 5 points are left for launching and the remaining points are counted. You may control to.

  In addition, when it is detected that a player who notices that the counting operation has been invalidated because there are no more points left than the predetermined number of points has been stopped, it is invalidated first. The counting operation may be activated to automatically start the counting operation. That is, in this case, the player who notices that the counting operation has been invalidated only needs to stop the firing operation, and does not need to perform the counting operation again.

  (18) In order to change the number of game points to be converted by one operation according to the time for which the count button is kept pressed, for example, when a long press (for example, continuous operation for 1 second or more), While all are counted, only 200 balls may be counted in a short press (for example, continuous operation for less than 1 second). However, in this case, when the remaining number of game balls is small, for example, when it is less than 200 balls, it is desirable that all game balls are counted by operating the counting button.

  (19) Depending on the remaining number of game points, when the number of points counted by one short pressing operation of the counting button is made different, for example, the following may be considered. For example, when the number of game points is less than 200, all the game points are counted by one short press operation of the counting button. When the game points are 200 or more and less than 1000, 200 points are counted by one short press operation. When the game points are 1000 or more and less than 5000, 1000 points are counted by one short press operation. When the game points are 5000 or more and less than 10,000, 2000 points are counted by one short press operation. When the number of game points is 10,000 or more, 2500 points are counted by one short press operation. The above numerical values are specific examples and can be set as appropriate.

  (20) When counting game balls (game points) and converting the points, not only counting display but also counting sound may be output from the speaker. In addition, when counting the game points, it is conceivable to display an image in which balls are dropped one by one from the ball storage tray to the counter.

  (21) Timing for performing conversion display (display indicating that game balls are counted and the number of balls is increased) based on a counting operation and subtracting game points on the data The timing for adding the points can be varied. The calculation may be executed after the conversion display is completed. For this purpose, count data may be transmitted from the gaming machine to the CU after the conversion display is completed. It should be noted that such a modification can be similarly applied to the case where the points are converted into game points.

  (22) In the present embodiment, in the communication between the CU and the gaming machine, a command-response method is adopted in which the CU is a primary station and the gaming machine is a secondary station. The relationship may be reversed. Alternatively, instead of adopting such a communication system having a master-slave relationship, a system may be employed in which both send data to the other party when a request to communicate occurs.

  (23) In FIG. 34 or 71, the game balls (game points) are stored on both the gaming machine side and the CU side, but the game balls (game points) are stored only on the game machine side, and the CU It may not be stored on the side. On the other hand, the card holding balls (scoring points) are stored only on the CU side, but may also be stored on the gaming machine side. In particular, game balls (game points) are stored only on the gaming machine side, while card holding balls (points) are stored only on the CU side to clarify the division of data storage management. Good.

  (24) The counting display and various notifications performed on the display 54F may be similarly performed on the display 312F.

  (25) In the CU, the stored number of game balls is updated based on the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number) and the value of the subtracted ball number counter (subtracted ball number) transmitted from the P platform side. When the number of game balls stored is subtracted based on the value of the counting ball number counter transmitted from the P platform side, if the value of the number of game balls becomes negative, an error (abnormal) determination is made. Then, error processing may be performed. As a specific example of error processing, error notification is performed by an abnormality notification lamp or the like, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or hall server 801F (in this case, for hall use). An error notification may be performed by the management computer or hall server 801F).

  (26) When a lending operation or a conversion operation (lending operation) from a holding point (held ball) to a gaming point (game ball) is detected, the gaming points may be counted up one by one. In order to shorten the waiting time of the player, a display may be made so that a plurality of points (for example, 25 points equivalent to 100 yen) are counted up. Conversely, when a game point counting operation is executed, a display may be made so that the points are counted up by a plurality of points. Furthermore, the number of units for counting up and displaying game points or points may be set from a plurality of types. In the setting, it is conceivable to use a touch panel of P or S display devices.

  (27) When the counting operation is executed, the points may be counted up at an accelerated rate when a predetermined time has elapsed since the counting up of the points was started. Alternatively, a speed-up button for accelerating the count display may be displayed on the touch panel display on the CU side or the gaming machine side, and the operation may be detected to display the acceleration count display. By performing the acceleration counting display of the points in this way, the waiting time of the player when counting a large number of gaming points can be shortened.

  (28) A touch sensor may be provided on the hitting operation handle, and the counting operation may be invalidated while the touch sensor detects that the player is holding the hitting operation handle. Invalidating the counting operation means detecting the counting operation but not executing the counting operation based on the detection output, or not detecting the counting operation itself. Or, if the player does not invalidate the counting operation only by touching the hitting operation handle, and if the counting operation is disabled if the hitting operation handle is turned to such an extent that the ball firing drive pulse is output. Good.

  In these cases, when a counting operation is detected, a message “Please release handle” may be displayed on the display of the gaming machine or CU. Alternatively, when the counting operation button is displayed as an icon on the touch panel screen, the counting operation button may be grayed out to notify the player that the operation is impossible.

  (29) At least one or all of the ball lending button, the return button, the replay button, and the counting button may be provided on the gaming machine side, or may be provided on the CU side. Further, it is conceivable that the button is displayed on the display device on the gaming machine side or the CU side described as the touch panel type display device.

  (30) The sequence control shown in FIG. 36 to FIG. 45 is not limited to the transmission / reception sequence between control devices in a single gaming machine such as CU3F, P stand 2F, S stand 2SF, etc., particularly for processing related to security. For example, the present invention may be applied to a transmission / reception sequence between a plurality of gaming machines such as a CU3F, a P stand 2F, a jet counter, and a POS terminal.

  (31) In the above-described embodiment, the identity of the player is determined based on the card ID. However, instead of or in addition to this, the identity of the player is determined based on the biomass of the player's fingerprint or retina. May be performed.

  (32) In the above-described embodiment, a so-called enclosed circulation type gaming machine (P stand 2F and S stand 2SF) is shown, but it is not limited thereto, and a game medium (such as a pachinko ball) is provided from the upper part of the island. It may be a general gaming machine that is supplied to a gaming machine and from which a gaming medium is paid out by winning. Specifically, the game is performed by hitting the balls stored in the ball storage tray into the game area, and when winning, the balls are paid out to the ball storage tray, and are paid out to the ball storage tray at the end of the game. Pachinko machines that can exchange prizes using balls may also be used. Also, the coins stored in the coin tray are inserted into the coin slot, the number of bets is input and set, and the reel is rotated and stopped by operating the start lever. When a display result winning that is sometimes displayed has occurred, a slit machine may be used in which coins are paid out to a coin tray, and paid out to the coin tray at the end of the game so that prizes can be exchanged using the coin. That is, a gaming machine that can be played using game media (pachinko balls, coins) and that pays out game media to the player in accordance with the result of the game may be used.

  (33) In the above-described embodiment, the number of game balls and game points are directly added by the occurrence of a win, but instead, the points are added by the occurrence of a win, and the added points are calculated. It may be controlled so that the number of game balls and game points are added after being withdrawn.

  (34) In the above-described embodiment, when the value is deducted within the range of the valuable value owned by the player (prepaid balance, holding ball, savings ball) and the corresponding game points are added, In the above example, game points having the same value are added, but instead, for example, control may be performed so that game points corresponding to consumption tax are added to the value actually deducted.

  (35) In the above-described embodiment, authentication is performed using various authentication keys, but authentication may be performed using, for example, an authentication ID instead of the various authentication keys.

  (36) You may comprise the above-mentioned indicator 54F and 510F with a display with a touch panel. Further, the information transmitted / received between the P platform and the CU is not limited to that described in the above-described embodiment, and it is a game that determines what information is output from the P platform to the CU. You may enable it to perform input setting by touch operation with the touch panel of the display units 54F and 510F.

  Also, in the S stand 2SF, the information output from the S stand 2SF is converted and transmitted to Hallcon in the same manner as the P stand 2F described above. As information to be converted, for example, a big bonus prize or a regular bonus prize And winning information such as various small role winnings, information indicating that the replay time is in progress, the number of additions and subtractions in FIG. 71, the number of game starts, and the like. Further, the information to be converted may be the number of coins to be paid out when coins are paid out with winning.

  (37) In the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine determines that “the gaming device (CU) is a predetermined player with the gaming points as the holding points on the condition that the conversion processing for all gaming points is completed (game points = 0)”. Processing (processing that accepts a card at the gift exchange and consumes the points specified by the card and enables the exchange of the gift, and inserts the card discharged from the CU into another CU connected to another gaming machine. A validating means for validating a recording medium processing operation (card return operation (operation of the card return button 322F)) ”.

  Here, the enabling means is, for example, “means for confirming game point 0 on the P platform side and transmitting card discharge operation permission ON to CU” or “game when receiving card return notification from CU”. It is determined whether or not the number of balls is 0, and in the case of 0, a means for validating card return by returning a card return response to the CU ", and further," game by performing counting operation etc. " It is a concept that includes “means for establishing the condition that the number of balls = 0 and consequently the card return is valid”.

(38) When the payout control unit 171F receives a value (= 63) in which the round flag is raised, the abnormality control process is executed by adopting one or more of those listed in the following a to c You may control as follows.
a Display unit (for example, a 7-segment display 50F and a variable display device that variably displays identification information (design)) by the payout control unit 171F or the main control unit 161F that receives abnormality information from the payout control unit 171F Is displayed.
b CU3F that has received the abnormality information from the payout control unit 171F performs abnormality notification such as an error number.
c An abnormality notification such as an error number is performed in a host device such as a hall management computer that has received the abnormality information from the CU3F.

  (39) In the present embodiment, information specifying the front frame 5F, storage information, resale information, disposal information, and the like are included as history information of the front frame 5F stored in association with the payout control security chip ID in the payout side table. An example is shown. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and for example, maintenance information, repair information, and the like may be included as history information of the front frame 5F. Similarly, in the present embodiment, information specifying the game board 26F, storage information, resale information, discard information, and the like are stored as history information of the game board 26F stored in the main control side table in association with the main control security chip ID. Examples included are shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, maintenance information, repair information, and the like may be included as the history information of the game board 26F.

  (40) In the present embodiment, after a manufacturer, a warehouse company, or the like completes operations such as shipping, installation, and storage, necessary information (for example, shown in FIG. 56, for example, from a terminal connected to the machine history management center 800AF). The delivery side table and the main control side table are updated by inputting the shipping date, installation date and time, removal date, sales company name, and disposal date). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a manufacturer or a warehouse company fills in application documents with necessary information and sends the information to the history management center 800AF. The payout side table and the main control side table may be updated by inputting necessary information from a terminal or the like. Note that a terminal connected to the machine history management center 800AF is also a terminal connected directly to the machine history management center 800AF (for example, an internal terminal in the machine history management center 800AF) via a communication line. It may be a terminal (for example, a terminal of a warehouse company or a second-hand company connected via the Internet).

  (41) In this embodiment, an example in which the payout side table and the main control side table are stored in one large capacity storage device 8005F has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the payout side table and the main control side table are stored separately in a plurality of large capacity storage devices, the large capacity storage device that stores the payout side table and the main control side table are stored. It may be divided into a mass storage device. Further, the payout side table and the main control side table stored in the large-capacity storage device can erase the history information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F for each security chip ID. Even if it is associated with a pair of security chip IDs, the history information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F can be deleted separately for each security chip ID. Thereby, even if it is the front frame 5F and the game board 26F (the period used is long compared with the front frame 5F) from which the period used is different, it can delete separately, respectively, and it can manage appropriately, respectively. it can.

  (42) In the present embodiment, an example has been shown in which a manufacturer other than the hall, a warehouse company, etc. update the payout side table and the main control side table by inputting necessary information to the machine history management center 800AF. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the payout side table and the main control side table may be updated by inputting information necessary for the hall itself to the machine history management center 800AF.

  (43) In this embodiment, when a second-hand trader resells the front frame 5F and the game board 26F to another hall and installs them, the resale information is stored as history information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F. Indicated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when moving to another hole in the same group as the hole in which the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are installed (for example, a hole with the same corporate code), the front frame 5F and the game board The movement information may be stored in the history information as a simple movement of 26F (management state (status) from “installation” to “installation”). That is, even if the installation of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F moves between holes of the same corporate code, it is not determined as abnormal. In addition, if the movement of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F is permitted between halls of the same corporate code and within the same prefecture, and if it moves to other prefectures between halls of the same corporate code, the same processing as resale is performed. May be.

  (44) In this embodiment, the history management center 800AF is set as follows, for example. In the machine history management center 800AF, a user registered in the system and authenticated by clear authentication is logged into the system. Authentication at login is as follows: (a) The specified user ID exists in the system. (B) The specified user is within the account expiration date. (C) The specified user is not account-locked. (D) The entered password matches the password of the specified user ID. (E) If the current password is not within the validity period, the user is logged in, but only the user's own password change and logout can be used, and a message is displayed indicating that the password needs to be changed. If the password is changed, log out to confirm the use of the new password.

  When the authentication is successful, the history management center 800AF clears the number of login failures and the continuous login error date / time of the user. On the other hand, the history management center 800AF records the number of login failures when the authentication fails or when the user actually exists. Each time the number of login failures reaches [the maximum number of login attempts] (when it becomes an integer multiple), the date and time when the account is locked is set.

  The history management center 800AF updates / sets the password expiration date when (a) a new user is registered, (b) when the password is cleared, and (c) when the user changes the password. The updated / set password is valid from that point until the [Password Validity Period] elapses.

  If the authentication fails [the maximum number of login attempts] in the same session, the history management center 800AF transitions to the login NG screen instead of the login screen and does not attempt to log in.

  The history management center 800AF warns that at the time of login, the password may expire if the password of the user expires within the [password expiration warning period]. The warning is displayed on the login completion screen, for example, but if there is no message to be displayed on the login completion screen, the login completion screen is not displayed and the screen transits to the HOME menu.

  The machine history management center 800AF determines that (a) the number of failed login attempts by a user exceeds the [number of failed user login failures] (permanent account lock state), or (b) ] Has not passed (temporary account lock state), lock account.

  The history management center 800AF updates / sets the account expiration date when (a) a new user is registered or (b) the validity period is updated from the user information screen. The account can be used during the period from the account activation start date to the account activation end date.

  The history management center 800AF sets, for example, 20 as the maximum number of accounts that can be generated at one time at the time of initial introduction. Here, [the maximum number of login attempts] is the number of times that the account is locked for a certain period of time due to consecutive failed login attempts. [User Invalidation Login Failure Count] is the number of times the account is permanently locked due to consecutive login attempt failures, and is 100, for example, at the time of initial introduction. [Login attempt refusal time] is a period in which the account is locked for a certain period of time due to failed login attempts, and is 30 minutes at the time of initial introduction. [Password Validity Period] is a password validity period set when the password is changed, and is 90 days at the time of initial introduction. [Password Expiration Warning Period] is a period in which an account password is about to expire, and is 14 days at the time of initial introduction.

  The machine history management center 800AF sets the minimum number of characters of a password to 8 characters, for example, at the time of initial introduction, and sets the number of generations (including the current) to prevent re-use of passwords to, for example, 3 generations at the time of initial introduction. The history management center 800AF is registered on the condition that the operator information of the corresponding user is registered in order to register the user information. The business operator information includes attribute information such as the business type and address of each business operator involved in the work of the history management center 800AF.

  The machine history management center 800AF cannot basically cancel the management state (status) of the gaming machine after input, and if an error occurs due to an erroneous operation or the like, a comment is entered in the “total machine history remarks column”. Make it clear so that others can understand. However, since there is a possibility of erroneous insertion, it is possible to cancel only the status entered from the game machine status update screen. When revocation is possible, control is performed by authority so that only a limited number of people can perform revocation. Further, when searching the machine history in order to change the management state (status) of the gaming machine, the machine history management center 800AF searches only for the latest management state (status) of the gaming machine.

The machine history management center 800AF manages the types of data and the retention periods for each type as follows, for example.
(1) Account-related data (for example, business operator information, account information, etc.): Basically, control is performed only by logical deletion, not physical deletion.
(2) Master information such as gaming machine model (for example, gaming machine model master): Basically, control is performed only by logical deletion, and physical deletion is not performed.
(3) Information that is the basis of machine history management (for example, gaming machine chip shipment information, gaming machine shipment information, etc.): Basically, changes can be made until management is started, but thereafter editing is impossible. , Manage permanently.
(4) Machine history information (for example, history information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F): Since it is basically input of fact information, changes after input are not allowed and are managed permanently.
(5) Information notified from the card unit key management center (for example, fraud detection, etc.): Information detected by the system, and is not allowed to be changed and managed permanently.
(6) Input journals to the system (for example, Web input log, online input log, system linkage input file, etc.): 14 days are stored for each type of input and each node.
(7) Output journal from system (for example, Web output log, online output log, system transmission file, etc.): 7 days are kept for each type of output and for each node.
(8) Record of business communication of concentration / distribution (for example, distribution schedule, etc.): Information is retained for about 7 days.
(9) System temporary file (for example, CSV upload file): Deleted after application behavior. However, it is deleted when it is confirmed that the cleaning batch is unnecessary in consideration of abnormal termination.
(10) Model information that has not been updated for a long period of time (for example, model information that has not been updated for a long period of time): Holds two generations.

  In the history management center 800AF, regarding the abnormality in the management state (status), information on the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in which the relationship between the management state (status) before the update and the management state (status) after the update is abnormal. Can be extracted, or only the information can be output to a file. Therefore, based on the information output in the file, it is possible to notify the user of management state (status) update omission and to update the management state (status) correctly. It should be noted that a user whose management status (status) is not updated may be contacted, and may be addressed after confirming the correct management status (status). Further, the machine history management center 800AF performs notification such as contacting all of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F that are currently in an abnormal management state (status). In addition, the latest information (at the time of file output) of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F that have become abnormal can be downloaded from a terminal connected to the machine history management center 800AF.

  In the history management center 800AF, the history information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F for which the management status (status) has not been updated for a long period of time becomes a management status (status) other than “discard” or “other”. It is possible to extract only the information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F, or to output only the information to a file. For abnormalities in which the management state (status) has not been updated for a long time, information at the time of processing is extracted by batch processing and downloaded from a terminal connected to the history management center 800AF. In addition, a threshold for the maximum number of files (at the time of initial construction: 100,000 records) is set for one file to be downloaded, and when the threshold is exceeded, output is performed to another file. Furthermore, when downloading a file, the results of processing on the same day are collected and output as a compressed file.

  (45) In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the removal information is input to the history management center 800AF has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and used movement information, discard information, trade-in information, and the like are stored in the history management center 800AF. When the information is input, the removal information may be automatically registered in the history management center 800AF. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to manage the history of the gaming machine by assuming that it has been removed from the hall, and to reduce the burden of inputting the removal information from the hall to the history management system.

  (46) In the present embodiment, the configuration is shown in which the shipping information is registered in the machine history management center 800AF via the communication line after the gaming machine manufacturer ships the gaming machine to the hall. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration may also be adopted in which shipping information is automatically registered in the machine history management center 800AF when the gaming machine manufacturer inputs information for shipping gaming machines to the hall. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the shipping state history from being forgotten without being registered.

  (47) In the present embodiment, when a gaming machine including the front frame 5F and the gaming board 26F constituting the P board 2F is installed in the hall, the enclosed circulation pachinko machine (P machine 2F) shipped by the gaming machine maker, The history management center 800AF stores the gaming machine installation information (operation information) notified from the P table 2F in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided in each, and is notified from the stored information and the P table 2F. Checking with game machine installation information. If the machine history management center 800AF is abnormal as a result of the collation, for example, an error notification is performed by an abnormality notification lamp or a display 312F, or an error has occurred in the hall management computer or the hall server 801F. The error notification signal is transmitted, and the abnormality is notified. However, the machine history management center 800AF is not limited to the configuration for notifying the abnormality as a result of the collation, but the P frame 2F or the front frame 5F constituting the P table 2F and the game board 26F determined to be abnormal. It may be configured to prohibit gaming. The machine history management center 800AF may be configured to temporarily allow a game on the P table 2F for a certain period of time even if it is determined to be abnormal, so as not to hinder the hall business activities.

  (48) In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the security related information is stored in the register in the payout control circuit 171aF has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be stored in a register (for example, the data reception register 723bF) in the communication control circuit 171b. As a result, the security-related information is stored as encrypted in the communication control circuit 171b, and the security is further improved.

  (49) In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67 and FIG. 68, the P base itself determines that the P base 2F has been connected to the game board development jig 3EF or the development CU 3DF in the past, The configuration in which the flag indicating the determination result is transmitted to the commercial CU3F and detected by the SC325bF has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The P base itself determines that the P base 2F has been connected to the game board development jig 3EF or the development CU 3DF in the past, and the P base itself detects and notifies. Also in the configuration, the configuration may be such that it is detected by the SC 325bF of the CU3F based on the identification ID, based on the identification ID, that the P board 2F has been connected to the game board development jig 3EF or the development CU3DF in the past.

  It should be thought that embodiment disclosed this time is an illustration and restrictive at no points. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Slot machine, 40 Game control board, 200 Board case, 400 Seal seal, 450A-450D Solvent use display part, 451 1st identification information display part, 452 2nd identification information display part, 453A, 453B Hologram display part, 1001 Pachinko Gaming machine, 1031 main board, 1200 main board case, 1400 sealing sticker, 1450A-1450D solvent use display part, 1451 first identification information display part, 1452 second identification information display part, 2F pachinko machine, 2SF slot machine, 3F card Unit, 16F main control board, 17F payout control board, 26F game board, 54F, 312F display, 309F card insertion / discharge port, 319F replay button, 320F IR light receiving unit, 321F lending button, 322F card return button, 1 1F main control unit, 325F display control unit, 171F dispensing control unit, 50F, 50SF 7-segment indicator, 323F CU control unit, 12F glass door opening detection switch, 13F front frame opening detection switch.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing a game,
There are a plurality of specific areas for allowing game media to pass through and providing game value based on the game media passing through,
And the circuitry board,
A wiring for electrically connecting the circuitry substrate,
A base plate case for accommodating the circuit board,
A sealing seal used for sealing the substrate case ;
Control means provided on the circuit board;
With
The seal seal is
A solvent use specific part that leaves a trace of the solvent being used when a predetermined solvent for reducing the adhesive strength of the seal is used ;
A first identification information display unit in which the identification information of the seal seal is displayed so as to be visually readable, and a second identification information display that can be read by a predetermined reader by encoding the identification information of the seal seal. And
When the front Symbol sealing seal is attached to the board case, the solvent used identification unit is disposed in a portion that does not overlap with the wiring,
The substrate case has a seal sticker attaching portion having a plurality of attaching surfaces,
The second identification information display unit is arranged in a portion not located at a boundary portion between one pasting surface and the other pasting surface when the seal sticker is pasted across the plurality of pasting surfaces,
When the seal sticker is pasted so as to straddle the plurality of pasting surfaces, the solvent use specifying unit and the second identification information display unit are arranged in a part corresponding to one pasting surface,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the control means can output a signal that can specify the passage of a game medium to a specific area .